DELL 1355CNW User Manual

Dellâ„¢ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction  
Color Printer  
User's Guide  
www.dell.com | support.dell.com  
   
Contents  
Dellâ„¢ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color  
User's Guide .................................................1  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21  
1
User's Guide 23  
2
3
4
Finding Information  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25  
29  
Product Features  
About the Printer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
33  
33  
Front View .  
Rear View  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
34  
Space Requirements  
34  
Contents  
1
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
36  
36  
36  
37  
Operator Panel .  
Securing the Printer .  
Ordering Supplies  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Up Printer (Printer Setup) ...........39  
5
6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
41  
Connecting Your Printer  
Connecting Printer to Computer or Network  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
44  
44  
45  
Direct Connection  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Network Connection  
Turning On the Printer .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
47  
48  
Connecting the Telephone Line  
7
Setting the IP Address  
51  
Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel  
Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
53  
54  
55  
The Operator Panel .  
The Tool Box  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Verifying the IP Settings .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
56  
Printing and Checking the Printer Settings Page .  
The Operator Panel .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
57  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
57  
2
Contents  
The Tool Box  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
57  
8
9
59  
Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) 66  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running  
Windows 69  
Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status (For Network Connection  
Setup)  
The Operator Panel  
The Tool Box  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
69  
.
.
.
.
Disabling the firewall before installing your printer 70  
Inserting the Drivers and Utility CD .  
Direct Connection Setup  
.
.
.
.
.
.
71  
Network Connection Setup .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
74  
79  
Printer Only) . 85  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using Wizard Setup to Configure Wireless Settings 86  
Using Advanced Setup to Configure Wireless Settings 88  
Setting up a New Wireless Network Environment for Your  
Computer (When you need to setup your wireless connectivity  
with your computer)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
97  
Setting Up for Shared Printing  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
107  
Contents  
3
Point and Print  
Peer-to-Peer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
109  
112  
.
10 Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running  
Installing the Drivers and Software .  
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.11 118  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
117  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
123  
Overview .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool .  
125  
Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
.
.
126  
129  
Setting Up From Web Browser .  
Setting Up From Operator Panel  
Page Display Format .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
129  
129  
130  
132  
Top Frame .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Left Frame  
Right Frame .  
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
133  
133  
135  
137  
138  
160  
Details of the Menu Items  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printer Status .  
Printer Jobs .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printer Settings .  
Print Server Settings  
4
Contents  
Print Volume  
Address Book  
Tray Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
179  
179  
186  
12 Print Media Guidelines  
Paper  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
189  
190  
191  
191  
192  
192  
193  
Paper Characteristics  
Recommended Paper  
Unacceptable Paper .  
Selecting Paper  
.
.
Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead .  
Printing on Letterhead  
Loading Letterhead .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Selecting Pre-Punched Paper .  
Envelopes  
Labels  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
194  
195  
196  
.
.
Storing Print Media  
Identifying Print Media and Specifications  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
196  
196  
198  
199  
Supported Paper Sizes .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Supported Paper Types  
Paper Type Specifications .  
13 Loading Print Media  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
201  
201  
Capacity  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Print Media Dimensions  
201  
Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) 202  
Loading an Envelope in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) 207  
Contents  
5
Loading Letterhead .  
.
.
Loading an Envelope in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) 214  
Loading Letterhead .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
217  
Manual Duplex Printing (Windows Printer Driver Only) 218  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
219  
The Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) .  
Using the Output Tray Extension  
.
221  
14 Operator Panel  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
223  
Using the Operator Panel Buttons .  
.
223  
Printing a Panel Settings Page  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
225  
225  
225  
The Operator Panel .  
The Tool Box  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing 227  
15 Printing  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
229  
Tips for Successful Printing .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
229  
229  
Tips on Storing Print Media  
Avoiding Paper Jams .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Sending a Job to Print .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
229  
Canceling a Print Job  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
230  
Canceling From the Operator Panel  
230  
Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows 230  
6
Contents  
Direct Print Using the USB Storage Device  
.
.
.
.
.
.
231  
Supported File Formats  
231  
Printing a Report Page  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
232  
232  
232  
The Operator Panel  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printer Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
233  
Using the Tool Box to Change the Printer Settings 233  
Adjusting the Language  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
233  
16 Copying  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
235  
235  
235  
237  
Loading Paper for Copying  
Preparing a Document  
.
.
.
Making Copies From the ADF .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Copy Options  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
238  
238  
238  
239  
240  
241  
242  
243  
244  
244  
245  
247  
248  
249  
Number of Copies  
Color  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Collated .  
.
.
.
.
Reduce/Enlarge  
Document Size .  
Original Type  
Lighter/Darker  
Sharpness  
Auto Exposure  
Multiple-Up .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Margin Top/Bottom .  
Margin Left/Right .  
Margin Middle  
.
.
.
.
Contents  
7
Changing the Default Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
250  
250  
Setting the Power Saver Timer Option  
17 Scanning  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
253  
Scanning Overview  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Scanning From the Operator Panel  
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver  
Overview  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
271  
279  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Confirming a Login name and Password .  
Specifying a Destination to Store the Document  
Configuring the Printer Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Sending the Scanned File on the Network .  
.
.
Scanning to USB Storage Device .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
280  
Sending an E-Mail with the Scanned Image  
Setting an E-Mail Address Book .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
281  
281  
282  
.
.
.
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File  
18 Faxing  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
285  
Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
285  
285  
286  
286  
Keypad Letters and Numbers  
Changing Numbers or Names  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Inserting a Pause .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Configuring Fax Initial Settings .  
Setting Your Country  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
286  
.
.
.
.
286  
8
Contents  
Setting the Printer ID .  
287  
Setting the Time and Date  
Changing the Clock Mode  
Setting Sounds  
Speaker Volume  
Ringer Volume  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
289  
289  
.
Specifying the Fax Settings .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
290  
291  
294  
Changing the Fax Settings Options  
Available Fax Settings Options .  
.
.
.
Advanced Fax Settings .  
.
.
.
.
.
Sending a Fax  
.
.
.
.
.
.
296  
Loading an Original Document on the ADF  
296  
Resolution  
Document Type .  
Lighter/Darker  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
298  
298  
299  
300  
301  
302  
.
Sending a Fax Manually  
.
.
.
Confirming Transmissions  
Automatic Redialing  
Sending a Delayed Fax  
.
Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Example  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Receiving a Fax  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
308  
308  
308  
309  
About Receiving Modes  
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes  
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode .  
Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode 309  
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone/Fax or Ans/Fax  
Mode .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
309  
Contents  
9
Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone 309  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
311  
311  
Receiving Faxes in the Memory  
.
.
.
.
Polling Receive .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Automatic Dialing  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
311  
312  
313  
314  
314  
Speed Dialing .  
Storing a Number for Speed Dialing .  
Sending a Fax Using a Speed Dial  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Group Dialing .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Group Dial  
Editing Group Dial  
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing (Multi-address Transmission)  
316  
Printing an Address Book List  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
316  
Other Ways to Fax .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
316  
316  
319  
Using the Secure Receiving Mode .  
Using a Computer Modem  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Printing a Report .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
319  
320  
Changing Setting Options .  
19 Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
.
.
.
323  
Printer Settings Report  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
323  
323  
324  
327  
Printer Information .  
Menu Settings  
Reports .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10  
Contents  
TCP/IP Settings .  
Tray Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
328  
328  
329  
331  
.
.
Defaults Settings .  
Fax Settings  
.
.
.
Printer Maintenance  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
333  
333  
336  
336  
337  
338  
338  
340  
341  
341  
342  
342  
343  
System Settings  
Date & Time  
.
.
.
.
.
Paper Density  
Adjust BTR  
.
.
.
Adjust Fuser  
Registration Adjustment  
Adjust Altitude  
.
.
.
.
.
Non-Dell Toner .  
BTR Refresh Mode .  
Web Link Customization  
TCP/IP Settings .  
Tray Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
EWS (Embedded Web Server or Dell Printer Configuration Web  
Tool)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
345  
345  
347  
348  
351  
Scan Defaults  
Fax Defaults  
Copy Defaults  
Fax Settings  
Diagnosis  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
356  
356  
356  
356  
357  
Chart Print  
Environment Sensor Info .  
Clean Developer  
.
.
.
.
.
Refresh Mode  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Resetting Defaults .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
357  
Contents  
11  
20 Understanding the Printer Menus  
.
.
.
.
.
359  
Defaults Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
359  
359  
364  
369  
371  
Copy Defaults .  
Scan Defaults .  
Fax Defaults  
.
USB Print Defaults  
Tray Settings .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
371  
MPF .  
.
.
371  
Reports/List  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
373  
373  
373  
374  
374  
374  
374  
374  
374  
System Settings  
Panel Settings  
.
.
.
Job History  
.
.
Error History  
.
Color Test Page .  
Protocol Monitor  
Address Book .  
.
Fax Activity  
.
.
.
Admin Menu .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
374  
375  
375  
381  
391  
396  
402  
404  
404  
Phone Book .  
Network  
Fax Settings .  
.
.
System Settings  
Maintenance  
.
.
Secure Settings  
Scan to EMail .  
.
.
USB Settings  
.
Panel Language  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
405  
Panel Lock Function .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
405  
Enabling the Panel Lock  
405  
12  
Contents  
Disabling the Panel Lock .  
Resetting Defaults .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
406  
.
.
.
21 Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows  
Only) 409  
Printer Status Window .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
409  
409  
410  
412  
413  
413  
413  
Status Monitor Console  
Dell Supplies Management System  
Software Update .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Address Book Editor  
ScanButton Manager  
ScanDirect  
.
.
.
.
.
.
23 Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD) 425  
Adding Roles of Print Services  
425  
Printer Setup  
.
.
.
.
.
.
426  
Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard 426  
24 Specifications  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
429  
429  
Operating System Compatibility  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Power Supply  
Dimensions  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
429  
.
430  
Contents  
13  
Memory  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
430  
Interface  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
430  
430  
431  
431  
432  
433  
434  
MIB Compatibility  
Environment  
Cables  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Copier Specifications  
Scanner Specifications  
Facsimile Specifications  
Maintaining Your Printer .......................437  
25 Maintaining Your Printer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
439  
439  
439  
440  
Determining the Status of Supplies .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Conserving Supplies .  
Storing Print Media  
Storing Consumables  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Replacing Toner Cartridges .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
441  
441  
442  
Removing the Toner Cartridges  
Installing a Toner Cartridge  
.
.
.
Cleaning Inside the Printer  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
444  
448  
450  
Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor  
Adjusting Color Registration  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14  
Contents  
Performing Auto Adjust  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
450  
451  
452  
453  
Printing the Color Registration Chart  
Determining Values  
Entering Values .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Cleaning the Scanner .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
454  
456  
Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller .  
26 Clearing Jams  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
459  
460  
461  
465  
467  
470  
Avoiding Jams .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams .  
Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF .  
.
.
Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer .  
Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer .  
Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray .  
.
.
.
.
Troubleshooting .......................................475  
27 Troubleshooting  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
477  
Basic Printer Problems  
.
.
Display Problems  
.
.
.
.
.
477  
Printing Problems .  
478  
Print Quality Problems  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
480  
The output is too light  
480  
Toner smears or print comes off/Stain on back side 481  
Contents  
15  
Random spots/Blurred images .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
482  
483  
483  
485  
486  
487  
487  
488  
489  
490  
491  
The entire output is blank  
.
.
.
.
Pitched color dots  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Vertical blanks  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Ghosting  
Fog  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Auger mark .  
Wrinkled/Stained paper  
.
.
.
.
.
Color registration is out of alignment  
Protrudent / Bumpy paper  
Jam .  
Misfeed jam  
Multi-feed jam  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
492  
493  
.
Copy Problem  
Fax Problems  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
494  
494  
496  
499  
500  
500  
Scanning Problems  
Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems  
Other Problems  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contacting Service  
Appendix ...................................................501  
B Appendix  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
503  
Dell Technical Support Policy .  
.
503  
16  
Contents  
Online Services  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
503  
Warranty and Return Policy .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
504  
Recycling Information  
Contacting Dell  
.
.
504  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
504  
Contents  
17  
18  
Contents  
Before Beginning  
19  
 
20  
Notes, Notices, and Cautions  
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of  
your printer.  
NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data  
and tells you how to avoid the problem.  
CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury,  
or death.  
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.  
© 2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.  
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of  
Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.  
Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft,  
Windows, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries; Adobe is either a registered  
trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other  
countries; Wi-Fi is a registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.  
XML Paper Specification (XPS): This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by  
Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such  
intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369; DES: This  
product includes software developed by Eric Young (eay@mincom.oz.au); AES: Copyright ©  
2003, Dr Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved. This product uses published AES  
software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms; TIFF (libtiff): Copyright ©  
1988-1997 Sam Leffler and Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.; ICC Profile (Little  
cms): Copyright © 1998-2004 Marti Maria.  
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities  
claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in  
trademarks and trade names other than its own.  
Our printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.  
____________________  
Notes, Notices, and Cautions  
21  
 
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS  
This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication,  
or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii)  
of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and in  
applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas, 78682, USA.  
November 2010 Rev. A00  
22  
Notes, Notices, and Cautions  
 
1
Multifunction Color Printer User's  
Guide  
Click the links to the left for information on the features, options, and  
operation of your printer. For information on other documentation included  
with your printer, see "Finding Information" on page 25.  
To order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell:  
1
Double-click the icon on your desktop.  
If you cannot find the icon on your desktop, follow the procedure below.  
a
Navigate to x:\abc\Dell Printers\Dell 1355 Multifunction Color  
Printer\Reorder, where x:\abc is the location where the printer  
software is installed.  
b
c
d
Click the file dl1armm.exe.  
Click File on the toolbar.  
Choose Send To from the drop-down menu, and then click  
Desktop(create shortcut) on the submenu that appears.  
2
Visit the Dell Printer Supplies website at www.dell.com/supplies, or order  
Dell printer supplies by phone.  
For best service, have your Dell printer Service Tag ready.  
To locate the Service Tag of your printer, see "Express Service Code and  
Service Tag" on page 27.  
Dellâ„¢ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer User's Guide  
23  
 
24  
Dellâ„¢ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer User's Guide  
2
Finding Information  
NOTE: The USB cable and the Ethernet cable are not shipped with your printer.  
What are you looking for?  
• Drivers for my printer  
• My User's Guide  
Find it here  
Drivers and Utilities CD  
The Drivers and Utilities CD contains setup video,  
documentation, and drivers for your printer. You can  
use the CD to install/re-install drivers or access your  
setup video and documentation.  
Readme files may be included on your CD to provide  
last-minute updates about technical changes to your  
printer or advanced technical reference material for  
experienced users or technicians.  
• How to use my printer  
Quick Reference Guide  
Finding Information  
25  
           
What are you looking for?  
• Safety information  
Find it here  
Product Information Guide  
• Warranty information  
CAUTION: Read and follow all safety instructions in  
your Product Information Guide prior to setting up and  
operating your printer.  
How to set up my printer  
Setup diagram  
Troubleshooting  
"Troubleshooting" on page 477  
26  
Finding Information  
         
What are you looking for?  
Find it here  
Express Service Code and  
Service Tag  
Service Tag  
xxxxxxx  
Express Service Code  
000 000 000 00  
The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located  
inside the side door of your printer.  
• Latest drivers for my printer Go to support.dell.com  
• Answers to technical service support.dell.com provides several online tools,  
and support questions  
including:  
• Documentation for my  
printer  
• Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips,  
articles from technicians, and online courses  
• Upgrades — Upgrade information for  
components, such as printer driver  
• Customer Care — Contact information, order  
status, warranty, and repair information  
• Downloads — Drivers  
• Manuals — Printer documentation and product  
specifications  
Go to support.dell.com. Select your region and fill in  
the requested details to access help tools and  
information.  
Finding Information  
27  
     
28  
Finding Information  
3
Product Features  
This chapter describes the product features and indicates their links.  
Scanning to a USB Storage Device  
Multiple-Up (2-in-1 Copy)  
With Dell 1355cn/1355cnw  
N-up Print enables you to print multiple  
pages on a single sheet of paper. This  
feature allows you to reduce the paper  
consumption.  
For more information, see "Multiple-Up"  
on page 245.  
Multifunction Color Printer, you don't  
need a PC to connect your USB storage  
device to save the scanned data. Insert  
your USB storage device in the port on  
the printer, and save the scanned data  
directly to your USB storage device.  
For more information, see "Scanning to  
USB Storage Device" on page 280.  
Product Features  
29  
   
2-Sided (Manual Duplex Print)  
Print From USB Memory  
(USB Direct Print)  
Manual Duplex Print is to print two or Print From USB Memory feature allows  
more pages on the front and back you to print directly from your USB  
side of a single sheet of paper manually. storage device without starting your  
This feature allows you to reduce the  
paper consumption.  
For more information, see "Manual  
Duplex Printing (Windows Printer  
Driver Only)" on page 218.  
computer. Without requiring you to  
start your computer and an application,  
this feature allows quick printing with  
simple procedures.  
For more information, see "Direct Print  
Using the USB Storage Device" on  
page 231.  
30  
Product Features  
Printing Through Wireless Connection  
(Wireless Print)  
The Wireless LAN feature on your  
printer allows you to install the printer at  
any location, and enables printing  
without a wired connection to your  
computer.  
For more information, see "Configuring  
Wireless Settings (Dell 1355cnw  
Multifunction Color Printer Only)" on  
page 85.  
Product Features  
31  
32  
Product Features  
4
About the Printer  
This chapter provides an overview of your Dellâ„¢ 1355cn/1355cnw Color  
Multifunction Printer.  
Front View  
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
14  
13 12 11 10  
9 8  
7
1
3
5
7
9
Operator Panel  
2
4
6
8
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
Document Output Tray  
Print Head Cleaning Rod  
Front Cover  
Document Feeder Tray  
Toner Access Cover  
Power Switch  
Paper Width Guides  
10 Length Guide  
11 MPF Extension  
12 Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)  
14 Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)  
13 Front USB Port  
About the Printer  
33  
                                 
Rear View  
1
12  
11  
2
10  
9
3
4
8
5
7
6
1
3
5
7
9
ADF Cover  
USB Port  
2
4
6
8
Ethernet Port  
Wall Jack Connector  
Security Slot  
Phone Connector  
Rear Cover  
Transfer Roller  
Paper Chute  
10 Paper Feed Roller  
11 Transfer Belt  
12 Fuser Release Lever  
Space Requirements  
Place the printer at a location such that there is adequate space for using the  
printer feeder and covers.  
34  
About the Printer  
                             
100 mm/3.94 inches  
596 mm/23.46 inches  
132 mm/5.20 inches  
410 mm/16.14 inches  
262.5 mm/10.33 inches  
379 mm/14.92 inches  
338 mm/13.31 inches  
292.5 mm/11.52 inches  
To avoid irregular screen image or malfunctioning of your printer, avoid  
placing the printer in direct sunlight with the single sheet feeder opened.  
About the Printer  
35  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
3
1
2
4
1
2
3
4
ADF Cover  
Document Guides  
Document Glass  
Document Feeder Tray  
Operator Panel  
For more information on the operator panel, see "Operator Panel" on  
page 223.  
Securing the Printer  
To protect your printer from theft, you can use the optional Kensington lock.  
36  
About the Printer  
               
Attach the Kensington lock to the security slot on your printer.  
Security slot  
For details, see the operating instructions supplied with the Kensington lock.  
Ordering Supplies  
You can order consumables from Dell on the Internet when using a networked  
printer. Enter the IP address of your printer in your web browser, launch the  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and click the Order Supplies at: to  
order toner for your printer.  
You can also order toner cartridges by the following method:  
1
Click Start  
ï‚®
All Programs  
ï‚®
Dell Printers  
ï‚®
Additional Color Software  
ï‚®
Dell Supplies Management System  
.
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.  
2
3
Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.  
If ordering from the web:  
a
b
Select a web address from the Select Reorder URL list.  
Click the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site  
.
The Dell 1355 Color MFP - Dell Supplies Management System  
screen appears.  
c
Enter the Service Tag, and then click OK  
.
The Service Tag is located inside the toner access cover of your printer.  
About the Printer  
37  
   
Dell supplies web site appears.  
Service Tag  
xxxxxxx  
Express Service Code  
000 000 000 00  
If you order by phone, call the number that appears in the Order by Phone  
section.  
38  
About the Printer  
Setting Up Printer  
(Printer Setup)  
39  
 
40  
5
Removing Packaging Material  
1
2
3
Remove the packaging material from the printer.  
Lift and open the document cover.  
Remove the protective sheet from the ADF Glass.  
Removing Packaging Material  
41  
 
42  
Removing Packaging Material  
6
Connecting Your Printer  
Your Dellâ„¢ 1355cn/1355cnw Color Multifunction Printer interconnection  
cable must meet the following requirements:  
Connection type  
Wireless  
Connection specifications  
IEEE 802.11b/802.11g  
USB  
USB 2.0 compatible  
Ethernet  
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX compatible  
Wall jack connector RJ11  
Phone connector RJ11  
1
2
3
4
Connecting Your Printer  
43  
       
1
Ethernet Port  
2
3
USB Port  
Wall Jack Connector  
4
Phone Connector  
Connecting Printer to Computer or Network  
Direct Connection  
A local printer is a printer which is directly attached to your computer using  
the USB cable. If your printer is attached to a network instead of your  
computer, skip this section and go to "Network Connection" on page 45.  
USB Cable  
The following operating systems support USB connection:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Microsoft® Windows® XP  
Microsoft Windows XP 64-bit Edition  
Windows Server® 2003  
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition  
Windows Server 2008  
Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition  
Windows Server 2008 R2  
Windows Vista®  
Windows Vista 64-bit Edition  
44  
Connecting Your Printer  
           
•
•
•
Windows 7  
Windows 7 64-bit Edition  
Mac OS® X 10.4.11/10.5/10.6  
To attach the printer to a computer:  
1
Ensure that the printer, computer, and any other attached devices are  
turned off and unplugged from the power source/outlet.  
2
Connect the smaller USB connector into the USB port at the back of the  
printer.  
USB port  
3
Connect the other end of the cable into a USB port of the computer.  
NOTE: Do not connect the printer USB cable to the USB connector available  
on the keyboard.  
Network Connection  
To connect the printer to a network:  
1
Ensure that the printer, computer and any other connected devices have  
been turned off and all cables have been disconnected.  
2
Connect the Ethernet cable.  
Connecting Your Printer  
45  
 
NOTE: Connect the Ethernet cable, only if you need to setup a wired connection.  
To connect the printer to the network, connect one end of an Ethernet cable  
into the Ethernet port at the rear of the printer, and the other end to a LAN  
drop or hub.  
To setup a wireless connection, see "Configuring Wireless Settings (Dell  
1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer Only)" on page 85.  
46  
Connecting Your Printer  
Turning On the Printer  
CAUTION: Do not use extension cords or power strips.  
CAUTION: The printer should not be connected to a UPS system.  
1
Connect the power cable to the wall jack connector on the rear of your  
printer (see "Rear View" on page 34).  
2
3
Connect the other end of the cable to the power source.  
Turn on the printer.  
4
Follow the on-screen instructions in the operator panel to configure the  
initial settings of your printer.  
Connecting Your Printer  
47  
 
Connecting the Telephone Line  
NOTE: Do not connect your printer directly to a DSL (digital subscriber line). This  
may damage the printer. To use a DSL, you will need to use an appropriate DSL filter.  
Contact your service provider for the DSL filter.  
1
Plug one end of a telephone line cord to the wall jack connector and the  
other end to an active wall jack.  
Wall jack connector  
To the wall jack  
2
Remove the blue plug from the phone connector.  
Phone connector  
Blue plug  
3
To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your printer, plug the  
telephone or answering machine line cord into the phone connector ( ).  
48  
Connecting Your Printer  
         
Phone connector  
To an external telephone  
or answering machine  
If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany,  
Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and Switzerland), and  
you are supplied with a yellow terminator, insert the yellow terminator into  
the phone connector ( ).  
Phone connector  
Yellow terminator  
Connecting Your Printer  
49  
 
50  
Connecting Your Printer  
7
Setting the IP Address  
Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel  
You need to set the printer language, country, clock date, and time when you  
turn on printer for the first time.  
When you turn on the printer, a wizard appears on the operator panel. Follow  
the steps below to set the initial settings.  
NOTE: If you do not start configuring the initial settings, Ready appears on the  
operator panel in three minutes. After that, you can set the following initial setup by  
enabling Power on Wizard on the operator panel or Dellâ„¢ Printer Configuration  
Web Tool if needed.  
For more information on operator panel, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on  
page 359.  
For more information on Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, see "Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool" on page 123.  
1
Ensure that Please Select Language is highlighted, and then  
select the language you want to use on the operator panel from the  
following drop-down list, and then press the  
button.  
English  
Français  
Italiano  
Deutsch  
Español  
Dansk  
Nederlands  
Norsk  
Svenska  
2
Press the  
button to start setting the country.  
Setting the IP Address  
51  
   
3
4
Ensure that Please Select Country is highlighted. Select your  
country from the drop-down list, and then press the button.  
Ensure that Please Select Time Zone is highlighted. Select the  
appropriate time zone from the following drop-down list, and then press  
the  
button.  
UTC -12:00  
UTC -11:00  
UTC -10:00  
UTC -09:00  
UTC -08:00  
UTC -07:00  
UTC -06:00  
UTC -05:00  
UTC -04:00  
UTC -03:30  
UTC -03:00  
UTC -02:00  
UTC -01:00  
UTC 00:00  
UTC +01:00  
UTC +02:00  
UTC +03:00  
UTC +03:30  
UTC +04:00  
UTC +04:30  
UTC +05:00  
UTC +05:30  
UTC +05:45  
UTC +06:00  
52  
Setting the IP Address  
UTC +06:30  
UTC +07:00  
UTC +08:00  
UTC +09:00  
UTC +09:30  
UTC +10:00  
UTC +11:00  
UTC +12:00  
UTC +13:00  
5
6
7
Press the  
button until Please Enter Date is highlighted. Specify  
button.  
button until Please Enter Time is highlighted. Specify  
the current time, and then press the button.  
Press the button for Fax Setup.  
the current date, and then press the  
Press the  
If you want to skip the Fax Setup, press the  
restart the printer.  
(Start) button and then  
8
9
Press the  
highlighted. enter your fax number, and then press the  
Press the button until Please Enter Name is highlighted. Enter a  
name, and then press the  
button until Please Enter Fax Number is  
button.  
10 Press the  
button, and then restart the printer.  
Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)  
NOTE: When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 Mode, use the Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool. To open the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, use the  
link local address. To check a link local address, see "Printing and Checking the  
Printer Settings Page" on page 57.  
An IP address is a unique number that consists of four sections that are  
delimited by a period and can include up to three digits in each section, for  
example, 111.222.33.44.  
Setting the IP Address  
53  
   
Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance  
issues.  
NOTE: Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is  
normally done by a system administrator.  
NOTE: Depending on the address class, the range of the IP address assigned may  
be different. On Class A, for example, an IP address in the range from 0.0.0.0 to  
127.255.255.255 will be assigned. For assignment of IP addresses, contact  
your system administrator.  
You can assign the IP address by using the operator panel or using the tool  
box.  
The Operator Panel  
For more information on using your operator panel, see "Operator Panel" on  
page 223.  
1
Turn on the printer.  
Ensure that Ready message appears on the LCD panel.  
2
3
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
button until Network is highlighted, and then press the  
button until TCP/IP is highlighted, and then press the  
button until IPv4 is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Press the  
button.  
Press the  
button.  
Ensure that Get IP Address is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Ensure that Panel is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
10 Ensure that Get IP Address is highlighted.  
11 Press the  
button until IP Address is highlighted, and then press  
the  
button.  
54  
Setting the IP Address  
 
The cursor is located at the first three digits of the IP address.  
12 Enter the value of the IP address using the numeric keypad.  
13 Press the  
button.  
The next three digits are highlighted.  
14 Repeat step 12 and step 13 to enter all of the digits in the IP address, and  
then press the  
button.  
15 Ensure that IP Address is highlighted.  
16 Press the  
button until Subnet Mask is highlighted, and then press  
the  
button.  
The cursor is located at the first three digits of the subnet mask.  
17 Enter the value of the subnet mask using the numeric keypad.  
18 Press the  
button.  
The next three digits are highlighted.  
19 Repeat step 17 and step 18 to set subnet mask, and then press the  
button.  
20 Press the  
button and ensure that Subnet Mask is highlighted.  
21 Press the  
button until Gateway Address is highlighted, and then  
button.  
press the  
The cursor is located at the first three digits of the gateway address.  
22 Enter the value of the gateway address using the numeric keypad.  
23 Press the  
button.  
The next three digits are highlighted.  
24 Repeat step 22 and step 23 to set gateway address, and then press the  
button.  
25 Turn off and turn on the printer.  
The Tool Box  
NOTE: When you use IPv6 Mode for network printing, the Tool Box cannot be used  
to assign an IP address.  
Setting the IP Address  
55  
 
1
Click Start  
Color Printer  
ï‚®
All Programs  
Tool Box  
ï‚®
Dell Printers  
ï‚®
Dell 1355 Multifunction  
ï‚®
.
NOTE: The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer  
drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355  
Multifunction Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.  
The Tool Box opens.  
2
3
Click the Printer Maintenance tab.  
Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page.  
The TCP/IP Settings page is displayed.  
4
5
Select the mode from IP Address Mode, and then enter the values in IP  
Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address  
.
Press the Apply New Settings button to take effect.  
The IP address is assigned to your printer. To verify the setting, open the web  
browser on any computer connected to the network and enter the IP address  
into the address bar on the browser. If the IP address is set up correctly, the  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool displays in your browser.  
You can also assign the IP address to the printer when installing the printer  
drivers with installer. When you use the Network Installation feature, and the  
Get IP Address is set to AutoIP on the operator panel menu, you can  
set the IP address from 0.0.0.0 to the desired IP address on the printer  
selection window.  
Verifying the IP Settings  
1
Print the printer settings page.  
See "Printing and Checking the Printer Settings Page" on page 57.  
2
Look under the TCP/IP heading on the printer settings page to ensure  
that the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway are appropriate.  
To verify if the printer is active on the network, run the ping command in  
your computer:  
1
2
Click Start, and select Run.  
Type cmd, and then press OK  
.
A black window is displayed.  
56  
Setting the IP Address  
   
3
4
Type ping xx.xx.xx.xx (where xx.xx.xx.xx is the IP address of  
your printer).  
Reply from the IP address denotes printer is active on the network.  
Printing and Checking the Printer Settings Page  
Print the printer settings page and check your printer's IP address.  
The Operator Panel  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
Press the  
the  
button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
The system settings page is printed.  
5
Confirm the IP address next to IP Address under Wired Network on the  
printer settings page. If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, wait for a few minutes  
to resolve the IP address automatically, and then print the system settings  
page again.  
If the IP address is not resolved automatically, see "Assigning an IP Address  
(for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.  
The Tool Box  
NOTE:  
1
Click Start  
Color Printer  
ï‚®
All Programs  
Tool Box  
ï‚®
Dell Printers  
ï‚®
Dell 1355 Multifunction  
ï‚®
.
NOTE: The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer drivers  
are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355 Multifunction  
Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.  
The Tool Box opens.  
2
3
Click the Printer Settings Report tab.  
Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.  
Setting the IP Address  
57  
     
The Reports page is displayed.  
4
Click the Printer Settings button.  
The printer settings page is printed.  
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0 (the factory default) or 169.254.xx.xx  
an IP address has not been assigned. To assign an IP address for your  
printer, see "Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.  
,
58  
Setting the IP Address  
Loading Paper  
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the priority sheet inserter while a  
printing is in progress.  
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in your printer.  
NOTE: For printing envelopes, see "Loading Print Media" on page 201.  
Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder  
(MPF)  
1
Open the front cover by pulling out the instruction sheet.  
2
Pull the priority sheet inserter (PSI) out.  
Loading Paper  
59  
       
3
Remove the instruction sheet attached to the PSI with adhesive tape.  
NOTE: Read the instruction sheet before you use the PSI.  
4
Pull the length guide forward until it stops.  
60  
Loading Paper  
5
Pull the MPF extension forward until it stops.  
6
Adjust the paper width guides to their maximum width.  
Loading Paper  
61  
7
Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then  
fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.  
8
Load paper on the MPF with the top edge first and with the recommended  
print side facing up.  
62  
Loading Paper  
9
Adjust the width guides and length guides until they rest lightly against  
the edges of the stack of print media.  
10 Slide the length guide towards the printer until it touches the print media.  
Loading Paper  
63  
NOTE: Depending on the size of print media, first slide the MPF extension  
backward until it stops, and then pinch the length guide and slide it backward  
until it touches print media.  
64  
Loading Paper  
11 Insert the PSI into the printer and then align the PSI to the marking on  
the paper tray.  
Loading Paper  
65  
12 Select the paper type from the printer driver if the loaded print media is  
not standard plain paper. If a user-specified print media is loaded in the  
MPF, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer driver.  
Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter  
(PSI)  
1
Open the front cover.  
2
Slide the PSI forward, and then align the PSI to the marking on the paper  
tray.  
66  
Loading Paper  
   
3
Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then  
fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.  
4
Load print media on the PSI with the top edge first and with the  
recommended print side facing up.  
Loading Paper  
67  
5
Adjust the width guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the  
stack of print media.  
6
Select the paper type from the printer driver if the loaded print media is  
not standard plain paper. If a user-specified print media is loaded in the  
PSI, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer driver.  
68  
Loading Paper  
9
Installing Printer Drivers on  
Computers Running Windows  
Identifying Printer Driver Pre-install Status (For  
Network Connection Setup)  
Before installing the printer driver on your computer, print the printer  
settings page to check the IP address of your printer.  
The Operator Panel  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
Press the  
the  
button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
The system settings page is printed.  
5
Find the IP address under Wired Network/Wireless Network on the printer  
settings page.  
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, wait for a few minutes to resolve the IP  
address automatically, and then print the system settings page again.  
If the IP address is not resolved automatically, see "Assigning an IP Address  
(for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.  
The Tool Box  
1
Click Start  
Color Printer  
ï‚®
All Programs  
ï‚®
Dell Printers  
ï‚®
Dell 1355 Multifunction  
ï‚®
Tool Box  
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
           
NOTE: When multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer, the  
Select Printer window opens. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355cnw  
The Tool Box opens.  
2
Select TCP/IP Settings from the list on the left side of the page.  
The TCP/IP Settings page appears.  
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default) or 169.254.xx.xx,  
an IP address has not been assigned. To assign one for your printer, see  
"Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.  
Disabling the firewall before installing your printer  
NOTE: For Windows XP, Service Pack 2 or 3 must be installed.  
If you are running one of the following operating systems, you must disable  
the firewall before installing the Dell printer software:  
•
•
•
•
•
Windows 7  
Windows Vista  
Windows Server 2008 R2  
Windows Server 2008  
Windows XP  
1
Click Start  
ï‚®
Help and Support.  
NOTE: For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 operating systems, if you  
use Online Help, switch to Offline Help on Windows Help and Support  
window.  
2
In the Search box, type firewall and then press Enter  
.
In the list, click Turn Windows Firewall on or off and then follow the  
instructions on the screen.  
Enable the firewall after the installation of the Dell printer software is  
complete.  
Inserting the Drivers and Utility CD  
1
Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD into your computer to start Easy Setup  
Navigator  
.
70  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
   
NOTE: If the CD does not automatically launch, click Startï‚® All Programs (for  
Windows Vista and Windows 7)ï‚® Accessories (for Windows Vista and  
Windows 7)ï‚® Run, and then type D:\setup_assist.exe (where D is  
the drive letter of your CD), and then click OK.  
Direct Connection Setup  
For installing host-based printer driver  
1
2
3
Click Software Installation  
.
Select Personal Installation, and then click Next  
.
Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the computer and the printer  
with a USB cable, and then turn the printer on.  
The Plug and Play installation starts and the installation software proceeds  
to the next page automatically.  
page, click Install.  
4
Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears.  
If necessary, click Print Test Page to print a test page.  
USB Printing  
A personal printer is a printer attached to your computer or a print server  
using a USB. If your printer is attached to a network and not your computer,  
see "Network Connection Setup" on page 74.  
For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver  
NOTE: Download and install the XPS printer driver at support.dell.com/support.  
NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows 7,  
Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows  
Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition.  
Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition  
1
2
3
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.  
Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers  
Click Add a printer  
ï‚®
ï‚®
ï‚®
.
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
71  
     
4
5
6
7
8
9
Click Add a local printer  
.
Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next  
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.  
.
Click OK  
.
Select your printer name and click Next  
.
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name  
box. To use this printer as the default printer, select the check box  
displayed under the Printer name. Click Next  
.
Installation starts.  
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue  
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise,  
contact your administrator to continue the desired action.  
11 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test  
page.  
12 Click Finish  
.
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition  
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.  
Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers  
Click Add a printer  
Click Add a local printer  
ï‚®
ï‚®
ï‚®
.
.
.
Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next  
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.  
.
Click OK  
.
Select your printer name and click Next  
.
10 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name  
box.  
72  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default  
printer check box. Click Next  
.
Installation starts.  
11 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you  
share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network  
can find and use it. Click Next  
.
12 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test  
page.  
13 Click Finish  
.
Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, or Windows Server 2008 R2  
1
2
3
4
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.  
Click Start Devices and Printers  
Click Add a printer  
When you use Windows Server 2008 R2, click Add a local or network  
printer as an administrator  
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes  
ï‚®
.
.
.
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise,  
contact your administrator to continue the desired action.  
5
6
7
8
9
Click Add a local printer  
.
Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next  
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, and then select the extracted folder in step 1.  
.
Click OK  
.
10 Select your printer name and click Next  
.
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name  
box, and then click Next  
.
Installation starts.  
12 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you  
share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network  
can find and use it. Click Next  
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
73  
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test  
page. To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default  
printer check box.  
14 Click Finish  
.
Network Connection Setup  
Network Printer Setup on a Local Network  
For installing host-based printer driver  
1
2
3
4
Click Software Installation  
Select Network Installation, and then click Next  
Select Local Installation, and then click Next  
.
.
.
Select the printer you want to install from the printer list, and then click  
Next. If the target printer is not displayed on the list, click Refresh to  
refresh the list or click Add Printer to add a printer to the list manually.  
You may specify the IP address and port name at this point.  
If you have installed this printer on the server computer, select I am  
setting up this printer on a server check box.  
NOTE: When using AutoIP, 0.0.0.0 is displayed in the installer. Before you can  
continue, you must enter a valid IP address.  
NOTE: If you are running any of the following operating systems, a Windows  
Security Alert is displayed:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windows Vista  
Windows Vista 64-bit Edition  
Windows Server 2008  
Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition  
Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition  
Windows 7  
Windows 7 64-bit Edition  
To continue installing the host-based printer driver, click Unblock or  
Allow access (for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).  
5
Specify the printer settings, and then click Next.  
74  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
     
a
b
Enter the printer name.  
If you want other users on the network to access this printer, select  
Share this printer with other computers on the network, and then  
enter a share name that users can identify.  
c
If you want to set a printer as the default, select the Set this printer as  
default check box.  
6
7
Select the software and documentation you want to install, and then click  
Next. You can specify folders in which to install the Dell software and  
documentation. To change the folders, click Browse  
.
Click Finish to exit the wizard when the Congratulations! screen appears.  
If necessary, click Print Test Page to print a test page.  
For installing XML Paper Specification (XPS) printer driver  
NOTE: Download and install the XPS printer driver at support.dell.com/support.  
NOTE: XPS driver is supported on the following operating systems: Windows 7,  
Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows  
Server 2008 R2, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition.  
Windows Vista or Windows Vista 64-bit Edition  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.  
Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers  
Click Add a printer  
Click Add a network  
Select printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed  
Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname, and then click  
Next  
Select TCP/IP Device for Device type, and enter the IP address for  
Hostname or IP address, and then click Next  
If the User Account Control Continue dialog box appears, click  
Continue  
ï‚®
ï‚®
ï‚®
.
.
,
wireless or Bluetooth printer  
.
.
.
7
.
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise,  
contact your administrator to continue the desired action.  
8
9
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click OK  
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows 75  
10 Select your printer name and click Next  
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name  
box, and then click Next  
.
.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default  
printer check box.  
Installation starts.  
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue  
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Continue; otherwise,  
contact your administrator to continue the desired action.  
12 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test  
page.  
13 Click Finish  
.
Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition  
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator.  
1
2
3
4
5
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.  
Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers  
Click Add a printer  
Click Add a network  
ï‚®
ï‚®
ï‚®
.
.
,
wireless or Bluetooth printer  
.
Select your printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed  
.
When you select your printer, go to step 8.  
When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, go to step 6.  
6
7
Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname, and then click  
Next  
Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for  
Hostname or IP address, and then click Next  
If the User Account Control Continue dialog box appears, click  
Continue  
.
.
.
8
9
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click OK  
.
10 Select your printer name and click Next  
.
76  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name  
box, and then click Next  
.
To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default  
printer check box.  
Installation starts.  
12 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you  
share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network  
can find and use it. Click Next  
.
13 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test  
page.  
14 Click Finish  
.
Windows Server 2008 R2  
1
2
3
4
5
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.  
Click Start Devices and Printers  
Click Add a printer  
Click Add a network  
Select your printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed  
ï‚®
.
.
,
wireless or Bluetooth printer  
.
.
NOTE: When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, Find a printer by  
name or TCP/IP address screen appears. Find your printer on this screen.  
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes  
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise,  
contact your administrator to continue the desired action.  
6
7
8
9
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click OK  
.
Select your printer name and click Next  
To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name  
box, and then click Next  
10 If you do not share your printer, select Do not share this printer. If you  
share your printer, select Share this printer so that others on your network  
.
.
can find and use it  
.
11 Click Next  
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
77  
Installation starts.  
12 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test  
page. To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default  
printer check box.  
13 Click Finish  
.
Windows 7 or Windows 7 64-bit Edition  
1
2
3
4
5
Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.  
Click Start Devices and Printers  
Click Add a printer  
Click Add a network  
ï‚®
.
.
,
wireless or Bluetooth printer  
.
Select your printer or click The printer that I want isn't listed  
.
When you select your printer, go to step 8.  
When you click The printer that I want isn't listed, go to step 6.  
6
7
Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name, and then click  
Next  
Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, and enter the IP address for  
Hostname or IP address, and then click Next  
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes  
.
.
.
NOTE: If you are an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise,  
contact your administrator to continue the desired action.  
8
9
Click Have Disk to display the Install From Disk dialog box.  
Click Browse, then select the extracted folder in step 1, and then click OK  
.
10 Select your printer name and click Next  
.
11 To change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name  
box, and then click Next  
.
Installation starts.  
12 As the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to print a test  
page. To use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default  
printer check box.  
13 Click Finish  
.
78  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
NOTE: You can set up the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to send you an e-mail  
when the printer needs supplies or intervention.  
For more information about E-Mail Alert, see "E-Mail Alert" on page 126.  
Network Printer Setup on a Remote Network  
Before Installation  
Before you start remote installation, perform the following procedures.  
Allow Print Spooler to Accept Client Connections  
NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista,  
Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64  
Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server  
2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.  
For Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, and  
Windows Server 2008:  
1
Click Start  
Windows Vista only)  
Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK  
Click Computer Configuration Administrative Templates  
Right-click Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections and select  
Properties  
ï‚®
All Programs (for Windows Vista only)  
ï‚®
Accessories (for  
ï‚®
Run  
.
2
3
4
.
ï‚®
ï‚®
Printers.  
.
5
6
On the Setting tab, select Enabled, and then click OK  
.
Restart the computer.  
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:  
1
Click Start  
Windows 7 only)  
Type gpedit.msc, and then click OK  
Click Computer Configuration Administrative Templates  
Right-click Allow Print Spooler to accept client connections and select  
Edit  
ï‚®
All Programs (for Windows 7 only)  
ï‚®
Accessories (for  
ï‚®
Run  
.
2
3
4
.
ï‚®
ï‚®
Printers  
.
.
5
6
Select Enabled, and then click OK.  
Restart the computer.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
79  
 
Share the Firewall File and Printer  
NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows  
Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-  
bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.  
For Windows XP:  
1
2
3
4
Click start  
Select Security Center  
Click Windows Firewall  
On the Exceptions tab, check the File and Printer Sharing check box, and  
then click OK  
For Windows Vista:  
ï‚®
Control Panel.  
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Click Start  
ï‚®
Control Panel.  
Select Security  
.
Click Windows Firewall  
Click Change settings  
Click Continue  
On the Exceptions tab, check the File and Printer Sharing check box, and  
then click OK  
For Windows Server 2008:  
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
Click Start  
Double-click Windows Firewall  
Click Change settings  
On the Exceptions tab, check the File and Printer Sharing check box, and  
then click OK  
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:  
ï‚®
Control Panel.  
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
5
Click Start  
Select System and Security  
Click Windows Firewall  
Click Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall  
If the check boxes under Allowed programs and features: are dimmed,  
click Change settings, and then click Yes  
ï‚®
Control Panel.  
.
.
.
.
80  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
6
7
Check the Name check box. Home/Work (Private) or Public check box is  
automatically selected according to your settings.  
If File and Printer Sharing Properties dialog box appears, click OK  
Click OK  
.
.
Start Remote Registry  
NOTE: This step is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition,  
Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Click Start  
Select System and Maintenance (System and Security for Windows 7  
Click Administrative Tools  
Double-click Services  
ï‚®
Control Panel.  
).  
.
.
Click Continue (for Windows Vista only).  
Right-click Remote Registry and select Start  
.
Right-click Remote Registry and select Properties  
.
Change Startup type: to Automatic, and then click OK  
.
Disable User Account Control  
NOTE: Disabling the User Account Control might leave the system vulnerable to  
virus attacks.  
NOTE: This step is required for Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition,  
Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008  
R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition.  
For Windows Vista:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Click Start  
Select User Accounts  
Click User Accounts  
Click Turn User Account Control on or off  
Click Continue  
ï‚®
Control Panel.  
.
.
.
.
Clear the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your  
computer check box.  
7
Click OK.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
81  
8
Restart the computer.  
For Windows Server 2008:  
1
2
3
4
5
Click Start  
Double-click User Accounts  
Click Turn User Account Control on or off  
Click Continue  
ï‚®
Control Panel.  
.
.
.
Clear the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your  
computer check box.  
6
7
Click OK  
.
Restart the computer.  
For Windows Server 2008 R2:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Click Start  
Select User Accounts  
Click User Accounts  
Click Change User Account Control settings  
Move the slider to the bottom, and then click OK  
Click Yes  
Click OK  
Click Yes  
Restart the computer.  
ï‚®
Control Panel.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
For Windows 7:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Click Start  
Select User Accounts and Family Safety  
Click User Accounts  
Click Change User Account Control Settings  
ï‚®
Control Panel.  
.
.
.
Move the slider to the bottom, and then click OK  
Click Yes in User Account Control dialog box.  
Restart the computer.  
.
82  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
Enable Network Discovery and File Sharing for all Public Networks  
NOTE: This step is required when you use Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit  
Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server  
2008 R2, Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition for the server computer.  
For Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2  
1
Click Start  
Sharing Center  
ï‚®
Control Panel  
ï‚®
Network and Internet  
ï‚®
Network and  
ï‚®
Change advanced sharing settings  
.
2
To allow your computer to be found on the network, and to allow other  
computers on the network to share the files and folders on your computer,  
click Turn on network discovery  
Click Save changes  
If you see the User Account Control dialog box, click Yes  
.
3
4
.
.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008,  
Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition:  
1
2
Click Start  
Right-click Network and select Properties  
The Network an Sharing Center screen appears.  
ï‚®
Network.  
.
3
4
Click the down arrow button next to either Network discovery  
.
To allow your computer to be found on the network, and to allow other  
computers on the network to share the files and folders on your computer,  
click Turn on network discovery  
Click Apply  
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue  
.
5
6
.
.
Disable Simple File Sharing  
NOTE: This step is required for Windows XP, and Windows XP 64-bit Edition.  
Click Start Control Panel  
Select Appearance and Themes  
Select Folder Options  
On the View tab, clear the Use simple file sharing (Recommended) check  
box, and then click OK  
Click Start Control Panel  
1
2
3
4
ï‚®
.
.
.
.
5
ï‚®
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
83  
6
7
8
9
Select Performance and Maintenance  
Select Administrative Tools  
Double-click Local Security Policy  
Click Local Policies Security Options  
.
.
.
ï‚®
.
10 Right-click Network access: Sharing and security model for local accounts  
and select Properties  
11 Ensure that Classic - local users authenticate as themselves is selected.  
12 Click OK  
.
.
Installing the Printer Driver  
NOTE: Installation on Windows XP Home Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic,  
Windows Vista Home Premium, Windows Vista x64 Home Basic, Windows Vista x64  
Home Premium, Windows 7 Starter, Windows 7 Home Basic, Windows 7 Home  
Premium, Windows 7 x64 Home Basic, and Windows 7 x64 Home Premium is not  
supported.  
1
2
Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your  
computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically.  
Click Software Installation  
The Install Printer Driver and Software screen appears.  
Select Network Installation, and then click Next  
Select Remote Installation, and then click Next  
Enter the Administrator user name and password of the client computer,  
then select the clients or servers, and then Next  
.
3
4
5
.
.
.
NOTE: If you are running any of the following operating systems, a Windows  
Security Alert is displayed:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windows Vista  
Windows Vista 64-bit Edition  
Windows Server 2008  
Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition  
Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit Edition  
Windows 7  
Windows 7 64-bit Edition  
84  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
To continue installing the host-based printer driver, click Unblock or  
Allow access (for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).  
6
Check if the printer to be installed is listed in Select Printer, and then click  
Next  
.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in Select Printer, try the  
following steps:  
•
•
Click Refresh to update the information.  
Click Add Printer, and then enter a port name (any alphanumeric string)  
and an existing IP address for the printer.  
7
8
Select the required items on the Software and Documentation, and then  
click Install  
Click Finish to exit this tool.  
.
Configuring Wireless Settings (Dell 1355cnw  
Multifunction Color Printer Only)  
This section describes how to configure wireless settings through Easy Setup  
Navigator.  
The specifications of wireless setting function are described below:  
Item  
Specification  
Connectivity  
Connectivity Standard  
Bandwidth  
Wireless  
IEEE 802.11b/802.11g compliant  
2.4 GHz  
Data Transfer Rate  
802.11g: 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps  
802.11b: 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps  
Security  
WEP (64/128bits), WPA-PSK (TKIP, AES), WPA-  
2PSK (AES)  
Certifications  
Wifi, WPA2.0 (Personal)  
Wifi Protected Setup(WPS) Push Button Configuration (PBC), Personal  
Identification Number (PIN)  
You can select a method to configure a wireless setting from the following:  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
85  
     
Wizard Setup through USB connection  
Advanced Setup through  
Ethernet connection  
Operator Panel  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
*1  
WPS-PIN  
*2  
WPS-PBC  
*1  
WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi® Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a method to  
authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by entering  
PIN assignments in the printer and computer. This setting, performed through  
supports WPS.  
*2  
WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to  
authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by pressing  
the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing  
WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the  
access point supports WPS.  
NOTE: For information on how to install a wireless, see "Using Wizard Setup to  
Configure Wireless Settings" on page 86 or "Using Advanced Setup to Configure  
Wireless Settings" on page 88.  
Using Wizard Setup to Configure Wireless Settings  
1
Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your  
computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically.  
86  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
 
2
3
Click Guided Setup  
.
Click Connect Your Printer  
.
Select your type of connection screen appears.  
4
5
Select Wireless Connection, and then click Next.  
The setting method selection window appears.  
Ensure that Wizard is selected, and then click Next  
.
6
Follow the instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
87  
7
Confirm there are no errors displayed in the operator panel, and then click  
NO  
If you see any errors, click YES and follow the instruction.  
.
8
9
Click Start installation  
.
Select Local Installation, and then click Next  
.
10 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen,  
and then click Next  
.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try  
the following steps:  
•
•
Click Refresh to update the information.  
Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.  
11 Select the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and then  
click Next  
.
12 Select the software to be installed, and then click Install  
.
The Congratulations! screen appears.  
13 Click Finish to exit this tool.  
The wireless configuration is complete.  
Using Advanced Setup to Configure Wireless Settings  
To use the Advanced Setup, display the Configuration Wireless Setting  
screen.  
Displaying Configure Wireless Settings Screen  
1
Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD provided with the printer in your  
computer. The Easy Setup Navigator file launches automatically.  
88  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
 
2
3
4
Click Guided Setup  
.
Click Connect Your Printer  
.
Select Wireless Connection, and then click Next  
.
The setting method selection window appears.  
5
Select Advanced.  
Select a connection method from the following  
•
•
Ethernet Cable  
WPS-PIN  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
89  
•
•
•
WPS-PBC  
Operator Panel  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
Ethernet Cable  
1
2
Select Ethernet Cable, and then click Next  
.
Follow the instructions, and then click Next  
.
The Advanced Configuration Tool screen appears.  
3
Select the printer to be configured in the Select Printer screen, and then  
click Next  
.
NOTE: If the printer to be configured is not listed in the Select Printer screen,  
try the following steps:  
•
•
Click Refresh to update the information.  
Click Enter IP Address, and then enter the IP address of your printer.  
4
5
6
Enter the SSID.  
Select Type of wireless network  
.
Configure the security setting, and then click Next  
.
The IP Address Settings screen appears.  
7
Select IP Mode depending on your network scheme.  
When IPv4 is selected:  
Configure the following:  
a
b
Select Type  
.
Enter the following items:  
•
•
•
IP address of your printer  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway Address  
When IPv6 is selected:  
Configure the following:  
a
b
Select Use Manual Address.  
Enter IP address of your printer.  
90  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
 
c
Enter the gateway address of your network.  
When Dual Stack is selected:  
Configure the IPv4 Settings and IPv6 Settings  
.
8
Click Next  
Ensure that the wireless settings are displayed, and then click Apply  
The Complete configuration screen appears.  
10 Click Next  
11 Follow the instructions until the Check Setup screen appears, and then  
click Next  
.
9
.
.
.
12 Confirm there are no errors displayed on the operator panel, and then click  
NO on the Check Setup screen.  
NOTE: If you see any errors, click YES and follow the instruction.  
13 Click Start Installation  
14 Select Local Installation, and then click Next  
15 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen,  
and then click Next  
.
.
.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try  
the following steps:  
•
Click Refresh to update the information.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
91  
•
Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer  
manually.  
16 Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and  
then click Next  
.
17 Select the software to be installed, and then click Install  
.
The Congratulations! screen appears.  
18 Click Finish to exit this tool.  
The wireless configuration is complete.  
WPS-PIN  
NOTE: WPS-PIN (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Personal Identification Number) is a  
method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by  
entering PIN assignments to a printer and computer. This setting, performed  
through access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless  
router supports WPS.  
1
2
3
Select WPS-PIN, and then click Next.  
Follow the instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.  
Confirm there are no errors displayed on the operator panel, and then click  
NO on the Check Setup screen.  
NOTE: If you see any errors, click YES and follow the instruction.  
92  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
 
4
5
Select Local Installation, and then click Next  
Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer, and then  
click Next  
.
.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer, try the  
following steps:  
•
•
Click Refresh to update the information.  
Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.  
6
7
Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and  
then click Next  
.
Select the software to be installed, and then click Install  
.
The Congratulations! screen appears.  
8
Click Finish to exit this tool.  
The wireless configuration is complete.  
When the WPS-PIN operation is successful and the printer is rebooted,  
wireless LAN connection is completed.  
WPS-PBC  
NOTE: WPS-PBC (Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration) is a method to  
authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration, by pressing  
the button provided on the access point via wireless routers, and then performing  
WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when the  
access point supports WPS.  
1
2
3
Select WPS-PBC, and then click Next.  
Follow the instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.  
Confirm there are no errors displayed on the operator panel, and then click  
NO on the Check Setup screen.  
NOTE: If you see any errors, click YES and follow the instruction.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
93  
 
4
5
Select Local Installation, and then click Next  
Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen,  
and then click Next  
.
.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try  
the following steps:  
•
•
Click Refresh to update the information.  
Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.  
6
7
Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and  
then click Next  
.
Select the software to be installed, and then click Install  
.
The Congratulations! screen appears.  
8
Click Finish to exit this tool.  
The wireless configuration is complete.  
NOTE: For WPS-PBC operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the  
manual supplied with the wireless LAN access point.  
When the WPS-PBC operation is successful and the printer is rebooted,  
wireless LAN connection is completed.  
Operator Panel  
1
Select Operator Panel, and then click Next.  
94  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
 
2
3
Follow the instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.  
Confirm there are no errors displayed on the operator panel, and then click  
NO on the Check Setup screen.  
NOTE: If you see any errors, click YES and follow the instruction.  
4
5
Select Local Installation, and then click Next  
Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen,  
and then click Next  
.
.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen,  
try the following steps:  
•
Click Refresh to update the information.  
•
Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer  
manually.  
6
7
Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and  
then click Next  
.
Select the software to be installed, and then click Install  
.
The Congratulations! screen appears.  
8
Click Finish to exit this tool.  
The wireless configuration is complete.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
95  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
1
2
3
Select Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, and then click Next.  
Follow the instructions until the Check Setup screen appears.  
Confirm there are no errors displayed on the operator panel, and then click  
NO on the Check Setup screen.  
NOTE: If you see any errors, click YES and follow the instruction.  
4
5
Select Local Installation, and then click Next  
Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen,  
and then click Next  
.
.
NOTE: If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen, try  
the following steps:  
•
•
Click Refresh to update the information.  
Click Add Printer, and then enter the details of the printer manually.  
6
7
Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen, and  
then click Next  
.
Select the software to be installed, and then click Install  
.
The Congratulations! screen appears.  
8
Click Finish to exit this tool.  
The wireless configuration is complete.  
96  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
 
When the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool operation is successful and  
the printer is rebooted, wireless LAN connection is completed.  
Setting up a New Wireless Network Environment for Your Computer  
(When you need to setup your wireless connectivity with your  
computer)  
For DHCP network:  
1
Setting up your computer for wireless connectivity:  
NOTE: You can also change the wireless settings using the wireless  
application that may be installed in your computer.  
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:  
a
b
c
d
Select Network Connections from Control Panel.  
Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties  
.
Select the Wireless Networks tab.  
Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless  
network settings is checked.  
NOTE: Make note of the wireless settings on the Advanced window  
(step f) and the Wireless Network Properties window (step g). You may  
require these settings later.  
e
f
Click the Advanced button.  
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the  
Advanced dialog box.  
g
h
Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties  
On the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK  
Network name (SSID) dell_device  
Network Authentication Open  
Data encryption Disabled  
Ad hoc network checked  
.
.
:
:
:
:
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
97  
 
i
j
Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top  
of the list.  
Click OK to close the Property dialog box.  
For Windows Vista:  
a
b
c
d
e
Open Control Panel  
Select Network and Internet  
Select Network and Sharing Center  
Select Connect to a network  
Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a  
network  
.
.
.
.
.
f
Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are  
entering an unsecured area.  
g
Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a  
success.  
For Windows Server 2008:  
a
b
c
d
Open Control Panel  
Select Network and Sharing Center  
Select Connect to a network  
Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a  
network  
.
.
.
.
e
Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are  
entering an unsecured area.  
98  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
f
Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a  
success.  
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:  
a
b
c
d
e
Open Control Panel  
Select Network and Internet  
Select Network and Sharing Center  
Select Connect to a network  
Select dell_device from the network items listed in the available  
network list, and click Connect  
Check the IP address assigned by AutoIP on the printer.  
.
.
.
.
.
2
a
b
Press the  
Press the  
(Menu) button on the printer operator panel.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
c
d
e
f
Press the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button until Network is highlighted, and then press the  
button until TCP/IP is highlighted, and then press the  
button until IPv4 is highlighted, and then press the  
the  
button.  
Press the  
button.  
Press the  
button.  
Press the  
button.  
(Default IP address range: 169.254.xxx.yyy)  
IP Address  
169.254.000.041  
3
Ensure that the IP Address on your computer is assigned by DHCP.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
99  
4
Enter the IP address in the address bar on your web browser.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool page appears.  
5
Create wireless setting of the printer on Dell Printer Configuration Web  
Tool  
.
6
7
Reboot the printer.  
Restore the wireless settings on your computer.  
100  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
NOTE: If the operating system on your computer provides a wireless  
configuration software, use it to change the wireless settings. See the  
instructions below.  
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:  
a
b
c
d
e
Open Control Panel  
.
Select Network Connections  
.
Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties  
.
Select Wireless Network tab.  
Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless  
network settings is checked.  
f
Click Advanced.  
g
You can either set the printer to the ad-hoc mode or the infrastructure  
mode.  
For Adhoc mode:  
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the  
dialog box.  
For Infrastructure mode:  
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the  
dialog box.  
h
i
Click Add to display Wireless network properties.  
Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK  
Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.  
Click OK to close the Property dialog box.  
.
j
k
For Windows Vista:  
a
b
c
d
e
Open Control Panel  
Select Network and Internet  
Select Network and Sharing Center  
Select Connect to a network  
Select the network, and then click Connect  
.
.
.
.
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
101  
f
Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are  
entering an unsecured area.  
g
Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a  
success.  
For Windows Server 2008:  
a
b
c
d
e
Open Control Panel  
Select Network and Sharing Center  
Select Connect to a network  
Select the network, and then click Connect  
.
.
.
.
Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are  
entering an unsecured area.  
f
Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a  
success.  
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:  
a
b
c
d
e
f
Open Control Panel  
Select Network and Internet  
Select Network and Sharing Center  
Select Connect to a network  
Select the network, and then click Connect  
Enter the Security key and click OK, if necessary.  
.
.
.
.
.
For Fixed IP networks:  
1
Set up your computer for wireless connectivity:  
NOTE: If the operating system on your computer provides a wireless configuration  
software, use it to change the wireless settings. See the instructions below.  
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:  
a
b
c
d
Select Network Connections from Control Panel.  
Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties  
Select the Wireless Networks tab.  
.
Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless  
network settings is checked.  
102  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
NOTE: Be sure to write down the current wireless computer settings in step d  
and step f so that you can restore them later.  
e
f
Click the Advanced button.  
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the  
Advanced dialog box.  
g
h
Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties.  
On the Association tab, enter the following information and click OK  
Network name (SSID) dell_device  
Network Authentication Open  
Data encryption Disabled  
Ad hoc network checked  
.
:
:
:
:
i
j
Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top  
of the list.  
Click OK to close the Property dialog box.  
For Windows Vista:  
a
b
c
d
e
Open Control Panel  
Select Network and Internet  
Select Network and Sharing Center  
Select Connect to a network  
Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a  
network  
.
.
.
.
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
103  
f
Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are  
entering an unsecured area.  
g
Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a  
success.  
For Windows Server 2008:  
a
b
c
d
Open Control Panel  
Select Network and Sharing Center  
Select Connect to a network  
Select dell_device from the network items listed in Connect to a  
network  
.
.
.
.
e
f
Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are  
entering an unsecured area.  
Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a  
success.  
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:  
a
b
c
d
e
Open Control Panel  
Select Network and Internet  
Select Network and Sharing Center  
Select Connect to a network  
Select dell_device from the network items listed in the available  
network list, and click Connect  
.
.
.
.
.
2
Check the IP address on your computer.  
104  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
3
4
Set the IP address on the printer.  
See "Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.  
Enter the IP address in the address bar on your web browser.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool page appears.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
105  
5
Change the wireless setting of the printer on Dell Printer Configuration  
Web Tool  
.
6
7
Reboot the printer.  
Restore the wireless settings on your computer.  
NOTE: If the operating system on your computer provides a wireless  
configuration software, use it to change the wireless settings. Or you can  
change the wireless settings using the tool provided with the operating  
system. See the instructions below.  
For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003:  
a
b
c
d
Select Network Connections from Control Panel.  
Right-click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties  
Select Wireless Network tab.  
.
Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless  
network settings is checked.  
e
f
Click Advanced.  
You can either set the printer to the ad-hoc mode or the infrastructure  
mode.  
For Adhoc mode:  
Select Computer to Computer (ad hoc) networks only and close the  
dialog box.  
For Infrastructure mode:  
Select Access point (Infrastructure) networks only and close the  
dialog box.  
g
h
i
Click Add to display Wireless network properties.  
Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK  
Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list.  
Click OK to close the Property dialog box.  
.
j
For Windows Vista:  
a
b
Open Control Panel  
.
Select Network and Internet  
.
106  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
c
d
e
f
Select Network and Sharing Center  
Select Connect to a network  
Select the network, and then click Connect  
.
.
.
Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are  
entering an unsecured area.  
g
Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a  
success.  
For Windows Server 2008:  
a
b
c
d
e
Open Control Panel  
Select Network and Sharing Center  
Select Connect to a network  
Select the network, and then click Connect  
.
.
.
.
Select Connect Anyway in the warning dialog box indicating you are  
entering an unsecured area.  
f
Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a  
success.  
For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7:  
a
b
c
d
e
f
Open Control Panel  
Select Network and Internet  
Select Network and Sharing Center  
Select Connect to a network  
Select the network, and then click Connect  
Enter the Security key and click OK, if necessary.  
.
.
.
.
.
Setting Up for Shared Printing  
You can share your new printer on the network using the Drivers and Utilities  
CD that shipped with your printer, or using Windows Point and Print or peer-  
®
to-peer method. However, if you use either of the Microsoft methods you  
will not get features such as the status monitor and other printer utilities,  
which will get installed with the Drivers and Utilities CD.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
107  
 
If you want to use the printer on a network, share the printer and install its  
drivers on all the computers on the network.  
NOTE: You need to purchase a Ethernet cable separately for shared printing.  
For Windows® XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server® 2003, Windows  
Server 2003 x64 Edition  
1
2
3
Click Start  
ï‚®
Printers and Faxes.  
Right-click this printer icon and select Properties  
.
From the Sharing tab, check the Share this printer check box, and then  
type a name in the Share name text box.  
4
5
Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network  
clients using this printer.  
Click OK  
.
If the files are not present in your computer, then you will be prompted to  
insert the server operating system CD.  
For Windows Vista®, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Click Start  
ï‚®
Control Panel  
ï‚®
Hardware and Sound  
ï‚®
Printers.  
Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing  
.
Click Change sharing options button.  
The "Windows needs your permission to continue" appears.  
Click Continue button.  
Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share  
name text box.  
7
8
Select Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network  
clients using this printer.  
Click OK  
.
For Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition  
1
2
3
Click Start  
ï‚®
Control Panel  
ï‚®
Printers.  
Right-click the printer icon and select Sharing  
.
Click Change Sharing Options button if exists.  
108  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
4
5
6
Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share  
name text box.  
Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network  
clients using this printer.  
Click OK  
.
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2  
1
2
3
Click Start  
Right-click the printer icon and select Printer properties  
On the Sharing tab, click Change Sharing Options button if exists, and  
then click Yes  
ï‚®
Devices and Printers.  
.
.
4
5
Select the Share this printer check box, and then type a name in the Share  
name text box.  
Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network  
clients using this printer.  
6
7
Click OK  
.
Click Apply, and then click OK  
.
To check that the printer is shared:  
•
Ensure that the printer object in the Printers, Printers and Faxes, or  
Devices and Printers folder is shared. The share icon is shown under the  
printer icon.  
•
Browse Network or My Network Places. Find the host name of the server  
and look for the shared name you assigned to the printer.  
Now that the printer is shared, you can install the printer on network clients  
using the Point and Print method or the peer-to-peer method.  
Point and Print  
Point and Print is a Microsoft Windows technology that allows you to connect  
to a remote printer. This feature automatically downloads and installs the  
printer driver.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
109  
   
For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows  
Server 2003 x64 Edition  
1
2
3
On the Windows desktop of the client computer, double-click My  
Network Places  
.
Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the  
host name.  
Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect  
.
Wait for the driver information to be copied from the server computer to  
the client computer, and for a new printer object to be added to the  
Printers and Faxes folder. The time taken to copy varies based on the  
network traffic.  
Close My Network Places  
.
4
Print a test page to verify installation.  
a
Click start  
Edition)  
(
ï‚®
Start for Windows Server 2003 / Windows Server 2003 x64  
Settings (for Windows XP / Windows XP 64-bit Edition)  
ï‚®
Printers and Faxes  
Select the printer you have installed.  
Click File Properties  
On the General tab, click Print Test Page  
.
b
c
d
ï‚®
.
.
110  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.  
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition  
1
2
3
4
5
Click Start  
Locate and double-click the host name of the server computer.  
Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect  
Click Install driver  
Click Continue in User Account Control dialog box.  
ï‚®
Network.  
.
.
Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A  
new printer object is added to the Printers folder. The duration of this  
procedure may vary based on the network traffic.  
6
Print a test page to verify installation.  
a
b
c
d
Click Start  
ï‚®
Control Panel  
ï‚®
Hardware and Sound.  
Select Printers  
.
Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties  
On the General tab, click Print Test Page  
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.  
.
.
For Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition  
1
2
Click Start  
ï‚®
Network.  
Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the  
host name.  
3
4
5
Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect  
.
Click Install driver  
.
Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A  
new printer object will be added to the Printers folder. The time taken for  
these activities varies based on network traffic.  
6
Print a test page to verify installation.  
a
b
c
Click Start  
ï‚®
Control Panel.  
Select Printers  
.
Right-click the printer you just created and select Properties  
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
111  
d
On the General tab, click Print Test Page  
.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.  
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2  
1
2
Click Start  
ï‚®
Network (Start  
ï‚®
Network for Windows Server 2008 R2).  
Locate the host name of the server computer, and then double-click the  
host name.  
3
4
5
Right-click the shared printer name, and then click Connect  
Click Install driver  
Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer. A  
.
.
new printer object will be added to the Printers folder. The time taken for  
these activities varies based on network traffic.  
6
Print a test page to verify installation.  
a
b
c
Click Start  
Right-click the printer you just created and select Printer properties  
On the General tab, click Print Test Page  
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.  
ï‚®
Devices and Printers.  
.
.
Peer-to-Peer  
If you use the peer-to-peer method, the printer driver is installed on each  
client computer. The client computers can modify the drivers and handle the  
print jobs.  
For Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows  
Server 2003 x64 Edition  
1
Click start  
Edition)  
(
ï‚®
Start for Windows Server 2003 / Windows Server 2003 x64  
Settings (for Windows XP / Windows XP 64-bit Edition)  
Printers and Faxes  
Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.  
Click Next  
.
2
3
4
.
Select A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer, and  
then click Next. If the printer is not listed, type in the path of the printer  
in the text box.  
112  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
   
For example:\\<server host name>\<shared printer name>  
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it  
to the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the  
server installation process.  
5
Click Browse for a printer, and then click Next.  
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If  
no system driver is available, specify the location where the driver is  
available.  
6
7
Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then  
click Next  
If you want to verify installation, click Yes to print a test page.  
Click Finish  
When a test page prints successfully, installation is complete.  
.
.
For Windows Vista, Windows Vista 64-bit Edition  
1
2
3
Click Start  
ï‚®
Control Panel  
ï‚®
Hardware and Sound  
ï‚®
Printers.  
Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard  
.
Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next  
If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or select The  
printer that I want isn't listed and type in the path of the printer in the  
.
Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next  
.
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
113  
For example:\\<server host name>\<shared printer name>  
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it  
on the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the  
server installation process.  
4
5
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If  
no system driver is available, specify the location where the driver is  
available.  
Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then  
click Next  
If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page  
Click Finish  
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.  
.
6
7
.
.
For Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 64-bit Edition  
1
2
3
Click Start  
ï‚®
Control Panel  
ï‚®
Printers.  
Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.  
Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer, and then click Next  
If the printer is listed, select the printer and click Next, or select The  
printer that I want isn't listed and type in the path of the printer in the  
.
Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next  
.
For example: \\<server host name>\<shared printer  
name>  
114  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it  
on the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the  
server installation process.  
4
5
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If  
no system driver is available, specify the location where the driver is  
available.  
Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then  
click Next  
If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page  
Click Finish  
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.  
.
6
7
.
.
For Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2  
1
2
3
Click Start  
ï‚®
Devices and Printers.  
Click Add a Printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.  
Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer. If the printer is listed,  
select the printer and click Next, or select The printer that I want isn't  
listed. Click Select a shared printer by name and type in the path of the  
printer in the text box, and then click Next  
.
For example: \\<server host name>\<shared printer  
name>  
The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it  
to the network. The shared printer name is the name assigned during the  
server installation process.  
4
If this is a new printer, you may be prompted to install a printer driver. If  
no system driver is available, you need to specify the path to the available  
drivers.  
5
6
Confirm the printer name, and then click Next  
Select Yes if you want this printer to be set as the default printer, and then  
click Next  
If you want to verify installation, click Print a test page  
Click Finish  
.
.
7
8
.
.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
115  
116  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Windows  
10  
Installing Printer Drivers on  
Computers Running Macintosh  
Installing the Drivers and Software  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Run the Drivers and Utilities CD on the Macintosh computer.  
Double-click the Dell 1355cnw Installer icon, and then click Continue  
Click Continue on the Introduction screen.  
.
Confirm the installation location, and then click Continue  
.
Click Install to perform the standard installation.  
Type the administrator's name and password, and then click OK  
Click Install to proceed with the installation.  
Click Close to complete installation.  
.
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.5 or Later Version(s)  
When Using a USB connection  
1
2
3
4
5
Turn on the printer.  
Connect the USB cable between the printer and Macintosh computer.  
Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax  
Click the Plus (+) sign, and click Default  
.
.
Select the printer connected via USB from the Printer Name list.  
Name and Print Using are automatically entered.  
6
Click Add.  
When Using Bonjour  
1
2
Turn on the printer.  
Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh  
117  
       
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the  
printer and the network.  
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is  
configured properly on your Macintosh computer and printer.  
3
4
5
Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax  
.
Click the Plus (+) sign, and click Default  
.
Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list.  
Name and Print Using are automatically entered.  
6
Click Add.  
When Using IP Printing  
1
2
Turn on the printer.  
Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.  
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the  
printer and the network.  
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is  
configured properly on your Macintosh computer and printer.  
3
4
5
6
7
Open the System Preferences, and click Print & Fax  
Click the Plus (+) sign, and click IP  
Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol  
Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area.  
Select the model of your printer for Print Using  
.
.
.
.
NOTE: When the printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is  
displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.  
8
Click Add.  
Adding a Printer on Mac OS X 10.4.11  
When Using a USB Connection  
1
2
Turn on the printer.  
Connect the USB cable between the printer and Macintosh computer.  
118  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh  
 
3
Start Printer Setup Utility  
.
NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.  
4
5
6
Click Add  
.
Click Default Browser in the Printer Browser dialog box.  
Select the printer connected via USB from the Printer list.  
Name and Print Using are automatically entered.  
7
Click Add.  
When Using Bonjour  
1
2
Turn on the printer.  
Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.  
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the  
printer and the network.  
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is  
configured properly on your Macintosh computer and printer.  
3
Start the Printer Setup Utility  
.
NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.  
4
5
6
Click Add  
.
Click Default Browser in the Printer Browser dialog box.  
Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list.  
Name and Print Using are automatically entered.  
7
Click Add.  
When Using IP Printing  
1
2
Turn on the printer.  
Ensure that your Macintosh computer is connected to the network.  
If you use wired connection, connect the Ethernet cable between the  
printer and the network.  
If you use wireless connection, ensure that wireless connection is  
configured properly on your Macintosh computer and printer.  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh  
119  
3
Start Printer Setup Utility  
.
NOTE: You can find Printer Setup Utility in the Utilities folder in Applications.  
4
5
6
7
8
Click Add  
.
Click IP Printer in the Printer Browser dialog box.  
Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol  
Type the IP address for the printer in the Address area.  
Select the model of your printer for Print Using  
.
.
NOTE: When the printing is set up using IP printing, the queue name is  
displayed as blank. You do not need to specify it.  
9
Click Add  
.
120  
Installing Printer Drivers on Computers Running Macintosh  
Using Your Printer  
121  
 
122  
11  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
Overview  
NOTE: This web tool is available only when the printer is connected to a network.  
One of the features of the Dellâ„¢ Printer Configuration Web Tool is the E-  
Mail Alert Setup, which sends an e-mail to you or the key operator when the  
printer needs supplies or intervention.  
To fill up the printer inventory report, enter the asset tag of all the required  
printers using the Printer Information feature in the Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool. Enter the IP address of each printer on the network  
to display the asset tag number.  
The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool feature also allows you to change  
the printer settings and keep track of printing trends.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
123  
         
To launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of your  
printer in your web browser.  
If you do not know the IP address of your printer, print the system settings  
page, or display the TCP/IP Settings page, which lists the IP address.  
The Operator Panel  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
Press the  
button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press  
the  
button.  
Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
The system settings page is printed.  
5
Confirm the IP address next to IP Address under Network on the system  
settings page.  
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, wait for a few minutes to resolve the IP  
address automatically, and then print the system settings page again.  
If the IP address is not resolved automatically, see "Assigning an IP Address  
(for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.  
The Tool Box  
NOTE: When the printer is connected to the USB port, TCP/IP Settings cannot be  
displayed.  
NOTE:  
1
2
Click Startï‚® All Programsï‚® Dell Printersï‚® Dell 1355 Multifunction Color  
Printerï‚® Tool Box  
.
NOTE: When multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer, the  
Select Printer window appears. In this case, click the name of this printer  
listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.  
The Tool Box opens.  
Click the Printer Settings Report tab.  
124  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
   
3
Select TCP/IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page.  
The TCP/IP Settings page is displayed.  
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0 (the factory default) or 169.254.xx.xx,  
an IP address has not been assigned. To assign an IP address for your printer,  
see "Assigning an IP Address (for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.  
Using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool for:  
Printer Status  
Use the Printer Status menu to get feedback on the printer status. When a  
toner cartridge is running low, click the order supplies link on the first screen  
to order an additional toner cartridge.  
Printer Jobs  
Use the Printer Jobs menu to contain information on the Job List page and  
Completed Jobs page.  
These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.  
Printer Settings  
Use the Printer Settings menu to change printer settings and view the settings  
in the operator panel remotely.  
Print Server Settings  
Using the Print Server Settings menu to change the type of printer interface  
and necessary conditions for communications.  
Print Volume  
Use the Print Volume option to check the number of pages printed for each  
paper size.  
Address Book  
Use the Address Book menu to view or edit the e-mail address, phone number,  
server address, and fax number entries in the Address Book, or to register new  
entries.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
125  
                   
Printer Information  
Use the Printer Information menu to display the information of your printer.  
Tray Settings  
Use the Tray Settings menu to get information about the paper size and type  
of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).  
E-Mail Alert  
Use the E-Mail Alert menu to receive an e-mail when the printer needs  
supplies or intervention. Enter your name or the key operator name in the e-  
mail list box to be notified. Set E-mail Alert also when using the Scan to E-  
mail feature.  
Set Password  
Use the Set Password menu to lock the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
with a password so that other users do not inadvertently change the printer  
settings you selected.  
NOTE: You must log in as an administrator to use this feature.  
Online Help  
Click Online Help to visit the Dell Support web site.  
Order Supplies at:  
Contact Dell Support at:  
Setting Up the Dell Printer Configuration Web  
Tool  
Ensure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell  
Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
It is recommended that you configure the environment settings of your web  
browser before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
126  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
                 
NOTE: The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be unreadable if the  
language differs from that of your web browser.  
Setting Up From Web Browser  
It is recommended that you configure both the environment settings of your  
web browser and the operator panel before using the Dell Printer Configuration  
Web Tool.  
For Internet Explorer® 6.0, Internet Explorer 7.0, Internet Explorer 8.0  
Setting Up the Display Language  
1
2
3
Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar.  
Select Languages in the General tab.  
Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language list.  
For example:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Italian (Italy) [it-IT]  
Spanish (Traditional Sort) [es-ES tradnl]  
German (Germany) [de-DE]  
French (France) [fr-FR]  
English (United States) [en-us]  
Danish [da-DK]  
Dutch (Netherlands) [nl-NL]  
Norwegian (Bokmal) [no]  
Swedish [sv-SE]  
Setting the IP Address of the printer to Non-Proxy  
1
2
Select Internet Options from the Tools menu.  
Click LAN Settings under Local Area Network (LAN) settings in the  
Connections tab.  
3
You can configure the LAN settings in one of the following ways:  
•
•
Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box under Proxy server  
.
Click Advanced, and then specify the IP address of your printer in the  
Do not use proxy server for addresses beginning with field under  
Exceptions  
.
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
127  
   
After setting the language and proxy, enter  
<http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/> (the IP address of your printer) in the  
URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web  
Tool.  
For Firefox 2.0 or Later  
Setting Up the Display Language  
1
2
3
Select Options from the Tools menu.  
Click Advanced  
.
When you use Firefox 2.0, click Choose in the General tab. When you use  
Firefox 3.0, click Choose in the Content tab.  
4
Specify the display language in order of preference in the Languages in  
order of preference list.  
For example:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
English [en] or English/United States [en-us]  
Italian [it]  
Spanish [es]  
German [de]  
French [fr]  
Dutch [nl]  
Norwegian [no]  
Swedish [sv]  
Danish [da]  
Setting the IP Address of the printer to Non-Proxy  
1
2
3
4
5
Select Options from the Tools menu.  
Click Advanced tab.  
Click Network on the Options dialog box.  
Click Connection  
ï‚®
Settings.  
When you use Firefox 2.0, do one of the following:  
•
•
Select the Direct connection to the Internet check box.  
Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box.  
128  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
•
•
Select the Manual proxy configuration check box, and then enter the IP  
address of your printer in the No Proxy for edit box.  
Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box.  
When you use Firefox 3.0, do one of the following:  
•
•
•
Select the No Proxy check box, if you do not want to use a proxy.  
Select the Auto-detect proxy settings for this network check box.  
Select the Manual proxy configuration check box, and then enter a  
hostname and a port number if you have a list of one or more proxy  
servers. If you have an IP address that does not use a proxy, enter the  
IP address of your printer in the No Proxy for edit box.  
•
Select the Automatic proxy configuration URL check box.  
After setting the language and proxy, enter  
<http://nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn/> (the IP address of your printer) in the  
URL entry field of the browser to activate the Dell Printer Configuration Web  
Tool.  
Setting Up From Operator Panel  
You can launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when EWS is set to  
Enable (the factory default) on the operator panel. Check the operator  
panel setting if you cannot launch the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For  
more information, see "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 359.  
Page Display Format  
The layout of the page is divided into three sections.  
Top Frame  
The top frame is located on the top of all pages. When the Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool is activated, the current status and specifications of  
the printer are displayed in the top frame on every page.  
The following items are displayed in the top frame.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
129  
         
1
Dell 1355cnw Displays the printer model name.  
MFP  
2
3
IP Address  
Location  
Displays the IP address of your printer.  
Displays the location of the printer. The location can be  
changed in the Basic Information on the Print Server  
Settings page.  
4
5
Contact Person Displays the administrator name of the printer. The name  
can be changed in the Basic Information on the Print  
Server Settings page.  
Printer Bitmap Shows the bitmap image of the printer. The Printer Status  
menu appears in the right frame when you click the image.  
Left Frame  
The left frame is located on the left side of all pages. The menu titles  
displayed in the left frame are linked to corresponding menus and pages. You  
can go to the corresponding page by clicking their characters.  
The following menus are displayed in the left frame.  
130  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
         
1
2
3
4
Printer Status  
Printer Jobs  
Links to the Printer Status menu.  
Links to the Printer Jobs menu.  
Printer Settings  
Links to the Printer Settings Report menu.  
Links to the Print Server Reports menu.  
Print Server  
Settings  
5
Print Volume  
Address Book  
Links to the Print Volume menu  
6
Links to the Address Book menu.  
7
Printer Information Links to the Printer Status menu.  
8
Tray Settings  
E-Mail Alert  
Set Password  
Online Help  
Links to the Tray Settings menu.  
Links to the Print Server Settings menu.  
Links to the Other Features menu.  
Links to the Dell Support website.  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
Order Supplies at: Links to the Dell web page.  
Contact Dell  
Support at:  
Links to the Dell support page web address:  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
131  
                         
Right Frame  
The right frame is located on the right side of all pages. The contents of the  
right frame correspond to the menu that you select in the left frame. For  
details on the items displayed in the right frame, see "Details of the Menu  
Items" on page 133.  
Buttons in the Right Frame  
1
2
Refresh button  
Receives the current printer configuration and updates  
the latest information in the right frame.  
Apply New Settings Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer  
button  
Configuration Web Tool to the printer. The new  
settings replace the old settings of the printer.  
3
Restore Settings  
button  
Restores the old settings. New settings will not be  
submitted to the printer.  
132  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
         
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items  
Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool. When you access these menus, the authentication  
window appears on the screen. Enter a user name and password of the  
administrator by following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.  
The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank  
(NULL). You can change only the password in the Set Password page in the  
Other Features menu. For more information, see "Set Password" on page 178.  
Details of the Menu Items  
"Printer Status"  
"Printer Jobs"  
"Printer Status"  
"Printer Events"  
"Printer Information"  
"Job List"  
"Completed Jobs"  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
133  
       
"Printer  
Settings"  
"PrinterSettings "Menu Settings"  
Report"  
"Reports"  
"Printer  
Settings"  
"System Settings"  
"Secure Settings"  
"Copy Color Balance"  
"Copy Settings"  
"Scan Defaults"  
"Fax Defaults"  
"Fax Settings"  
"Printer  
"Paper Density"  
Maintenance"  
"Adjust BTR"  
"Adjust Fuser"  
"Auto Registration Adjustment"  
"Color Registration Adjustment"  
"Clean Developer"  
"Adjust Altitude"  
"Reset Defaults"  
"Non-Dell Toner"  
"Clock Settings"  
"Web Link Customization"  
134  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
"Print Server  
Settings"  
"Print Server  
Reports"  
"Print Server Setup Page"  
"E-Mail Alert Setup Page"  
"Basic Information"  
"Print Server  
Settings"  
"Wireless LAN (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction  
*1  
Color Printer only)"  
"TCP/IP"  
"E-Mail Alert"  
"SNMP"  
"Scan to PC"  
"Other  
"Set Password"  
Features"  
"Reset Print Server"  
"Print Volume"  
"Print Volume"  
"Address Book" "Fax/E-mail"  
"Address Book - Top Page"  
"Address Book (Confirm/Change, Create)"  
"Address Book (Delete)"  
"FAX Group - Top Page"  
"FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)"  
"FAX Group (Delete)"  
"E-Mail Group - Top Page"  
"E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)"  
"E-Mail Group (Delete)"  
"E-Mail Default Setup"  
"Server Address" "Server Address - Top Page"  
"Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)"  
"Server Address (Delete)"  
"Tray Settings"  
*1  
This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wireless network.  
Printer Status  
Use the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables, hardware,  
and specifications of the printer.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
135  
   
The following pages are displayed in the Printer Status menu.  
Printer Status  
Purpose:  
To check the status of the consumables and trays.  
Values:  
Cyan Cartridge Level  
Magenta Cartridge Level  
Yellow Cartridge Level  
Black Cartridge Level  
Displays the percentage of toner remaining in  
each toner cartridge. When a cartridge is  
empty, a message appears. The text Call or  
Order is linked to the Dell Printer Supplies  
website.  
Paper Trays  
Status  
OK  
Indicates that there is some paper in the tray  
but the quantity is unknown.  
Add Paper Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.  
Capacity  
Displays the maximum capacity of the paper  
tray.  
Size  
Displays the size of paper in the tray.  
Output Tray  
Cover  
Status  
Capacity  
OK  
Indicates that the tray is available.  
Displays the maximum capacity of the  
output tray.  
Status  
Closed  
Open  
Indicates that the cover is closed.  
Indicates that the cover is open.  
Printer Type  
Displays the type of the printer. Color Laser  
is displayed normally.  
Printing Speed  
Displays the printing speed.  
Printer Events  
Purpose:  
When faults such as Out of Paper or Rear Cover is Open occur, the details of  
all alerts or indications of faults are displayed in the Printer Events page.  
Values:  
136  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
                 
Location  
Details  
Displays the location where the error occurred.  
Displays the details of the error.  
Printer Information  
Purpose:  
To display the system information of the printer. This page can also be  
displayed by clicking Printer Information in the left frame.  
Values:  
Dell Service Tag Number  
Asset Tag Number  
Displays Dell's service tag number.  
Displays the asset tag number of the printer.  
Displays the serial number of the printer.  
Displays the memory capacity.  
Printer Serial Number  
Memory Capacity  
Processor Speed  
Displays the processing speed.  
PrinterRevision Firmware  
Displays the version of the controller.  
Levels  
Version  
Network  
Firmware  
Version  
Displays the NIC version.  
Printer Jobs  
The Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed  
Jobs pages. These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol  
or the print jobs.  
Job List  
Purpose:  
To confirm the print jobs that are being processed. Click the Refresh button to  
update the screen.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays the job ID.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
137  
                                 
Job Name  
Owner  
Displays the file name of the job being printed  
Displays the name of the job owner.  
Displays the name of the host computer.  
Displays the status of the job being printed.  
Displays the type of the job.  
.
Host Name  
Job Status  
Job Type  
Host I/F  
Displays the status of the host interface.  
Job Submitted Displays the date when the print job was submitted.  
Time  
Completed Jobs  
Purpose:  
To check the completed jobs. Up to 20 latest jobs are displayed. Click the  
Refresh button to update the screen.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays the job ID.  
Job Name  
Owner  
Displays the file name of the job.  
Displays the name of the job owner.  
Displays the name of the host computer.  
Host Name  
Output Result Displays the status of the job.  
Job Type  
Displays the type of the job.  
Impression  
Number  
Displays the total number of pages used by the print job.  
No. of Sheets  
Host I/F  
Displays the total number of sheets used by the print job.  
Displays the status of the host interface.  
Job Submitted Displays the date when the job was submitted.  
Time  
Printer Settings  
Use the Printer Settings menu to display the Printer Settings Report and to  
configure the printer settings.  
The following tabbed pages are displayed at the top of the right frame.  
138  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
                             
Printer Settings Report  
The Printer Settings Report tab contains the Menu Settings and Reports pages.  
Menu Settings  
Purpose:  
To display the current settings of your printer.  
Values:  
System Settings Power Saver  
Timer - Sleep  
Displays the time taken by the printer before it  
enters the power saver timer - sleep after it  
finishes a job.  
Power Saver  
Timer - Deep  
Sleep  
Displays the time taken by the printer before it  
enters the power saver timer - deep sleep after it  
goes into the power saver timer mode 1.  
Auto Reset  
Displays the time taken by the printer before it  
automatically resets the settings for Copy, Scan, or  
Fax on the operator panel to the defaults when no  
additional settings are made.  
Control Panel Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted  
Tone  
when the operator panel input is correct. Off  
indicates that the tone is disabled.  
Panel Alert  
Tone  
Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted  
when the operator panel input is incorrect. Off  
indicates that the tone is disabled.  
Job Tone  
Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted  
when a job is complete. Off indicates that the  
tone is disabled.  
Alert Tone  
Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted  
when a problem occurs. Off indicates that the  
tone is disabled.  
Out of Paper  
Tone  
Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted  
when the printer runs out of paper. Off indicates  
that the tone is disabled.  
Auto Clear  
Alert Tone  
Displays the volume of the tone that is emitted 5  
seconds before the printer performs auto clear. Off  
indicates that the tone is disabled.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
139  
                           
All Tones  
Displays the volume of all the alert tones. Off  
indicates that all the tones are disabled.  
Job Time-Out Displays the amount of time that the printer waits  
for data to arrive from the computer.  
Panel Language Displays the language used on the operator panel.  
Auto Log  
Print  
Displays whether to automatically print a job  
history report after every 20 jobs.  
*1  
mm/inch  
Displays the measurement unit used after the  
numeric value on the operator panel.  
Secure Settings Panel Lock Set Displays whether to limit access to Admin  
Menu with a password.  
Copy Service  
Lock Set  
Displays whether to enable the Copy service or to  
require a password to use the service.  
Scan Service  
Lock Set  
Displays whether to enable the Scan service or to  
require a password to use the service.  
Fax Service  
Lock Set  
Displays whether to enable the Fax service or to  
require a password to use the service.  
Print from USB Displays whether to enable the USB-Print service  
or to require a password to use the service.  
Secure Receive Displays whether to require a password to print  
Set  
incoming faxes.  
Copy Defaults Color  
Displays whether to make copies in color or in  
black and white.  
Reduce/Enlarge Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement  
ratio.  
Original Type Displays the default document type.  
Document Size Displays the default document size.  
Lighter/Darker Displays the default copy density level.  
Sharpness  
Displays the default sharpness level.  
Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of  
the original to enhance text on the copy.  
140  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
                                       
Copy Color  
Balance  
Color Balance Displays the color balance level of red.  
(Red)  
Color Balance Displays the color balance level of green.  
(Green)  
Color Balance Displays the color balance level of blue.  
(Blue)  
Gray Balance  
Displays the gray balance level.  
Copy Settings Multiple-Up  
Displays whether to enable the Multiple-Up  
feature.  
Collated  
Displays whether to sort the copy job.  
Margin  
Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.  
Top/Bottom  
Margin  
Displays the value of the left and right margins.  
Left/Right  
Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
141  
             
Scan Defaults Scan To  
Network  
Displays whether to store scanned image on a  
network server or on a computer.  
File Format  
Displays the file format to save the scanned image.  
Color  
Displays whether to scan in color or in black and  
white.  
Resolution  
Displays the default scan resolution.  
Document Size Displays the default document size.  
Lighter/Darker Displays the default scan density level.  
Sharpness  
Displays the default sharpness level.  
Auto Exposure Displays whether to suppress the background of  
the original to enhance text on the scanned image.  
Margin  
Top/Bottom  
Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.  
Displays the value of the left and right margins.  
Margin  
Left/Right  
Margin Middle Displays the value of the middle margin.  
Image  
Displays the image compression level.  
Compression  
Max E-Mail  
Size  
Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be  
sent.  
Fax Defaults  
Fax Settings  
Resolution  
Displays the resolution level to be used for fax  
transmission.  
Lighter/Darker Displays the default density level to be used for  
fax transmission.  
Delayed Start Displays the fax transmission start time.  
Receive Mode Displays the fax receiving mode.  
Auto Receive  
Fax  
Displays the interval at which the printer goes into  
the fax receive mode after receiving an incoming  
call.  
Auto Receive  
Tel/Fax  
Displays the interval at which the printer goes into  
the fax receive mode after the external telephone  
receives an incoming call.  
Auto Receive  
Answer/Fax  
Displays the interval at which the printer goes into  
the fax receive mode after the external answering  
machine receives an incoming call.  
142  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
                                         
Line Monitor Displays the volume of the line monitor, which  
audibly monitors a transmission through the  
internal speaker until a connection is made.  
Ring Tone  
Volume  
Displays the volume of the ring tone, which  
indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call  
through the internal speaker when Receive Mode  
is set to Telephone/Fax.  
Line Type  
Displays the line type.  
Tone/Pulse  
Displays the dialing type.  
Resend Delay Displays the interval between transmission  
attempts.  
Redial  
Displays the number of redial attempts.  
Attempts  
Redial Delay  
Displays the interval between redial attempts.  
Junk Fax Setup Displays whether to reject faxes sent from  
unwanted numbers.  
Remote Receive Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a  
remote receive code on the external telephone.  
Remote Receive Displays the remote receive code to start Remote  
Tone  
Receive.  
Fax Header  
Displays whether to print the information of  
sender on the header of faxes.  
Fax Header  
Name  
Displays the name of sender to be printed on the  
header of faxes.  
Fax Number  
Displays the fax number to be printed on the  
header of faxes.  
Fax Cover Page Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.  
DRPD Pattern Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection  
(DRPD) setting.  
Sent Fax  
Forward  
Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a  
specified destination.  
Fax Forward  
Number  
Displays the fax number of the destination to  
which incoming faxes are to be forwarded.  
Prefix Dial  
Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
143  
                                   
Prefix Dial  
Number  
Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials  
before any auto dial number is started.  
Discard Size  
Displays whether to discard text or images at the  
bottom of a fax page when the entire page does  
not fit onto the output paper.  
ECM  
Displays whether to enable the Error Correction  
Mode (ECM).  
Modem Speed Displays the fax modem speed.  
Fax Activity  
Displays whether to automatically print a fax  
activity report after every 50 incoming and  
outgoing fax communications.  
Fax Transmit  
Displays whether to print a transmission report  
after every fax transmission or only when an error  
occurs.  
Fax Broadcast Displays whether to print a transmission report  
after every fax transmission to multiple  
destinations or only when an error occurs.  
Fax Protocol  
Displays whether to print a protocol monitor  
report after every fax transmission or only when an  
error occurs.  
Country  
Displays the country where the printer is used.  
Displays the paper density of plain paper.  
Displays the paper density of labels.  
Paper Density Plain  
Label  
144  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
                       
Adjust BTR  
Plain  
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller  
for plain paper.  
Plain Thick  
Covers  
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller  
for thick plain paper.  
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller  
for cover paper.  
Label  
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller  
for labels.  
Coated  
Recycled  
Envelope  
Plain  
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller  
for coated paper.  
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller  
for recycled paper.  
Displays the voltage setting of the transfer roller  
for envelopes.  
Adjust Fuser  
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for  
plain paper.  
Plain Thick  
Covers  
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for  
thick plain paper.  
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for  
cover paper.  
Label  
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for  
labels.  
Coated  
Recycled  
Envelope  
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for  
coated paper.  
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for  
recycled paper.  
Displays the temperature setting of the fuser for  
envelopes.  
Auto Registration Adjustment  
Adjust Altitude  
Displays whether to automatically adjust color  
registration.  
Displays the altitude of the location where the  
printer is installed.  
Non-Dell Toner  
Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another  
manufacturer.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
145  
                       
Clock Settings Date Format  
Time Format  
Displays the default date format.  
Displays the default time format; 24H or 12 Hour  
Clock.  
Time Zone  
Set Date  
Displays the default time zone.  
Displays the date setting.  
Displays the time setting.  
Set Time  
Web Link  
Customization URL  
Select Reorder Displays a link used for ordering consumables,  
which can be accessed from Order Supplies at: in  
the left frame.  
Regular  
Displays the regular web address  
linked to Order Supplies at: in the left frame.  
Premier  
Displays the premier web address  
(http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked to  
Order Supplies at: in the left frame.  
Tray Settings  
Tray 1 Paper  
Type  
Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.  
Tray 1 Paper  
Size  
Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.  
Tray 1 Custom Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in  
Size - Y the MPF.  
Tray 1 Custom Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in  
Size - X the MPF.  
Display Popup Displays whether to use a popup menu that  
prompts the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size  
when the paper is loaded in the MPF.  
*1 If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.  
Reports  
Purpose:  
To print the settings and history information of your printer.  
Values:  
System Settings Click the Start button to print the system settings page.  
146  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
                                     
Panel Settings Click the Start button to print the panel settings page.  
Job History  
Error History  
Address Book  
Demo Page  
Click the Start button to print the Job History report.  
Click the Start button to print the Error History report.  
Click the Start button to print the Address Book report.  
Click the Start button to print the Demo Page.  
Printer Settings  
The Printer Settings tab contains the System Settings, Secure Settings, Copy  
Defaults, Copy Color Balance, Copy Settings, Scan Defaults, Fax Defaults, and Fax  
Settings pages.  
System Settings  
Purpose:  
To configure the basic printer settings.  
Values:  
Power Saver  
Timer - Sleep  
Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters the power  
saver timer mode 1 after it finishes a job.  
*1  
Power Saver  
Timer - Deep  
Sleep  
Specifies the time taken by the printer before it enters the power  
saver timer mode 2 after it goes into the power saver timer mode 1.  
Auto Reset  
Specifies the time taken by the printer before it automatically  
resets the settings for Copy, Scan, or Fax on the operator panel to  
the defaults when no additional settings are made.  
Control Panel  
Tone  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator  
panel input is correct, or disables the tone.  
Panel Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator  
panel input is incorrect, or disables the tone.  
Job Tone  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job is complete,  
or disables the tone.  
Alert Tone  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs,  
or disables the tone.  
Out of Paper  
Tone  
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs  
out of paper, or disables the tone.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
147  
                                 
Auto Clear Alert Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the  
Tone  
printer performs auto clear, or disables the tone.  
All Tones  
Job Time-Out  
Sets the volume of all the alert tones, or disables all the tones.  
Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for data to  
arrive from the computer. The print job is cancelled if it times out.  
Panel Language Used to set the language on the operator panel.  
*2  
Auto Log Print Specifies if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs.  
*3  
mm/inch  
Specifies the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value  
on the operator panel.  
*1 Enter 5 in Power Saver Timer - Sleep to put the printer in the power saver timer mode  
five minutes after it finishes a job. This uses less energy, but requires more warm-up  
time for the printer. Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with room  
lighting and you notice lights flickering.  
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this  
keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time. Select a value  
between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance  
between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.  
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver timer  
mode when it receives data from the computer. You can also return the printer to the  
standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.  
*2 If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.  
*3 The default for mm/inch varies depending on country-specific factory default.  
Secure Settings  
Panel Lock  
Purpose:  
To restrict access to Admin Menu with a password, and to set or change the  
password.  
NOTE: This menu sets a password to lock the operator panel. When you change  
the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Set Password on the  
left frame and set the password.  
Values:  
Panel Lock Set Restricts access to Admin Menu with a password.  
New Password Sets a password that is required to access Admin Menu.  
Re-enter  
Password  
Enter the new password again to confirm.  
148  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
               
Function Enabled  
Purpose:  
To enable the services to be password-enabled, and allow the user to change  
it.  
NOTE: This menu sets a password to limit the Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print  
services. When you change the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web  
Tool, click Set Password you change on the left frame and set the password.  
Values:  
Copy Service  
Lock Set  
Enables you to set a password for the Copy Service feature.  
Enables you to set a password for the Scan Service feature.  
Enables you to set a password for the Fax Service feature.  
Scan Service  
Lock Set  
Fax Service  
Lock Set  
Print from USB Enables you to set a password for the USB-Print Service feature.  
New Password Sets a password required to use the Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print  
services.  
Re-enter  
Password  
Enter the new password again to confirm.  
Secure Receive  
Purpose:  
Enables you to set a password to secure the incoming faxes. When the Secure  
Receive feature is enabled, the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them  
when the correct password is entered on the operator panel.  
NOTE: This menu sets a password to lock printing incoming fax. When changing  
the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, click Set Password on the  
left frame and set the password.  
Values:  
Secure Receive Enables you to set a password to secure the incoming faxes.  
Set  
New Password Sets a password that is required to print incoming faxes.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
149  
                 
Re-enter  
Password  
Enter the new password again to confirm.  
Copy Defaults  
Purpose:  
To create your own default Copy settings.  
Values:  
Color  
Selects mode for color or black and white copying.  
Reduce/Enlarge Sets the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.  
Custom  
Sets a custom reduction/enlargement ratio within the range of 25%  
Reduce/Enlarge to 400% when Reduce/Enlarge is set to Custom.  
Original Type Sets the copy image quality.  
Document Size Sets the default document size.  
Lighter/Darker Sets the default copy density level.  
Sharpness  
Sets the default sharpness level.  
Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance  
text on the copy.  
Copy Color Balance  
Purpose:  
To specify the default color balance level.  
Values:  
Color Balance (Red)  
Sets the color balance level of red.  
Color Balance (Green) Sets the color balance level of green.  
Color Balance (Blue) Sets the color balance level of blue.  
Gray Balance  
Sets the gray balance level.  
Copy Settings  
Purpose:  
To configure the Copy settings.  
150  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
                       
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Values:  
Multiple-Up  
Off*  
Auto  
Does not perform multiple-up printing.  
Automatically reduces the original pages to fit  
onto one sheet of paper.  
ID Copy  
Manual  
Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in  
the original size.  
Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in  
the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.  
Collated  
Sets whether to sort the copy job.  
Margin  
Top/Bottom  
Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0  
mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.  
Margin  
Left/Right  
Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0  
mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.  
Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm to 50  
mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.  
Scan Defaults  
Purpose:  
To create your own default Scan settings.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Values:  
Scan To  
Network  
Computer  
(Network)*  
Stores the scanned image on a computer using the  
Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.  
Server (FTP)  
Stores the scanned image on a server using the  
FTP protocol.  
File Format  
Color  
Sets the file format to save the scanned image.  
Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white.  
Sets the default scan resolution.  
Resolution  
Document Size Sets the default document size.  
Lighter/Darker Sets the default scan density level.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
151  
                       
Sharpness  
Sets the default sharpness level.  
Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background of the original to enhance  
text on the scanned image.  
Margin  
Top/Bottom  
Sets the value of the top and bottom margins within the range of 0  
mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.  
Margin  
Left/Right  
Sets the value of the left and right margins within the range of 0  
mm to 50 mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.  
Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin within the range of 0 mm to 50  
mm/0.0 to 2.0 inch.  
Image  
Sets the image compression level.  
Compression  
Max E-Mail  
Size  
Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range  
of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes. The default is 2048 K bytes.  
Fax Defaults  
Purpose:  
To create your own default Fax settings.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Values:  
Resolution  
Standard*  
Fine  
Suitable for documents with normal sized  
characters.  
Suitable for documents containing small  
characters or thin lines or documents printed  
using a dot-matrix printer.  
Super Fine  
Ultra Fine  
Suitable for documents containing extremely fine  
detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the  
remote machine also supports the super fine  
resolution.  
Suitable for documents containing photographic  
images.  
Lighter/Darker Sets the default density level to be used for fax transmission.  
Delayed Start Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a  
specified time.  
152  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
                       
Fax Settings  
Purpose:  
To configure the basic fax settings.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Values:  
Receive Mode  
Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can  
receive a fax by picking up the handset of the  
external telephone, pressing the remote receive code,  
and then pressing  
Automatically receives faxes.  
Telephone/ When the printer receives an incoming fax, the  
.
Fax*  
Fax  
external telephone rings for the time specified in  
Auto Receive Fax/Tel, and then the printer  
automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not  
a fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker  
indicating that the call is a telephone call.  
Answer  
The printer can share a telephone line with an  
Machine/ answering machine. In this mode, the printer will  
Fax  
monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there  
are fax tones. If the phone communication is using  
serial transmission in your country (such as Germany,  
Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France  
and Switzerland), this mode is not supported.  
DRPD  
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection  
(DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be  
installed on your telephone line by the telephone  
company. After the telephone company has provided  
a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring  
pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that  
specific ring pattern.  
Auto Receive Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive  
mode after receiving an incoming call.  
Auto Receive  
Tel/Fax  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive  
mode after the external telephone receives an incoming call.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
153  
                 
Auto Receive  
Answer/Fax  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive  
mode after the external answering machine receives an incoming  
call.  
Line Monitor  
Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a  
transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is  
made.  
Ring Tone  
Volume  
Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an  
incoming call is a telephone call through the internal speaker  
when Receive Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.  
Line Type  
Sets the line type.  
Tone/Pulse  
Resend Delay  
Sets the dialing type.  
Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.  
Redial Attempts Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the  
destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer will not  
redial.  
Redial Delay  
Specifies the interval between redial attempts.  
Junk Fax Setup Sets whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by  
accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone  
Book.  
Remote Receive Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on  
the external telephone.  
Remote Receive Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote  
Tone  
Receive.  
Fax Header  
Sets whether to print the information of sender on the header of  
faxes.  
Fax Header  
Name  
Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up  
to 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered.  
Fax Number  
Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of  
faxes.  
Fax Cover Page Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.  
DRPD Pattern Sets the DRPD setting from Pattern 1 to Pattern 7. DRPD is a  
service provided by some telephone companies.  
Sent Fax Forward Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.  
Fax Forward  
Number  
Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming  
faxes will be forwarded.  
154  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
                                   
Prefix Dial  
Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number.  
Prefix Dial  
Number  
Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials  
before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the  
Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).  
Discard Size  
Sets whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page  
when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper. Selecting  
Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto  
the output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the  
bottom of the page.  
ECM  
Sets whether to enable the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote  
machines must also support the ECM.  
Modem Speed  
Fax Activity  
Fax Transmit  
Fax Broadcast  
Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or  
reception error occurs.  
Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every  
50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.  
Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax  
transmission or only when an error occurs.  
Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax  
transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error  
occurs.  
Fax Protocol  
Country  
Sets whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax  
transmission or only when an error occurs.  
Sets the country where the printer is used.  
Printer Maintenance  
The Printer Maintenance tab contains the Paper Density, Adjust BTR, Adjust  
Fuser, Auto Registration Adjustment, Color Registration Adjustment, Clean  
Developer, Adjust Altitude, Reset Defaults, Non-Dell Toner, Clock Settings, and  
Web Link Customization pages.  
Paper Density  
Purpose:  
To specify the paper density.  
Values:  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
155  
                           
Plain  
Label  
Sets the paper density of plain paper.  
Sets the paper density of labels.  
Adjust BTR  
Purpose:  
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller  
(BTR). To lower the voltage, set negative values. To increase, set positive  
values.  
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you  
see mottles on the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white  
spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.  
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.  
Values:  
Plain  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for plain  
paper within the range of -3 to 3.  
Plain Thick  
Covers  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for thick  
plain paper within the range of -3 to 3.  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for cover  
paper within the range of -3 to 3.  
Label  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for labels  
within the range of -3 to 3.  
Coated  
Recycled  
Envelope  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for coated  
paper within the range of -3 to 3.  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for recycled  
paper within the range of -3 to 3.  
Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for  
envelopes within the range of -3 to 3.  
Adjust Fuser  
Purpose:  
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fuser. To  
lower the temperature, set negative values. To increase, set positive values.  
156  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
                     
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When  
the printed paper has curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner  
does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.  
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.  
Values:  
Plain  
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for plain paper within  
the range of -3 to 3.  
Plain Thick  
Covers  
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for thick plain paper  
within the range of -3 to 3.  
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for cover paper within  
the range of -3 to 3.  
Label  
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for labels within the  
range of -3 to 3.  
Coated  
Recycled  
Envelope  
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for coated paper within  
the range of -3 to 3.  
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for recycled paper within  
the range of -3 to 3.  
Sets the temperature settings for the fuser for envelopes within the  
range of -3 to 3.  
Auto Registration Adjustment  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to automatically adjust color registration.  
Color Registration Adjustment  
Purpose:  
To automatically adjust color registration.  
Color registration adjustment need to be made during the initial setup of the  
printer or when the printer is moved to a different location.  
NOTE: The Color Registration Adjustment feature can be configured when Auto  
Registration Adjustment is set to Off.  
Clean Developer  
Purpose:  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
157  
                       
To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge, to use  
up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its life, or to  
stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.  
Values:  
Clean  
Click Start to stir the toner in the toner cartridge.  
Developer  
Yellow Toner  
Refresh  
Click Start to clean the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.  
Magenta Toner Click Start to clean the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.  
Refresh  
Cyan Toner  
Refresh  
Click Start to clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.  
Black Toner  
Refresh  
Click Start to clean the toner in the black toner cartridge.  
Adjust Altitude  
Purpose:  
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.  
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with  
barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of  
the location where the printer is being used.  
NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality,  
incorrect indication of remaining toner.  
Values:  
0 meter*  
Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.  
1000 meters  
2000 meters  
3000 meters  
Reset Defaults  
Purpose:  
158  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
           
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) memory for system parameters,  
Address Book data for fax, or Address Book data for e-mail. After executing  
this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset  
to their default values.  
Values:  
Reset Defaults Click Start to initialize the system parameters.  
and Restart  
Printer  
Reset Defaults Click Start to initialize the fax number entries in the Address Book.  
of User (Fax)  
Section  
Reset Defaults Click Start to initialize the e-mail and server address entries in the  
of User (Scan) Address Book.  
Section  
Non-Dell Toner  
Purpose:  
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.  
NOTE: Using non-Dell-brand toner cartridges may make some printer features  
unusable, reduce print quality and decrease the reliability of your printer. Dell  
recommends only new Dell-brand toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not  
provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or  
components not supplied by Dell.  
NOTE: Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart  
the printer.  
Clock Settings  
Purpose:  
To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.  
Values:  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
159  
       
*1  
Date Format  
yy/mm/dd Specifies the date format.  
mm/dd/yy  
dd/mm/yy  
Time Format  
12 Hour  
Clock  
Specifies the time format.  
*
24H  
Time Zone  
Set Date  
Specifies the time zone.  
Specifies the current date.  
Specifies the current time.  
Set Time  
*1  
The default for Date Format varies depending on country-specific factory default.  
Web Link Customization  
Purpose:  
To specify a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from  
Order Supplies at: in the left frame.  
Values:  
Select Reorder Select the Regular or Premier web address to be linked to Order  
URL  
Supplies at: in the left frame.  
Regular  
Displays the regular web address  
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that can be linked to Order  
Supplies at: in the left frame.  
Premier  
Displays the premier web address (http://premier.dell.com) that  
can be linked to Order Supplies at: in the left frame.  
Print Server Settings  
Use the Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and  
necessary conditions for communications.  
The following tabbed pages are displayed in the top of the right frame.  
160  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
       
Print Server Reports  
The Print Server Reports tab contains the Print Server Setup Page and E-Mail  
Alert Setup Page.  
Print Server Setup Page  
Purpose:  
To verify the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control  
Protocol/Internet Protocol) and printing ports. On this page, you can only  
verify the settings of items. If you want to change the settings, go to the pages  
in the Print Server Settings tab.  
Values:  
*1  
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Settings  
Displays the current settings of Ethernet  
transmission rate and the duplex settings.  
Current  
Ethernet  
Settings  
Displays the current Ethernet settings.  
MAC Address Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address  
of the printer.  
*2  
Wireless  
SSID  
Displays the name that identifies the network.  
Network Type Displays the network type from either the Ad-Hoc or  
Infrastructure mode.  
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the wireless printer  
setting.  
Link Channel Displays the channel number of the connection.  
Link Quality Displays the quality of the connection.  
Encryption  
Displays the security method.  
Transmit Key Displays the transmit key.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
161  
                         
TCP/IP  
Settings  
Host Name  
IP Mode  
IPv4  
Displays the host name.  
Displays the IP mode.  
IP Address  
Mode  
Displays the IP address mode.  
IP Address  
Displays the IP address.  
Subnet Mask  
Displays the subnet mask.  
Displays the gateway address.  
Gateway  
Address  
IPv6  
Use Manual  
Address  
Displays the manual IP address.  
Displays the IP address.  
Manual  
Address  
Stateless  
Address 1-3  
Displays the stateless addresses.  
Displays the link local address.  
Displays the gateway address.  
Link Local  
Address  
Manual  
Gateway  
Address  
AutoConfigure Displays the gateway address.  
Gateway  
Address  
DNS  
IPv4  
IPv6  
Get DNS  
Server Address DNS server address automatically  
from DHCP from the DHCP server.  
Displays if the printer receives the  
Manual DNS Displays the DNS server address.  
Server Address  
Get DNS  
Displays if the printer receives the  
Server Address DNS server address automatically  
from DHCPv6- from the DHCPv6-lite server.  
lite  
Manual DNS Displays the DNS server address.  
Server Address  
162  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
                     
LPD  
Port Settings Displays the port status.  
Connection Displays the connection time-out period.  
Time-Out  
Bonjour  
(mDNS)  
Port Settings Displays the port status.  
Port9100  
Port Settings Displays the port status.  
Port Number Displays the port number.  
Connection Displays the connection time-out period.  
Time-Out  
HTTP  
Port Settings Displays the port status.  
Port Number Displays the port number.  
Simultaneous Displays the number of connections received  
Connections simultaneously by the client.  
Connection Displays the connection time-out period.  
Time-Out  
WSD  
Port Settings Displays the WSD (Web Services on Devices) port  
status.  
Port Number Displays the WSD port number.  
Receive  
Displays the receive time-out period.  
Time-Out  
Notification Displays the notification time-out period.  
Time-Out  
Maximum  
Number of  
TTL  
Displays the maximum number of TTLs.  
Maximum  
Number of  
Notification  
Displays the maximum number of notifications.  
SNMP  
Port Settings Displays the port status.  
LLTD  
Port Settings Displays the port status.  
FTP Client  
Connection Displays the connection time-out period.  
Time-Out  
FTP Passive Displays whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
163  
                     
SMB Client  
Connection Displays the connection time-out period.  
Time-Out  
*1  
This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wired network.  
This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wireless network.  
*2  
E-Mail Alert Setup Page  
Purpose:  
To verify the current settings of SMTP/POP (Simple Mail Transfer  
Protocol/Post Office Protocol) used for the e-mail feature and E-Mail Alerts  
feature. In this page, you can only verify the settings of items. If you want to  
change the settings, go to the pages in the Print Server Settings tab.  
Values:  
E-Mail Server Port Status  
Settings  
Displays the port status.  
Primary SMTP Displays the primary SMTP gateway.  
Gateway  
SMTP Port  
Number  
Displays the SMTP port number.  
E-Mail Send  
Displays the authentication method for outgoing  
Authentication e-mail.  
POP3 Server  
Address  
Displays the POP3 server address.  
Displays the POP3 port number.  
POP3 Port  
Number  
Reply Address Displays the reply e-mail address sent with each  
E-mail Alert.  
SMTP Server  
Connection  
Displays the status of the SMTP server  
connection.  
164  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
       
E-Mail Alert  
Settings  
E-Mail List 1  
Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the  
E-Mail Alert feature specified in E-Mail List 1.  
Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts Displays the e-mail alert  
List 1  
receive status for consumables.  
Paper Handling Displays the e-mail alert  
Alerts  
receive status for paper  
handling.  
Service Call  
Displays the e-mail alert  
receive status for service calls.  
E-Mail List 2  
Displays the acceptable e-mail addresses for the  
E-Mail Alert feature specified in E-Mail List 2.  
Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts Displays the e-mail alert  
List 2  
receive status for consumables.  
Paper Handling Displays the e-mail alert  
Alerts  
receive status for paper  
handling.  
Service Call  
Displays the e-mail alert  
receive status for service calls.  
Print Server Settings  
The Print Server Settings tab contains the Basic Information, Port Status, Wireless  
LAN, TCP/IP, E-Mail Alert, SNMP, and Scan To PC pages.  
Basic Information  
Purpose:  
To configure the basic information of the printer.  
Values:  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
165  
         
System Settings Printer Name  
Location  
Specifies the name of the printer using up to 31  
alphanumeric characters.  
Specifies the location of the printer using up to 63  
alphanumeric characters.  
Contact Person Specifies the contact name, number, and other  
information of the administrator and service  
center using up to 63 alphanumeric characters.  
Administrator Specifies the contact address of the administrator  
E-Mail Address and service center using up to 63 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Asset Tag  
Number  
Enter the asset tag number for the printer.  
EWS Settings Auto Refresh  
Automatically refreshes the contents of the status  
display pages.  
Auto Refresh  
Interval  
Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents  
of the status display pages automatically from 15  
to 600 seconds.  
NOTE: The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame,  
Printer Status page, Job List page, and Completed Jobs page.  
Port Settings  
Purpose:  
To enable or disable printing connectors and management protocol features.  
Values:  
166  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
     
*1  
*
Ethernet  
Ethernet  
Settings  
Auto  
Detects Ethernet transmission  
rate and the duplex settings  
automatically.  
10Base-T Half-  
Duplex  
Selects 10Base-T Half-Duplex  
as the default value.  
10Base-T Full-  
Duplex  
Selects 10Base-T Full-Duplex  
as the default value.  
100Base-TX  
Half-Duplex  
Selects 100Base-TX Half-  
Duplex as the default value.  
100Base-TX Full- Selects 100Base-TX Full-  
Duplex  
Duplex as the default value.  
Current Ethernet Settings  
MAC Address  
Displays the current settings of  
Ethernet.  
Displays the MAC address of  
the printer.  
Port Status  
LPD  
Specifies whether to enable LPD.  
Specifies whether to enable Port9100.  
Port9100  
E-Mail Alert  
Specifies whether to enable the E-Mail Alert  
feature.  
SNMP  
WSD  
Specifies whether to enable the SNMP.  
Specifies whether to enable the WSD port.  
Bonjour  
(mDNS)  
Specifies whether to enable the Bonjour(mDNS)  
feature.  
Status Messager Specifies whether to enable the Status Messager.  
LLTD Specifies whether to enable LLTD.  
*1  
This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wired network.  
NOTE: The settings in the Port Settings page will be valid only when the printer is  
rebooted. When you change or configure the settings, click the Apply New Settings  
button to apply the new settings.  
Wireless LAN (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer only)  
Purpose:  
To configure wireless network settings.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
167  
                             
To connect the printer with a wireless network, be sure to disconnect the  
cable.  
NOTE: Once wireless LAN is activated, wired LAN protocol will be disabled.  
Values:  
Wireless  
Settings  
SSID  
Specifies the name that identifies the wireless  
network using up to 32 alphanumeric characters.  
Network Type Specifies the network type from either Ad-Hoc or  
Infrastructure.  
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the wireless network  
setting of the printer.  
Link Channel Displays the channel number of the wireless  
connection of the printer.  
Link Quality  
Displays the quality of the wireless network  
connection of the printer.  
168  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
               
Security  
Settings  
Encryption  
Select the security method from the list.  
*
No Security  
Specifies No Security to  
configure the wireless setting  
without specifying a security  
method from WEP, WPA-  
PSK AES/WPA2-PSK AES,  
and WPA-PSK TKIP.  
WEP 64 Bit  
ASCII (5 Bytes)  
Specifies the WEP 64 Bit  
ASCII to use through the  
wireless network.  
WEP 128 Bit  
Specifies the WEP 128 Bit  
ASCII (13 Bytes) ASCII to use through the  
wireless network.  
WEP 64 Bit Hex Specifies the WEP 64 Bit Hex  
(10 Bytes)  
to use through the wireless  
network.  
WEP 128 Bit Hex Specifies the WEP 128 Bit  
(26 Bytes)  
Hex to use through the  
wireless network.  
*1  
WPA-PSK AES  
Specifies the WPA-PSK AES  
to use through the wireless  
network.  
*1  
WPA2-PSK AES Specifies the WPA2-PSK AES  
to use through the wireless  
network.  
WPA-PSK TKIP  
Specifies the WPA-PSK TKIP  
to use through the wireless  
network.  
WEP Key 1  
Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from  
Encryption.  
Re-enter WEP Key 1  
WEP Key 2  
Enter the WEP key 1 again to confirm.  
Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from  
Encryption.  
Re-enter WEP Key 2  
WEP Key 3  
Enter the WEP key 2 again to confirm.  
Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from  
Encryption.  
Re-enter WEP Key 3  
Enter the WEP key 3 again to confirm.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
169  
               
WEP Key 4  
Enter the WEP key when WEP is selected from  
Encryption.  
Re-enter WEP Key 4  
Transmit Key  
Enter the WEP key 4 again to confirm.  
Specifies the transmit key type from the list.  
Specifies the pass phrase.  
Pass Phrase  
Re-enter Pass Phrase  
Enter the pass phrase again to confirm.  
*1  
This item is available only when the Infrastructure mode is selected for Network  
Type.  
NOTE: This item is available only when the printer is connected with a wireless  
network.  
TCP/IP  
Purpose:  
To configure the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the printer.  
Values:  
170  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
   
TCP/IP  
Settings  
Host Name  
IP Mode  
IPv4  
Specifies the host name.  
Specifies the IP mode.  
IP Address Mode Selects the IP address mode.  
Manual IP  
Address  
Manually sets the IP address.  
Manual Subnet  
Mask  
Manually sets the subnet  
mask.  
Manual Gateway Manually sets the gateway  
Address  
address.  
IPv6  
Use Manual  
Address  
To set the IP address  
manually.  
Manual Address Manually sets the IP address.  
To specify an IPv6 address,  
enter the address followed by  
a slash (/) and then "64". For  
details, consult your system  
administrator.  
Stateless Address Displays the stateless  
1-3  
addresses.  
Link Local  
Address  
Displays the link local address.  
Manual Gateway Manually sets the gateway  
Address  
address.  
Auto Configure  
Gateway Address  
Displays the gateway address.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
171  
               
DNS  
DNS Domain Specifies the domain name of the domain name  
Name  
server. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters,  
periods, and hyphens can be used. If you need to  
specify more than one domain name, separate  
them using a comma or semicolon.  
IPv4  
Get DNS Server Specifies whether to get the  
Address from  
DHCP  
DNS server address  
automatically from the  
DHCP server.  
Manual DNS  
Server Address  
Sets the DNS server address.  
IPv6  
Get DNS Server Specifies whether to get the  
Address from  
DHCPv6-lite  
DNS server address  
automatically from the  
DHCPv6-lite server.  
Manual DNS  
Server Address  
Sets the DNS server address.  
LPD  
Connection  
Time-Out  
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to  
1000 seconds.  
Port9100  
Port Number  
Sets the port number from 9000 to 9999.  
Connection  
Time-Out  
Sets the connection time-out period between 1  
and 1000 seconds.  
HTTP  
Port Number  
Sets the port number. This must be 80 or between  
8000 and 9999.  
Simultaneous Displays the maximum number of connections  
Connections  
received simultaneously by the client.  
Connection  
Time-Out  
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 255  
seconds.  
172  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
             
WSD  
Port Number  
Sets the port number. This must be 80 or between  
8000 and 9999.  
Receive  
Time-Out  
Sets the receive time-out period from 1 to 65535  
seconds.  
Notification  
Sets the notification time-out period from 1 to 60  
Delivery Time- seconds.  
Out  
Maximum  
Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.  
Number of TTL  
Maximum  
Number of  
Notification  
Sets the maximum number of notifications from  
10 to 20.  
E-Mail Alert  
Purpose:  
To configure settings for E-Mail Alert. This page can also be displayed by  
clicking E-Mail Alert in the left frame.  
Values:  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
173  
       
E-Mail Server Primary SMTP Sets the primary SMTP gateway.  
Settings  
Gateway  
SMTP Port  
Number  
Specifies the SMTP port number. This must be  
25, 587 or between 5000 and 65535.  
E-Mail Send  
Specifies the authentication method for outgoing  
Authentication e-mail.  
SMTP Login  
User  
Specifies the SMTP login user. Up to 63  
alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens,  
underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If  
specifying more than one address, separate them  
using commas.  
SMTP Login  
Password  
Specifies the SMTP account password using up to  
31 alphanumeric characters.  
Re-enter SMTP Enter the SMTP account password again to  
Login Password confirm.  
POP3 Server  
Address  
Specifies the POP3 server address in IP address  
format of "aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd" or as a DNS host  
name using up to 63 characters.  
POP3 Port  
Number  
Specifies the POP3 server port number. This must  
be 110 or between 5000 and 65535.  
POP User  
Name  
Specifies the POP3 account user name. Up to 63  
alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens,  
underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If  
specifying more than one address, separate them  
using commas.  
POP User  
Password  
Specifies the POP3 account password using up to  
31 alphanumeric characters.  
Re-enter POP Enter the password again to confirm.  
User Password  
Reply Address Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each  
E-mail Alert.  
SMTP Server  
Connection  
Displays the status of the SMTP server  
connection.  
174  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
 
E-Mail Alert  
Settings  
E-Mail List 1  
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail  
Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts Specifies whether to receive an  
List 1  
e-mail alert for consumables.  
Paper Handling Specifies whether to receive an  
Alerts  
e-mail alert for paper handling.  
Service Call  
Specifies whether to receive an  
e-mail alert for service calls.  
E-Mail List 2  
Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail  
Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Select Alerts for Supplies Alerts Specifies whether to receive an  
List 2  
e-mail alert for consumables.  
Paper Handling Specifies whether to receive an  
Alerts  
e-mail alert for paper handling.  
Service Call  
Specifies whether to receive an  
e-mail alert for service calls.  
SNMP  
Purpose:  
To configure the detailed settings of SNMP.  
Values:  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
175  
     
Community Community  
Specifies the community name to access (read  
only) data using up to 31 alphanumeric  
characters.  
Name  
Name  
(Read only)  
The original setting will remain valid if nothing is  
entered. Characters entered for community name  
in the previous settings will not be displayed on  
the screen. The default Read Community is  
public.  
Re-enter  
Community  
Name (Read only)  
Enter the community name to access (read only)  
data again to confirm.  
Community  
Name  
(Read/Write)  
Specifies the community name to access (read  
and write) data using up to 31 alphanumeric  
characters.  
The original setting will remain valid if nothing is  
entered. Characters entered for community name  
in the previous settings will not be displayed on  
the screen. The default Read/Write Community  
is private.  
Re-enter  
Community  
Name  
Enter the community name to access (read and  
write) data again to confirm.  
(Read/Write)  
Community  
Name (Trap)  
Specifies the community name used for trap up  
to 31 alphanumeric characters.  
The original settings will remain valid if nothing  
is entered. Characters entered for community  
name in the previous settings will not be  
displayed on the screen. The default Trap  
Community is " " (NULL).  
Re-enter  
Community  
Name (Trap)  
Enter the community name used for trap again to  
confirm.  
176  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
     
Trap  
Notification  
1-4  
Trap Address Type Select the trap address type from the list.  
Selecting Off clears the settings in Trap Address,  
Port Number, and Notify, and does not notify  
trap occurrence. Selecting IPv4 or IPv6 allows  
you to enter Trap Address.  
Trap Address  
Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the  
following format:  
• IPv4  
Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the  
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm format. Each  
section of "nnn" is a variable value between 0  
and 255. Note that values 127 and 224-254 are  
not valid for the first three-digits only. IP socket  
mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and  
65535.  
• IPv6  
Specifies the IP address and IP socket in the  
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmm  
mm format. Each section of "xxxx" is a  
hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff.  
IP socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0  
and 65535.  
Trap Notification Enter the SNMP trap destination port number.  
(IP) Port Number  
Notify  
Specifies whether to notify trap occurrence.  
Authenticate Error Trap  
Specifies whether to notify Authenticate Error  
Trap.  
Scan to PC  
Purpose:  
To specify the client when scanning data.  
Values:  
FTP Client  
Connection  
Time-Out  
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60  
seconds.  
FTP Passive  
Sets whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
177  
           
SMB Client  
Connection  
Time-Out  
Sets the connection time-out period from 1 to 60  
seconds.  
Other Features  
The Other Features tab contains the Set Password and Reset Print Server pages.  
Set Password  
Purpose:  
To set or change the password that is required to access the setup parameters  
of the printer from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
This page can also be displayed by clicking Set Password in the left frame.  
Values:  
Administrator Sets the password using up to 10 alphanumeric characters. The  
Password  
password will appear as asterisks (*) in the field when it is entered.  
Re-enter  
Enter the password again to confirm.  
Administrator  
Password  
NOTE: If you forgot your password, initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) to restore  
the password to the default (NULL). See "Reset Print Server" on page 178.  
NOTE: When you change the password to lock the operator panel, set the  
password from Panel Lock Set in the Printer Settings.  
Reset Print Server  
Purpose:  
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for the network feature and reboot  
the printer. You can also initialize the NVM of the printer from Reset  
Defaults in the Printer Settings menu.  
Values:  
Initialize NIC Click the Start button to initialize NVM. Network settings will  
NVRAM  
Memory and  
restart printer.  
revert to the factory default settings and reboot the network  
capability.  
178  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
             
Restart Printer Click the Start button to reboot the printer.  
Print Volume  
Use the Print Volume menu to verify the number of printed pages.  
Values:  
Printer Page  
Count  
Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was  
shipped from the factory.  
Paper Used  
Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size.  
Address Book  
The Address Book menu contains the Fax/E-mail and Server Address pages.  
Fax/E-mail  
The Fax/E-mail page contains the following subpages.  
Address Book  
Fax Group  
Allows you to view, edit, or create address book entries.  
Allows you to view, edit, or create fax group entries.  
E-Mail Group Allows you to view, edit, or create e-mail group entries.  
E-Mail Default Allows you to view, edit, or set the default e-mail subject and  
Setup  
message.  
Address Book - Top Page  
Purpose:  
To view the address book entries registered on the Address book page.  
Values:  
Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of user  
IDs indicated on the button.  
ID:Name  
Displays a user ID and the name of the user registered under that  
user ID. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in the Name  
column.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
179  
               
Phone Number Displays the phone number of the user.  
E-Mail Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.  
Delete  
Deletes the entry for the selected user ID.  
Confirm/Chan Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected  
ge  
user ID.  
Create  
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the  
selected user ID.  
Address Book (Confirm/Change, Create)  
Purpose:  
To view or edit the address book entries on the Address Book page, or create a  
new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you  
click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the Address Book top page.  
Values:  
ID (Fax Speed Displays the selected user ID.  
Dial)  
Name  
Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the  
user ID, or enter a name for the new entry.  
Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the phone number of the user, or enter a  
phone number for the new entry.  
E-mail Address Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of the user, or enter an  
e-mail address for the new entry.  
Delete  
Click this button to delete the entry for the user ID. This button is  
available only on the dialog box for editing an existing entry.  
Apply New  
Settings  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.  
Back Click this button to return to the top page.  
Address Book (Delete)  
Purpose:  
180  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
   
To delete the address book entries registered on the Address Book page. The  
following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete  
button on the Address Book top page.  
Values:  
ID (Fax Speed Displays the selected user ID.  
Dial)  
Name  
Displays the name of the of the user registered under the selected  
user ID.  
Phone Number Displays the phone number of the user.  
E-mail Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.  
Apply New  
Settings  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Back  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
FAX Group - Top Page  
Purpose:  
To view the fax group entries registered on the Fax Group page.  
Values:  
GroupID:Name Displays a fax group ID and the assigned group name. IDs without  
an entry show (Not in Use) in the Name column.  
Delete  
Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.  
Confirm /  
Change  
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected  
group ID.  
Create  
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the  
selected group ID.  
FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)  
Purpose:  
To view or edit the fax number group entries on the Fax Group page, or create  
a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you  
click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the Fax Group top page.  
Values:  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
181  
   
Fax Group  
ID  
Displays the selected group ID.  
Name  
Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for  
the group ID, or enter a new group name.  
FAX Speed  
Dial  
Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for  
the group of speed dial codes indicated on the  
button.  
ID:Name  
Displays a speed dial code and the names of an  
entry registered under the speed dial code. Speed  
dial codes without an entry show (Not in Use) in  
the Name column.  
Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an  
entry registered under the selected speed dial  
code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.  
Apply New  
Settings  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.  
Back Click this button to return to the top page.  
FAX Group (Delete)  
Purpose:  
To delete the fax number group entries registered on the Fax Group page. The  
following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete  
button on the Fax Group top page.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays the selected group ID.  
Name  
Displays the name assigned for the group ID.  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Apply New  
Settings  
Back  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
E-Mail Group - Top Page  
Purpose:  
182  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
       
To view the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Group page.  
Values:  
GroupID:Name Displays a group ID and the assigned group name. IDs without an  
entry show (Not in Use) in the Name column.  
Delete  
Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.  
Confirm/  
Change  
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected  
group ID.  
Create  
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the  
selected group ID.  
E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)  
Purpose:  
To view or edit the e-mail address group entries on the E-Mail Group page, or  
create a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears  
when you click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the E-Mail Group top  
page.  
Values:  
E-Mail Group ID  
Name  
Displays the selected group ID.  
Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for  
the group ID, or enter a new group name.  
E-Mail Address Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for  
the group of IDs indicated on the button.  
ID:Name  
Address  
Displays a user ID and the name of the user  
registered under that user ID. IDs without an  
entry show (Not in Use) in the Name column.  
Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of an  
entry registered under the selected user ID, or  
enter an e-mail address for the new entry.  
Apply New  
Settings  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.  
Back  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
183  
E-Mail Group (Delete)  
Purpose:  
To delete the e-mail group entries registered on the E-Mail Group page. The  
following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete  
button on the E-mail Group top page.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays the selected group ID.  
Name  
Displays the name assigned for the group ID.  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Apply New  
Settings  
Back  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
E-Mail Default Setup  
Purpose:  
To set the default e-mail subject and message.  
Values:  
Default Subject Allows you to enter the default e-mail subject. Up to 50  
alphanumeric characters can be entered.  
Body Text  
Allows you to enter the default e-mail message. Up to 200  
alphanumeric characters can be entered.  
Apply New  
Settings  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.  
Server Address  
Server Address - Top Page  
Purpose:  
To view the server address entries registered on the Server Address page.  
Values:  
184  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
       
Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs  
indicated on the button.  
ID:Name  
Displays a server ID and the name of a file directory registered  
under that server ID. IDs without an entry show (Not in Use) in  
the Name column.  
Server Address Displays the address of the file directory.  
Delete  
Deletes the entry for the selected server ID.  
Confirm/  
Change  
Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected  
server ID.  
Create  
Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the  
selected server ID.  
Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)  
Purpose:  
To view or edit the server address entries on the Server Address page, or create  
a new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you  
click the Confirm/Change or Create button on the Server Address top page.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays the selected server ID.  
Name  
Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server  
ID, or enter a new server name.  
Server Type  
FTP  
Select this to store scanned documents on a server  
via the FTP protocol.  
SMB  
Select this to store scanned documents on a  
computer via the Server Message Block (SMB)  
protocol.  
Server Address Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the  
server ID, or enter a new server address.  
Share Name  
Server Path  
Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name, or enter a new  
shared name, when Server Type is set to SMB.  
Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path, or enter a new  
path.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
185  
   
Server Port  
Number  
Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number, or enter  
a new port number. If you leave the text box blank, the default port  
number (FTP: 21, SMB: 139) will be used.  
Login Name  
Allows you to view or edit the login name that is required to access  
the selected protocol, or enter a new login name.  
Login Password Allows you to view or edit the password that is required to access the  
selected protocol, or enter a new password.  
Re-enter  
Password  
Enter the password again to confirm.  
Apply New  
Settings  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.  
Back Click this button to return to the top page.  
Server Address (Delete)  
Purpose:  
To delete the server address entries registered on the Server Address page. The  
following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click the Delete  
button on the Server Address top page.  
Values:  
ID  
Displays the selected server ID.  
Name  
Displays the name assigned for the server ID.  
Server Address Displays the server address registered under the server ID.  
Apply New  
Settings  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Back  
Click this button to return to the top page.  
Tray Settings  
Use the Tray Settings menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in  
the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).  
Values:  
186  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
     
Tray Paper Type Sets the type of paper loaded in the MPF.  
Tray Paper Size Sets the size of paper loaded in the MPF.  
Tray 1 Custom Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.  
Size - Y  
Tray 1 Custom Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.  
Size - X  
Display Popup Sets whether to display a popup menu that prompts the user to set  
Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in the MPF.  
Apply New  
Settings  
Click this button to apply the new settings.  
Restore Settings Click this button to restore the previous settings.  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
187  
188  
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
12  
Print Media Guidelines  
Print media can be paper, labels, envelopes, and coated paper among others.  
Your printer provides high-quality printing on a variety of print media.  
Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing  
troubles. This section describes selecting print media, caring for print media,  
and loading the print media in Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) or Priority Sheet  
Inserter (PSI).  
Paper  
2
For the best print quality in color, use 75 g/m (20 lb) xerographic, grain long  
2
paper. For the best print quality in black and white, use 90 g/m (24 lb)  
xerographic, grain long paper. Before buying large quantities of any print  
media, it is recommended that you try a sample first.  
When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper  
package, and load the paper accordingly. See "Loading Print Media in the  
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 59 and "Loading Print Media in the  
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 66 for detailed loading instructions.  
Paper Characteristics  
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. It is  
recommended that you follow these guidelines when evaluating new paper  
stock.  
Weight  
Both MPF and PSI automatically feed paper whose weights range from 60 to  
2
2
163 g/m (16 to 44 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than 60 g/m (16 lb) may  
not feed properly, and could cause paper jams. For best performance, use 75  
2
g/m (20 lb bond) grain long paper.  
Curl  
Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can  
cause paper feeding problems. Curl usually occurs after the paper passes  
through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper  
Print Media Guidelines  
189  
                 
unwrapped, even in the feeder, can contribute to paper curling prior to  
printing and cause feeding problems regardless of humidity. When printing  
on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into the MPF or PSI.  
Smoothness  
The degree of paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If the paper is  
too rough, the toner does not fuse to the paper properly, resulting in poor  
print quality. If the paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems.  
Smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print  
quality.  
Moisture Content  
The amount of moisture in the paper affects both print quality and the ability  
of the printer to feed the paper properly. Leave the paper in its original  
packaging until you are ready to use it. This limits the exposure of the paper  
to moisture changes that can degrade its performance.  
Grain Direction  
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is  
either grain long, running the length of the paper, or grain short, running the  
2
width of the paper. For 60 to 135 g/m (16 to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long  
2
fibers are recommended. For paper heavier than 135 g/m (36 lb bond), grain  
short is preferred.  
Fiber Content  
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically pulped  
wood. Paper containing fibers such as cotton possess characteristics that can  
result in degraded paper handling.  
Recommended Paper  
2
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use dry 75 g/m (20 lb)  
xerographic paper. Business paper designed for general business use also  
provide acceptable print quality. Only use paper able to withstand high  
temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions.  
The laser printing process heats paper to high temperatures. Check with the  
manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is  
acceptable for laser printers.  
190  
Print Media Guidelines  
           
NOTE: Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of  
print media. When choosing any print media, you should consider the weight, fiber  
content, and color.  
Unacceptable Paper  
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:  
•
Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also  
known as carbonless paper, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon  
required (NCR) paper  
•
•
•
Preprinted paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer  
Preprinted paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fuser  
Preprinted paper that require a registration (the precise print location on  
the page) greater than ±0.09 inches, such as optical character recognition  
(OCR) forms  
In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to  
successfully print on these forms.  
•
•
•
Coated paper (erasable bond), synthetic paper, thermal paper  
Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper  
Recycled paper containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do  
not meet DIN 19 309  
•
•
Multiple-part forms or documents  
Print quality may deteriorate (blank spaces or blotches may appear in the  
text) when printing on talc or acid paper.  
•
Moist paper that may cause wrinkle  
Selecting Paper  
Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.  
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:  
•
•
Always use new, dry, and undamaged paper.  
Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the  
paper. This information is usually indicated on the paper package.  
•
Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself.  
Print Media Guidelines  
191  
             
•
Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This  
may result in a paper jam.  
•
•
•
Do not remove the PSI while a job is printing.  
Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the MPF or PSI.  
Flex paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the  
stack on a level surface.  
Selecting Preprinted Media and Letterhead  
When selecting preprinted media and letterhead paper for the printer:  
•
•
Use grain long paper for best results.  
Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or  
engraved printing process.  
•
•
•
Select paper that absorb ink, but do not bleed.  
Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.  
Use paper printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic  
copiers. The ink must withstand temperatures of 225°C (437°F) without  
melting or releasing hazardous emissions.  
•
Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner or the silicone in the  
fuser. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based should meet these  
requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper  
supplier.  
Printing on Letterhead  
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the pre-printed  
letterhead you have selected is acceptable for laser printers.  
192  
Print Media Guidelines  
         
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. Use the following  
table for help when loading letterhead in the print media sources.  
Loading Letterhead  
Load the letterhead in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that  
the title on the letter head enters the printer first.  
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)  
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)  
Selecting Pre-Punched Paper  
Pre-punched paper brands can differ in the number and placement of holes  
and in manufacturing techniques. However, it may not be possible to print on  
the paper to depending on the placement of holes on the paper.  
To select and use pre-punched paper:  
•
Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large  
quantities of pre-punched paper.  
•
Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into  
paper already packaged in a ream. Drilled paper can cause jams when  
multiple sheets feed through the printer. This may result in a paper jam.  
•
•
Pre-punched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your  
printer may require more frequent cleaning and feed reliability may not be  
as good as standard paper.  
Weight guidelines for pre-punched paper are the same as non-punched  
paper.  
Print Media Guidelines  
193  
       
Envelopes  
Depending on the choice of envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels  
of light wrinkling. Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is  
recommended that you try a sample first. See "Loading Print Media in the  
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 59 or "Loading Print Media in the  
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 66 for instructions on loading an  
envelope.  
When printing on envelopes:  
•
•
Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.  
Set the print media source to MPF or PSI. Set the paper type to Envelope  
,
and select the correct size of envelope from the printer driver.  
2
•
For best performance, use envelopes made from 75 g/m (20 lb bond)  
2
paper. You can use up to 105 g/m (28 lb bond) weight for the envelope  
feeder as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. Envelopes with 100%  
2
cotton content must not exceed 90 g/m (24 lb bond) weight.  
•
•
Use only freshly unpackaged, undamaged envelopes.  
sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions. If  
you have any doubts about the envelopes you are considering, check with  
the envelope supplier.  
•
•
•
Adjust the guide to fit the width of the envelopes.  
To load envelope in MPF or PSI, the print side must be facing up.  
See "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on  
page 59 or "Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on  
page 66 for instructions on loading an envelope.  
•
•
Use one envelope size during a print job.  
Ensure that the humidity is low because high humidity (more than 60%)  
and the high printing temperatures may seal the envelopes.  
•
For best performance, do not use envelopes that:  
–
–
–
Have excessive curl or twist  
Are stuck together or damaged in any way  
Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, embossing  
194  
Print Media Guidelines  
   
–
–
–
–
–
Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars  
Have an interlocking design  
Have postage stamps attached  
Have nicked edges or bent corners  
Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes  
Labels  
Your printer can print on many labels designed only for use with laser printers.  
When selecting labels:  
•
Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats must be able to  
withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) and pressure of 25 pounds per  
square inch (psi).  
•
•
Use labels that can be without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or  
releasing hazardous emissions.  
Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.  
NOTICE: Before buying large quantities of any print media, it is recommended that  
you try a sample first.  
When printing on labels:  
•
Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without  
sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.  
•
•
•
•
Set the paper type to Label from the printer driver.  
Do not load labels together with paper in the same tray.  
Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the die-cut.  
Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inches) of the edge of the label, of the  
perforations, or between die-cuts of the label.  
•
•
•
•
Do not print a label through the printer more than once.  
Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.  
Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.  
Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during  
printing, resulting in a jam.  
Print Media Guidelines  
195  
   
•
Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is  
recommended that zone coating of the adhesive is done at least 1 mm  
(0.04 inches) away from edges. Adhesive material contaminates your  
printer and could void your warranty.  
CAUTION: Otherwise the printer occur in a jam and contaminate your printer and  
your cartridges with adhesive. As a result, could void your printer and cartridge  
warranties.  
Storing Print Media  
For proper print media storage, the following guidelines help avoid media  
feeding problems and uneven print quality.  
•
For best results, store print media in an environment where the  
temperature is approximately 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is  
40%.  
•
•
Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the  
floor.  
If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton,  
ensure that they rest on a flat surface so that the edges do not buckle or  
curl.  
•
Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.  
Identifying Print Media and Specifications  
This section provides information on supported paper sizes, types, and  
specification.  
Supported Paper Sizes  
Multipurpose Feeder  
(MPF)  
Priority Sheet Inserter  
(PSI)  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
A4 (210x297 mm)  
B5 (182x257 mm)  
A5 (148x210 mm)  
C5 (162x229 mm)  
196  
Print Media Guidelines  
                       
Multipurpose Feeder  
(MPF)  
Priority Sheet Inserter  
(PSI)  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*4  
Y
Monarch (3.875x7.5 in)  
Monarch LEF (7.5x3.875 in)  
Envelope #10 (4.125x9.5 in)  
DL (110x220 mm)  
*1  
Y
Y*4  
*1  
DL LEF (220x110 mm)  
Y
Letter (8.5x11 in)  
Legal (8.5x14 in)  
Y
Y
Folio (8.5x13 in)  
Y
Executive (7.25 x 10.5 in)  
*2*3  
Y
Custom  
*1  
You can place the originals in a long-edge feed direction or in a short-edge feed  
direction. The following illustration shows SEF and LEF. The arrow mark in the  
illustration shows the orientation of the paper loading.  
NOTE: Not available when the XPS Printer Driver is used.  
*2  
Custom width: 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.50 inches)  
The maximum width for envelope (DL LEF): 220.0 mm (8.66 inches)  
Custom length: 127.0 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)  
(For the PSI, 191.0 mm (7.50 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches))  
The maximum length for envelope (Monarch LEF): 98.4 mm (3.87 inches)  
*3  
*4  
Only the administrator user can set the custom size from the printer driver.  
Be sure to fully insert the envelope until it stops. Otherwise, print media that is  
loaded on the MPF will be fed.  
SEF  
LEF  
Print Media Guidelines  
197  
                 
Supported Paper Types  
Media  
Multipurpose Feeder  
(MPF)  
Priority Sheet Inserter  
(PSI)  
Y*  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y*  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Plain  
Plain Side 2  
Plain Thick  
Plain Thick Side 2  
Recycled  
Recycled Side 2  
Label  
Covers  
Covers Side 2  
Envelope  
Coated  
Coated Side 2  
* Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
198  
Print Media Guidelines  
     
Paper Type Specifications  
Paper type  
Weight (gsm)  
60-90  
Remarks  
Plain Paper  
Plain Thick Paper  
Covers  
-
-
-
91-105  
106-163  
106-163  
Coated  
Inkjet printer paper  
cannot be used.  
Label  
-
Inkjet printer paper  
cannot be used.  
Envelopes  
Recycled  
-
-
-
60-105  
Print Media Guidelines  
199  
 
200  
Print Media Guidelines  
13  
Loading Print Media  
Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free  
printing.  
Before loading print media, identify the recommended print side of the print  
media. This information is usually on the print media package.  
NOTE: After loading paper in the feeder, specify the same paper type on the  
operator panel.  
Capacity  
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) can hold:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
150 sheets of standard paper  
16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of thick paper  
One sheet of coated paper  
16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of post cards  
Five envelopes  
16.2 mm (0.64 inches) of labels  
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI) can hold:  
10 sheets of standard paper or one sheet of other paper  
•
Print Media Dimensions  
Both MPF and PSI accept print media within the following dimensions:  
•
•
Width — 76.2 mm (3.00 inches) to 215.9 mm (8.50 inches)  
Length — 127.0 mm (5.00 inches) to 355.6 mm (14.00 inches)  
Loading Print Media  
201  
           
Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder  
(MPF)  
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in this printer.  
1
2
3
Open the front cover.  
Pull the priority sheet inserter (PSI) out.  
Pull the length guide forward until it stops.  
202  
Loading Print Media  
     
4
Pull the MPF extension forward until it stops.  
5
Adjust the paper width guides to their maximum width.  
Loading Print Media  
203  
6
Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then  
fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.  
7
Load print media on the MPF with the top edge first and with the  
recommended print side facing up.  
204  
Loading Print Media  
8
Adjust the width guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the  
stack of print media.  
9
Slide the length guide towards the printer until it touches the print media.  
Loading Print Media  
205  
 
NOTE: Depending on the size of print media, first slide the MPF extension  
backward until it stops, and then pinch the length guide and slide it backward  
until it touches print media.  
10 Insert the PSI into the printer and then align the PSI to the marking on  
the paper tray.  
206  
Loading Print Media  
11 Select the paper type from the operator panel if any print media other than  
plain print media is loaded. If a user-specified print media is loaded in the  
MPF, you must specify the paper size setting by using the operator panel.  
NOTE: For standard-size papers, adjust the guides first and then set papers.  
Loading an Envelope in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)  
NOTE: When you print on envelopes, be sure to specify the envelope setting on the  
printer driver. If not specified, the print image will be rotated 180 degrees.  
When Loading Envelope#10, DL, or Monarch  
Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, the flap side facing  
down, and the flap turned to the right.  
Loading Print Media  
207  
       
To prevent DL and Monarch from being wrinkled, they are recommended to  
be loaded with the print-side facing up, flap opened, and facing you.  
When Loading C5  
Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, with the flap open.  
208  
Loading Print Media  
 
NOTICE: Never use envelopes with windows, or coated linings. These lead to  
paper jams and can cause damage to the printer.  
NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the MPF right after they have been removed  
from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid jams, flatten them as shown below  
when loading them in the MPF.  
NOTE: If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the  
envelopes as shown in the following illustration.  
The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.  
Loading Print Media  
209  
NOTE: To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as envelopes,  
see the instruction on the Envelope/Paper Setup Navigator on the printer driver.  
Loading Letterhead  
Load the letter head in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that  
the title on the letter head enters the printer first.  
210  
Loading Print Media  
   
Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter  
(PSI)  
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not remove the PSI while printing is in progress.  
NOTE: Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in this printer.  
1
Open the front cover.  
2
Slide the PSI forward, and then align the PSI to the marking on the paper  
tray.  
Loading Print Media  
211  
       
3
Adjust the paper width guides to their maximum width.  
4
Before loading the print media, flex the sheets back and forth, and then  
fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.  
212  
Loading Print Media  
5
Load print media on the PSI with the top edge first and with the  
recommended print side facing up.  
6
Adjust the width guides until they rest lightly against the edges of the  
stack of print media.  
Loading Print Media  
213  
7
Select the paper type from the printer driver if the loaded print media is  
not standard plain paper. If a user-specified print media is loaded in the  
PSI, you must specify the paper size setting by using the printer driver.  
Loading an Envelope in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)  
NOTE: Be sure to fully insert the envelope until it stops. Otherwise, print media that  
is loaded on the MPF will be fed.  
NOTE: When you print on envelopes, be sure to specify the envelope setting on the  
printer driver. If not specified, the print image will be rotated 180 degrees.  
When Loading Envelope#10, DL, or Monarch  
Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, the flap side facing  
down, and the flap turned to the right.  
214  
Loading Print Media  
 
To prevent DL and Monarch from being wrinkled, they are recommended to  
be loaded with the print-side facing up, flap opened, and facing you.  
When Loading C5  
Load envelopes with the side to be printed on facing up, with the flap open.  
Loading Print Media  
215  
NOTICE: Never use envelopes with windows, or coated linings. These lead to  
paper jams and can cause damage to the printer.  
NOTE: If you do not load envelopes in the PSI right after they have been removed  
from the packaging, they may bulge. To avoid jams, flatten them as shown below  
when loading them in the PSI.  
NOTE: If envelopes are still not fed correctly, add some bending to the flap of the  
envelopes as shown in the following illustration.  
The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm (0.20 inches) or less.  
216  
Loading Print Media  
NOTE: To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as envelopes,  
see the instruction on the Envelope/Paper Setup Navigator on the printer driver.  
Loading Letterhead  
Load the letter head in the printer with the print side facing up. Ensure that  
the title on the letter head enters the printer first.  
Loading Print Media  
217  
   
Manual Duplex Printing (Windows Printer Driver  
Only)  
NOTE: When printing on curled paper, straighten the paper and then insert it into  
the feeder.  
NOTE: The XPS printer driver does not support manual duplex printing.  
When you start manual duplex printing, the instruction window appears.  
Note that the window cannot be reopened once it is closed. Do not close the  
window until duplex printing is complete.  
Manual duplex printing can be done using the multipurpose feeder or the  
priority sheet inserter.  
The Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)  
1
First print the even pages (rear sides).  
For a six page document, rear sides are printed in the order of page 6, page  
4, then page 2.  
(Data LED) blinks and the message appears on the LCD when the  
even pages finish printing.  
2
After the even pages are printed, remove the paper stack from the output  
tray and set them as they are (with the blank side facing up).  
NOTE: Warped or curled prints can cause paper jams. Straighten them  
before setting them.  
218  
Loading Print Media  
     
3
Stack the prints and set them as they are (with the blank side facing up)  
into the MPF. Ensure that Insert Output into paper tray is  
highlighted, and then press the  
button. Print pages in the order page 1  
(rear of page 2), page 3 (rear of page 4), then page 5 (rear of page 6).  
NOTE: Printing on both sides of the paper is not possible if the document  
consists of various sizes of papers.  
The Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)  
1
First print the even pages.  
For a six page document, even pages are printed in the order page 2, page  
4, then page 6.  
(Data LED) blinks and the message appears on the LCD when the  
even pages finish printing.  
Loading Print Media  
219  
 
2
3
After the even pages are printed, remove the paper stack from the output  
tray and set them as they are (with the blank side facing up).  
NOTE: Warped or curled prints can cause paper jams. Straighten them  
before setting them.  
Next stack the prints and set them as they are (with the blank side face up)  
into the PSI. Ensure that Insert Output into paper tray is  
highlighted, and then press the  
button. Print pages in the order page 1  
(rear of page 2), page 3 (rear of page 4), then page 5 (rear of page 6).  
220  
Loading Print Media  
NOTE: Printing on both sides of the paper is not possible if the document  
consists of various sizes of papers.  
Using the Output Tray Extension  
The output tray extension is designed to prevent print media from falling  
from the printer after the print job is complete.  
Before printing a document, ensure that the output tray extension is fully  
extended.  
NOTE: When you pull out envelopes or small size print media, lift up the scanner  
unit.  
Loading Print Media  
221  
   
222  
Loading Print Media  
14  
Operator Panel  
Using the Operator Panel Buttons  
The operator panel has a 4-line by 28-character liquid crystal display (LCD),  
light-emitting diodes (LED), control buttons, and numeric keypad, which  
allow you to control the printer.  
1
One Touch Dial button  
•
Calls up the stored Fax number registered in the Phone Book. The  
first four fax numbers in the Phone Book are assigned to the buttons  
in row order, starting from the top corner.  
2
3
4
5
(Copy) button  
•
•
Moves to the top level of the Copy menu.  
(Fax) button  
Moves to the top level of the Fax menu.  
Data LED  
•
Lights up for incoming, outgoing, or pending Fax jobs.  
Ready / Error LED  
•
•
Lights up when the printer is ready. (Ready LED)  
Lights up when the printer has an error. (Error LED)  
Operator Panel  
223  
                   
6
7
button  
•
•
•
•
Moves a cursor or highlight right or left.  
button  
Moves a cursor or highlight up or down.  
(Set) button  
8
Confirms the entry of values.  
(Contacts) button  
9
Moves to the Address Book menu for the Fax and Scan services.  
(Re-dial / Pause) button  
10  
•
•
Re-dials a telephone number.  
Pauses a telephone number.  
(Cancel) button  
11  
•
Cancels the current processing or pending job.  
12 B&W / Color LED  
•
•
•
•
•
Lights up to indicate which color mode is selected.  
13  
14  
15  
16  
(Color Mode) button  
Switches the color mode.  
(Start) button  
Starts a job.  
(Backspace) button  
Deletes characters and numbers.  
(Speed Dial) button  
Calls up a stored telephone number.  
17 Numeric keypad  
•
Enters characters and numbers.  
18 AC (All Clear) button  
•
•
Resets the current setting, and returns to the top menu.  
19  
(Back) button  
Returns to the previous screen.  
224  
Operator Panel  
                     
20 LCD Panel  
•
•
•
Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.  
21  
22  
(Scan) button  
Moves to the top level of the Scan menu.  
(Menu) button  
Moves to the top level of the Print From USB Memory, Job Status, and  
System menus.  
NOTE: Moving to a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the  
current entry or setting. Make sure to press the  
entry or setting.  
button to save the current  
NOTE: For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric  
characters, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters" on page 285.  
Printing a Panel Settings Page  
The panel settings page shows current settings for the operator panel menus.  
The Operator Panel  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
Press the  
the  
button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Panel Settings is highlighted, and then  
button.  
The panel settings page is printed.  
The Tool Box  
NOTE:  
1
Click Start  
Color Printer  
ï‚®
All Programs  
ï‚®
Dell Printers  
ï‚®
Dell 1355 Multifunction  
ï‚®
Tool Box  
.
NOTE: When multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer, the  
Select Printer window appears. In this case, click the name of this printer  
listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.  
Operator Panel  
225  
             
The Tool Box opens.  
2
3
Click the Printer Settings Report tab.  
Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page.  
The Reports page is displayed.  
4
Click the Panel Settings button.  
The panel settings page is printed.  
226  
Operator Panel  
Printing, Copying,  
Scanning, and Faxing  
227  
 
228  
15  
Printing  
This chapter covers tips for printing, how to print certain lists of information  
from your printer, and how to cancel a job.  
Tips for Successful Printing  
Tips on Storing Print Media  
Store your print media properly. For more information, see "Storing Print  
Media" on page 196.  
Avoiding Paper Jams  
NOTE: It is recommended that you try a limited sample of any print media you are  
considering using with the printer before purchasing large quantities.  
By selecting appropriate print media and loading it properly, you can avoid  
paper jams. See the following instructions on loading print media:  
•
•
•
"Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 202  
"Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211  
"Avoiding Jams" on page 459  
If you experience a jam, see "Jam" on page 492 for instructions.  
Sending a Job to Print  
Install the printer driver to use all the features of the printer. When you  
choose Print from a software program, a window representing the printer  
driver opens. Select the appropriate settings for the specific job you are  
sending to print. Print settings selected from the driver have precedence over  
the default menu settings selected from the operator panel or Tool Box.  
You may need to click Preferences from the initial Print box to see all the  
available system settings you can change. If you are not familiar with a feature  
in the printer driver window, open the online Help for more information.  
®
To print a job from a typical Windows application:  
Printing  
229  
                 
1
2
3
Open the file you want to print.  
From the File menu, select Print  
.
Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box. Modify the  
system settings as needed (such as the pages you want to print or the  
number of copies).  
4
To adjust system settings not available from the first screen, such as  
Quality, Paper Size, or Image Orientation, click Preferences  
.
The Printing Preferences dialog box appears.  
5
6
7
Specify the print settings. For more information, click Help  
Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.  
Click Print to send the job to the selected printer.  
.
Canceling a Print Job  
There are several methods for canceling a print job.  
Canceling From the Operator Panel  
To cancel a job after it has started printing:  
1
Press the  
(Cancel) button.  
NOTE: Printing is canceled only for the current job. All the following jobs will  
continue to print.  
Canceling a Job From the Computer Running Windows  
Canceling a Job From the Taskbar  
When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the right corner  
of the taskbar.  
1
Double-click the printer icon.  
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.  
2
3
Select the job you want to cancel.  
Press Delete on the keyboard.  
230  
Printing  
         
Canceling a Job From the Desktop  
1
Minimize all programs to reveal the desktop.  
Click StartPrinters and Faxes (for Windows XP and 2003).  
®
Click Start  
ï‚®
Devices and Printers (for Windows 7 and Windows Server  
2008 R2).  
Click Start  
Windows Vista ).  
ï‚®
Control Panel  
ï‚®
Hardware and Sound  
ï‚®
Printers (for  
®
Click Start  
ï‚®
Control Panel  
ï‚®
Printers (for Windows Server 2008).  
A list of available printers appears.  
2
Double-click the printer you selected when you sent the job.  
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.  
3
4
Select the job you want to cancel.  
Press Delete on the keyboard.  
Direct Print Using the USB Storage Device  
The Print From USB Memory feature allows you to print files stored in a USB  
storage device by operating from the operator panel.  
Supported File Formats  
Files in the following file formats can be printed directly from a USB storage  
device.  
•
•
•
PDF  
TIFF  
JPEG  
To print a file in a USB storage device:  
1
2
Insert a USB storage device to the USB port of the printer.  
USB Memory appears.  
Ensure that Print From is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Select Document appears.  
Printing  
231  
     
3
4
Press the  
button.  
button until the desired file is highlighted, and then press the  
Select printing options as required.  
NOTE: You can print files scanned and stored using the Scan to USB Memory  
feature. Files saved without using the feature such as files created by user  
may not be printed properly.  
Printing a Report Page  
your printer including printer settings, panel settings, job history, error  
history, color test page, protocol monitor, address book, and fax activity. This  
section describes two examples of printing from the Report/List menu.  
Printing a System Settings Page  
To verify detailed printer settings, print a printer settings page.  
See "Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 359 or "Understanding the  
Tool Box Menus" on page 323 to identify the display and operator panel  
buttons if you need help.  
The Operator Panel  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
Press the  
the  
button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Ensure that System Settings is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
The system settings page is printed.  
5
Confirm the IP address next to IP Address under Wired Network on the  
system settings page.  
If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, wait for a few minutes to resolve the IP  
address automatically, and then print the system settings page again.  
If the IP address is not resolved automatically, see "Assigning an IP Address  
(for IPv4 Mode)" on page 53.  
232  
Printing  
         
Printer Settings  
Using the Tool Box to Change the Printer Settings  
You can select menu items and corresponding values from the Tool Box.  
NOTE:  
NOTE: Factory defaults may vary for different countries.  
These settings are active until new ones are selected or the factory defaults are  
restored.  
To select a new value as a setting:  
1
Click Start  
Color Printer  
ï‚®
All Programs  
Tool Box  
ï‚®
Dell Printers  
ï‚®
Dell 1355 Multifunction  
ï‚®
.
NOTE: The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer  
drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355  
Multifunction Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.  
The Tool Box opens.  
2
3
Click the Printer Maintenance tab.  
Select the desired menu item.  
Each menu item has a list of values for the menu item. A value can be:  
•
•
•
A phrase or word to describe a setting  
A numerical value that can be changed  
An On or Off setting  
4
Select the desired value, and then click the associated button with each  
menu item.  
Driver settings may have precedence over changes previously made and  
may require you to change the Tool Box defaults.  
Adjusting the Language  
To display a different language on the operator panel:  
From the Printer Operator Panel  
1
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Printing  
233  
     
2
3
4
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
Press the  
press the  
button until Panel Language is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until the desired language is highlighted, and then  
button.  
From Your Computer  
NOTE:  
1
Click Start  
Color Printer  
ï‚®
All Programs  
Tool Box  
ï‚®
Dell Printers  
ï‚®
Dell 1355 Multifunction  
ï‚®
.
NOTE: The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer  
drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355  
Multifunction Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.  
The Tool Box opens.  
2
3
Click the Printer Maintenance tab.  
Select System Settings from the list at the left side of the page.  
The System Settings page is displayed.  
4
Select the desired language from Panel Language, and then press the  
Apply New Settings button.  
234  
Printing  
Copying  
Loading Paper for Copying  
The instructions for loading print documents are the same whether you are  
printing, faxing, or copying. For more details, see "Loading Print Media" on  
page 201.  
Preparing a Document  
You can use the document glass or the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
to load an original document for copying, scanning and sending a fax. You can  
2
load up to 35 sheets of 75 g/m (20 lb) documents for one job using the ADF  
or one sheet at a time using the document glass.  
CAUTION: Avoid loading documents that are smaller than 5.5 in. by 5.5 in. (139.7  
mm by 139.7 mm) or larger than 8.5 in. by 14 in. (215.9 mm by 355.6 mm), different  
sizes or weights together, or booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents  
having other unusual characteristics in ADF.  
CAUTION: Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper, coated paper, onion skin or  
thin paper, wrinkled or creased paper, curled or rolled paper or torn paper cannot  
be used in ADF.  
CAUTION: Do not use the documents with staples, paper clips or exposed to  
adhesives or solvent based materials such as glue, ink and correcting fluid in ADF.  
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use  
the document glass instead of the ADF.  
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.  
NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the ADF. If any document is detected in the  
ADF, it takes priority over the document on the document glass.  
NOTE: Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy  
printout. For best results, clean the document glass before use. For more  
information, see "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 454.  
Copying  
235  
       
To make a copy from the document glass:  
1
Open the document cover.  
2
Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the  
registration guide on the top left corner of the glass.  
3
Close the document cover.  
NOTE: Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy  
quality and increase the toner consumption.  
NOTE: If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the document  
cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the  
book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the cover open.  
236  
Copying  
4
5
Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, the  
contrast, and the image quality. For more information, see "Setting Copy  
Options" on page 238.  
To clear the settings, use the AC (All Clear) button  
.
Press the  
(Start) button to begin copying.  
NOTE: Press the  
(Cancel) button to cancel a copy job at any time while  
scanning a document.  
Making Copies From the ADF  
NOTICE: Do not load more than 35 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 35  
sheets to be fed to the ADF output tray. The ADF output tray should be emptied  
before it exceeds 35 sheets or your original documents may be damaged.  
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the  
document glass instead of the ADF.  
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.  
2
1
Load up to 35 sheets of 75 g/m (20 lb) documents face up on the ADF  
with top edge of the documents in first. Then adjust the document guides  
to the correct document size.  
NOTE: Ensure that you use the document guides before copying a legal-size  
document.  
2
Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size,  
contrast, and image quality. For more information, see "Setting Copy  
Options" on page 238.  
Copying  
237  
 
To clear the settings, use the AC (All Clear) button.  
Press the (Start) button to begin copying.  
3
NOTE: Press the  
(Cancel) button to cancel a copy job at any time while  
scanning a document.  
Setting Copy Options  
Set the following options for the current copy job before pressing the  
(Start) button to make copies.  
NOTE: The copy options automatically return to their default status after copying.  
Number of Copies  
To specify the number of copies from 1 to 99.  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Press the  
(Copy) button.  
Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad to select the desired  
value.  
4
Press the  
(Start) button to begin copying.  
Color  
To select mode for color or black and white copying.  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
238  
Copying  
           
2
3
4
Press the  
Press the  
Press the  
(Copy) button.  
(Color Mode) button to select the desired color mode.  
(Start) button to begin copying.  
Collated  
To sort the copy output: For example, if you make two copies of three page  
documents, one complete three page document will print followed by the  
second complete document.  
NOTE: Copying documents with a large amount of data may exhaust available  
memory.  
If a memory shortage occurs, cancel the collating by turning Collated to  
Uncollated on the operator panel.  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
4
Press the  
(Copy) button.  
Ensure that Collated is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
button to select the desired setting, and then press the  
Press the  
button.  
*
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk ( ) are the factory default menu settings.  
Uncollated*  
Collated  
Does not sort the copy job  
Sorts the copy job  
Copying  
239  
   
Auto  
Automatically determines which output mode for the copy job  
5
6
If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies,  
contrast, and image quality. See "Setting Copy Options" on page 238.  
Press the  
(Start) button to begin copying.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
To reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image, from 25 percent to 400  
percent when you copy original documents from the document glass or ADF.  
NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of  
your copy.  
NOTE: This item is available only when Multiple-Up is set to Off or  
Manual.  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Press the  
(Copy) button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Reduce/Enlarge is highlighted, and then  
button.  
4
Press the  
button.  
button to select the desired settings, and then press the  
mm series  
*
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk ( ) are the factory default menu settings.  
200%  
A5ï‚®A4 (141%)  
A5ï‚®B5 (122%)  
100%*  
240  
Copying  
   
B5ï‚®A5 (81%)  
A4ï‚®A5 (70%)  
50%  
inch series  
200%  
Stmtï‚®Lgl (154%)  
Stmtï‚®Ltr (129%)  
*
100%  
Lglï‚®Ltr (78%)  
Ldgrï‚®Ltr (64%)  
50%  
NOTE: This item is available only when Multiple-Up is set to Off or  
Manual.  
NOTE: You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from  
25% to 400%, or press the  
button to enlarge the zoom ratio or press the  
button to reduce the zoom ratio in 1% intervals.  
5
Press the (Start) button to begin copying.  
Document Size  
To specify the default document size:  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Press the  
(Copy) button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Document Size is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Copying  
241  
   
4
Press the  
button.  
button to select the desired settings, and then press the  
*
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk ( ) are the factory default menu settings.  
*1  
A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
A5 (148 x 210 mm)  
B5 (182 x 257 mm)  
*1  
Letter (8.5 x 11")  
Folio (8.5 x 13")  
Legal (8.5 x 14")  
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")  
*1  
The default for Document Size  
varies depending on country  
specific factory default.  
5
Press the  
(Start) button to begin copying.  
Original Type  
To select the copy image quality.  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Press the  
(Copy) button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Original Type is highlighted, and then  
button.  
4
Press the  
button.  
button to select the desired settings, and then press the  
*
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk ( ) are the factory default menu settings.  
242  
Copying  
   
Text  
Suitable for documents with text.  
Text & Photo* Used for documents with both text and photos.  
Photo  
Suitable for documents with photos.  
5
Press the  
(Start) button to begin copying.  
Lighter/Darker  
To adjust the contrast to make the copy lighter or darker than the original.  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Press the  
(Copy) button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Lighter/Darker is highlighted, and then  
button.  
4
Press the  
or  
button to select the desired settings, and then press the  
button.  
*
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk ( ) are the factory default menu settings.  
Lighter2  
Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works well with dark  
print.  
Lighter1  
Normal*  
Darker1  
Darker2  
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.  
Makes the copy darker than the original. Works well with light  
print or faint pencil markings.  
5
Press the  
(Start) button to begin copying.  
Copying  
243  
   
Sharpness  
To adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the original.  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Press the  
Press the  
(Copy) button.  
button until Sharpness is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
4
Press the  
button.  
button to select the desired settings, and then press the  
*
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk ( ) are the factory default menu settings.  
Sharpest  
Makes the copy sharper than the original.  
Sharper  
Normal*  
Softer  
Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.  
Makes the copy softer than the original.  
Softest  
5
Press the  
(Start) button to begin copying.  
Auto Exposure  
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
244  
Copying  
       
2
3
Press the  
(Copy) button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Auto Exposure is highlighted, and then  
button.  
4
5
Press the  
button.  
button until On is highlighted, and then press the  
Press the  
(Start) button to begin copying.  
Multiple-Up  
To print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper.  
Copying  
245  
     
ID Copy:  
Always prints two  
sides of the ID card the custom size  
Manual:  
Reduces the pages in  
Auto:  
Automatically  
reduces the  
pages to fit in one  
page.  
in one page in the  
original size (by  
100%).  
depending on the setting  
of the Reduce/Enlarge  
menu.  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
246  
Copying  
2
3
Press the  
(Copy) button.  
Press the  
the  
button until Multiple-Up is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
4
Press the  
button.  
button to select the desired setting, and then press the  
*
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk ( ) are the factory default menu settings.  
Off*  
Auto  
Does not perform multiple-up printing.  
Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one  
sheet of paper.  
ID Copy  
Manual  
Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the  
original size.  
Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in  
the size specified in Reduce/Enlarge.  
5
6
If necessary, customize the copy settings including the number of copies,  
contrast, and image quality. See "Setting Copy Options" on page 238.  
Press the  
When you are using the document glass and Multiple-Up is set to  
Auto ID Copy, or Manual, the display prompts you for another page.  
Press the button to select Yes or No, and then press the button.  
If you select Yes, press the button to select Continue or Cancel  
and then press the button.  
(Start) button to begin copying.  
,
7
,
Margin Top/Bottom  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
Copying  
247  
   
2
3
Press the  
(Copy) button.  
Press the  
then press the  
button until Margin Top/Bottom is highlighted, and  
button.  
4
Press the  
keypad, and then press the  
or  
button or enter the desired value using the numeric  
button.  
*
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk ( ) are the factory default menu settings.  
4 mm*/0.2  
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.  
inch*  
0-50 mm/0.0-  
2.0 inch  
5
Press the  
(Start) button to begin copying.  
Margin Left/Right  
To specify the left and right margins of the copy.  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Press the  
(Copy) button.  
Press the  
then press the  
button until Margin Left/Right is highlighted, and  
button.  
4
Press the  
keypad, and then press the  
or  
button or enter the desired value using the numeric  
button.  
*
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk ( ) are the factory default menu settings.  
248  
Copying  
   
4 mm*/0.2  
inch*  
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.  
0-50 mm/0.0-  
2.0 inch  
5
Press the  
(Start) button to begin copying.  
Margin Middle  
To specify the middle margin of the copy.  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Press the  
(Copy) button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Margin Middle is highlighted, and then  
button.  
4
Press the  
keypad, and then press the  
or  
button or enter the desired value using the numeric  
button.  
*
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk ( ) are the factory default menu settings.  
0 mm*/  
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.  
0.0 inch*  
0-50 mm/  
0.0-2.0 inch  
5
Press the  
(Start) button to begin copying.  
Copying  
249  
   
Changing the Default Settings  
The COPY menu options, including contrast, and image quality can be set to  
the most frequently used modes. When you copy a document, the default  
settings are used unless they are changed by using the corresponding buttons  
on the operator panel.  
NOTE: While you set copy options, pressing the AC (All Clear) button cancels the  
changed settings and returns to the default status.  
To create your own default settings:  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
5
6
Ensure that Defaults Settings is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Ensure that Copy Defaults is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Press the  
or  
button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter  
the value using the numeric keypad, and then press the  
button.  
7
8
Repeat steps 5 and 6, as needed.  
To return to the previous screen, press the  
(Back) button.  
Setting the Power Saver Timer Option  
You can set the power saver timer for the printer. The printer waits before it  
restores the default copy settings, if you do not start copying after changing  
them on the operator panel.  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
250  
Copying  
     
4
5
6
7
Press the  
press the  
button until System Settings is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Ensure that Power Saver Timer is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Press the  
button.  
button to select Mode 1 or Mode 2, and then press the  
Press the  
keypad, and then press the  
or  
button or enter the desired value using the numeric  
button.  
30 minutes for Mode 1 or 1–6 minutes for Mode  
You can select from 5  
–
2
.
8
To return to the previous screen, press the  
(Back) button.  
Copying  
251  
252  
Copying  
17  
Scanning  
Scanning Overview  
You can use your Dellâ„¢ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer to turn  
pictures and text into editable images on your computer.  
PaperPort® is a program that enables you to organize, find and share all your  
paper and digital documents, and is supplied with your printer.  
The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item  
type and how you plan to use the image or document after you scan it in to  
your computer. For the best results, use these recommended settings.  
Type  
Resolution  
Documents  
300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi  
grayscale or color  
Documents of poor quality or that  
contain small text  
400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi  
grayscale  
Photographs and pictures  
100–200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale  
150–300 dpi  
Images for an inkjet printer  
Images for a high-resolution printer  
300–600 dpi  
Scanning beyond these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities  
of the application. If you require a resolution above those recommended in  
the above table, you should reduce the size of the image by previewing (or  
pre-scan) and cropping before scanning the image.  
NOTE: You can use PaperPort's built-in Optical Character Recognition (OCR)  
software to copy text from scanned documents so that you can use and edit the text  
in any text editing, word processing, or spreadsheet program. The OCR process  
requires textual images scanned at 150–600 dpi and 300 dpi or 600 dpi is  
recommended for graphics.  
Scanning  
253  
   
®
®
If you prefer to use another application, such as Adobe Photoshop , you  
must assign the application to the printer by selecting it from the list of  
available applications through the Select Software button each time you start  
scanning. If you do not assign an application to the Select Software button,  
PaperPort is automatically selected when you start scanning.  
ScanDirect is a PaperPort application that enables you to scan items and send  
them directly to PaperPort or other programs on your computer without first  
running PaperPort. ScanDirect runs as a separate application from the  
Windows start menu and displays the ScanDirect bar. For more information  
about using ScanDirect, refer to the PaperPort's Help menu.  
Icons on the ScanDirect bar represent the programs that are limited to  
PaperPort and to ScanDirect. To scan and send an item to a program, click the  
program icon and then scan the item. ScanDirect automatically starts the  
selected program when the scan is complete.  
NOTE: Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Press the  
(Scan) button.  
Press the  
then press the  
button until Scan to Application is highlighted, and  
button.  
4
5
Configure the scanning settings as necessary.  
Press the (Start) button.  
The selected application window opens on your computer.  
254  
Scanning  
 
NOTE: If the following dialog box appears on your computer, select  
1355cn/1355cnw MFP Scan Button Manager, and then click OK.  
NOTE: Once you check the Always use this program for this action check box  
when selecting 1355cn/1355cnw MFP Scan Button Manager, the selected  
application is automatically used without displaying the program selection window.  
NOTE: You must use ScanButton Manager on your computer to change the  
settings for scanning. For details, see "Quick Launch Utility" on page 410.  
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver  
Your printer supports the Tool Without An Interesting Name (TWAIN)  
driver for scanning images. TWAIN is one of the standard components  
provided by Microsoft® Windows XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows  
Server 2008, Windows Vista®, and Windows 7, and works with various  
scanners.  
NOTE: Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.  
Scanning  
255  
   
To scan an image from the PaperPort:  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
4
On the Windows Start menu, click Nuance PaperPort 12 from All  
Programs, and then click PaperPort  
Click Select, then select TWAIN: Dell 1355cn/cnw MFP Scanner, and  
then click OK  
.
.
Select your scanning preferences and click Preview to display the preview  
image.  
NOTE: The illustration may vary for different operating systems.  
5
Select the desired properties from the Image Quality and Image Options  
tabs.  
6
7
Click Scan to start scanning.  
Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied to  
your computer.  
256  
Scanning  
Scanning Using the Windows Image Acquisition  
(WIA) Driver  
Your printer also supports the WIA driver for scanning images. WIA is one of  
the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and later  
operating systems and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the  
TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan an image and easily  
manipulate those images without using additional software.  
NOTE: Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable.  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Start the drawing software, such as Paint for Windows.  
NOTE: When you use Windows Vista or Windows Server 2008, use Windows  
Photo Gallery instead of Paint.  
Click File  
ï‚®
From Scanner or Camera  
(
Paint button  
ï‚®
From scanner or  
camera for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).  
The Scan using Dell 1355cn/1355cnw MFP Scanner window appears.  
NOTE: The illustration may vary for different operating systems.  
Scanning  
257  
   
4
5
Select your scanning preferences and click Adjust the quality of the  
scanned picture to display the Advanced Properties dialog box.  
Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast, and then  
click OK  
.
6
7
8
Click Scan to start scanning.  
Click Save As from the File menu.  
Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the  
picture.  
258  
Scanning  
Using a Scanner on the Network  
Overview  
The Scan to Server/Computer feature allows you to scan documents and send  
the scanned document to a network computer via the FTP or SMB protocol.  
Computer  
FTP Server  
Scan  
Using FTP  
Using SMB  
Computer  
You can select the kind of the server and specify a destination to store the  
scanned document with the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address  
Book Editor.  
The following items are required to use the Scan to Server/Computer feature.  
•
Using SMB  
To transfer data via SMB, your computer must run on one of the following  
operating systems that includes folder sharing.  
For Mac OS X, a shared user account is required on the Mac OS X.  
•
•
•
•
Microsoft Windows Server 2003  
Microsoft Windows Server 2008  
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2  
Microsoft Windows XP  
Scanning  
259  
   
•
•
•
Microsoft Windows Vista  
Microsoft Windows 7  
Mac OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6  
•
Using FTP  
To transfer data via FTP, one of the following FTP servers and an account  
to the FTP server (login name and password) are required.  
•
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows Server 2008,  
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2, Microsoft Windows Vista, or  
Microsoft Windows 7  
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6.0  
Microsoft Windows XP  
•
•
FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 3.0/4.0 or  
Internet Information Services 5.0/5.1  
Mac OS X  
FTP service of Mac OS X  
10.4.2/10.4.4/10.4.8/10.4.9/10.4.10/10.4.11/10.5/10.6  
For information on how to configure the FTP service, contact your system  
administrator.  
Follow the procedure below to use the Scan to Server/Computer feature.  
"Confirming a Login name and Password" on page 261  
"Specifying a Destination to Store the Document" on page 262  
"Configuring the Printer Settings" on page 271  
260  
Scanning  
"Sending the Scanned File on the Network" on page 279  
Confirming a Login name and Password  
When using SMB:  
The Scan to Computer/Server feature requires a user login account with a  
valid and non-empty password for authentication. Confirm a login user name  
and password.  
If you do not use a password for your user login, you need to create a password  
on your User Login Account with the following procedure.  
For Microsoft Windows XP:  
1
2
3
4
Click startControl PanelUser Accounts.  
Click Change an account  
.
Select your account.  
Click Create a password and add in a password for your user login account.  
For Windows Vista and Windows 7:  
1
2
Click StartControl Panel  
.
Click User Accounts and Family Safety  
.
Scanning  
261  
 
3
4
Click User Accounts.  
Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your  
user login account.  
For Windows Server 2008:  
1
2
3
Click StartControl Panel  
.
Double-click User Accounts  
.
Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your  
user login account.  
For Windows Server 2008 R2:  
1
2
3
4
Click StartControl Panel  
Select User Accounts  
Click User Accounts  
.
.
.
Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your  
user login account.  
For Mac OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6  
1
2
3
4
Click System PreferencesAccounts  
Select Change Password  
Enter a password for your user login account in New password  
Re-enter the password in Verify  
.
.
.
.
After you confirmed a login user name and password, go to "Specifying a  
Destination to Store the Document" on page 262.  
When using FTP  
The Scan to Computer/Server feature requires a user name and a password.  
For your user name and password, contact your system administrator.  
Specifying a Destination to Store the Document  
When using SMB  
Share a folder to store the scanned document using the following procedure.  
262  
Scanning  
 
For Windows XP Home Edition:  
1
Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of  
folder name, MyShare).  
2
3
4
Right-click on the folder, and then select Properties.  
Click on the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder on the network  
.
Enter a shared name in the Share name box.  
NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the  
next setting procedure.  
NOTE: When the following screen appears, click If you understand the  
security risks but want to share files without running the wizard, click here,  
then select Just enable file sharing, and then click OK.  
Scanning  
263  
5
6
Select Allow network users to change my files  
Click OK  
.
.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have  
created.  
Example: Folder name, MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,  
Third-level folder name: John  
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory  
After you created a folder, go to "Configuring the Printer Settings" on  
page 271.  
264  
Scanning  
For Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition:  
1
Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of  
folder name, MyShare) and double-click the folder.  
2
Select Folder Options from Tools  
.
3
Click View tab, and then clear the checkbox of Use simple file sharing  
(Recommended)  
.
Scanning  
265  
4
5
6
7
Click OK, and then close the window.  
Right-click the folder, and then select Properties  
.
Select the Sharing tab, and then select Share this folder  
.
Enter a shared name in the Share name box.  
NOTE: Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the  
next setting procedure.  
8
9
Click on Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.  
Click Add  
.
10 Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name  
in the Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to  
confirm (Example of user login name, MySelf).  
266  
Scanning  
11 Click OK  
.
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.  
12 Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select the Full  
Control check box. This will grant you permission to send the document  
into this folder.  
Scanning  
267  
13 Click OK  
.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have  
created.  
Example: Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,  
Third-level folder name: John  
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.  
After you created a folder, go to "Configuring the Printer Settings" on  
page 271.  
For Microsoft Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008, Windows  
Server 2008 R2  
1
Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of  
folder name, MyShare).  
2
Right-click the folder, and then select Properties  
.
3
4
Click the Sharing tab, and then select Advanced Sharing.  
Select the Share this folder check box.  
268  
Scanning  
5
Enter a shared name in the Share name box.  
NOTE: Note down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next  
setting procedure.  
6
7
8
Click Permissions to give write permission for this folder.  
Click Add  
.
Search user login name by clicking Advanced, or enter the user login name  
in the Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to  
confirm (Example of user login name, MySelf).  
Scanning  
269  
9
Click OK when you are done.  
10 Click the user login name that you have just entered. Select the Full  
Control check box. This will grant you permission to send the document  
to this folder.  
NOTE: Do not use Everyone as the user login name.  
11 Click OK  
.
NOTE: To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have  
created.  
Example: Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,  
Third-level folder name: John  
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.  
After you created a folder, go to "Configuring the Printer Settings" on  
page 271.  
For Mac OS X 10.4:  
1
Select Go from the Finder menu, and then click Home.  
270  
Scanning  
2
3
Double-click Public.  
Create a folder (Example of folder name, MyShare).  
NOTE: Note down the folder name as you need to use this name in the next  
setting procedure.  
4
5
Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing  
.
Check the File Sharing check box and the Windows Sharing check box.  
For Mac OS X 10.5/10.6:  
1
Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer (Example of  
folder name, MyShare).  
NOTE: Note down the folder name as you need to use this name in the next  
setting procedure.  
2
3
4
5
6
Select the created folder, and then select Get Info from the File menu.  
Check the Shared folder check box, and then close the window.  
Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing  
.
Check the File Sharing check box, and then click Options  
.
Check the Share Files and folders using SMB check box and your account  
name.  
7
Click Done.  
When Using FTP  
For a destination to store the document, contact your system administrator.  
Configuring the Printer Settings  
You can configure the printer settings to use the Scan to Server/Computer  
feature with the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.  
From the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool  
1
2
Open a web browser.  
Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar.  
NOTE: For details on how to check the IP address of the printer, see "Verifying  
the IP Settings" on page 56.  
3
Click Go.  
Scanning  
271  
 
The printer's web page appears.  
4
Click Address Book if a security login dialog box appears, type in the  
correct user name and password.  
NOTE: The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank  
(NULL).  
5
6
Click the Server Address tab.  
Select any unused number and click Create  
.
272  
Scanning  
The Server Address page appears.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:  
Scanning  
273  
1
2
Name  
Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the  
Server address book.  
Server Type  
Select SMB if you store the document in a shared folder of  
your computer.  
Select FTP if you use a FTP server.  
3
Server Address  
Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the  
FTP server that you have shared out.  
The following are examples:  
• For FTP  
:
Server name: myhost.example.com  
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)  
IP address: 192.168.1.100  
• For SMB  
:
Server name: myhost  
IP address: 192.168.1.100  
For SMB only.  
4
Share Name  
On the Windows operating system, enter the share name  
of the folder to store the scanned document on the  
recipient computer.  
On the Mac OS, enter the folder name to store the  
scanned document on the recipient computer.  
274  
Scanning  
5
Server Path  
For SMB  
To store the scanned document in the share folder directly  
without creating any subfolder, leave the space blank.  
To store the scanned document in the folder you created  
under the share folder, enter the path as following.  
Example: Share Folder name, MyShare, Second-level  
folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John  
You should now see MyShare\Mypic\John in your  
directory.  
MyShare (Share folder)  
MyPic  
John  
In this case, enter the following item.  
Server Path: \MyPic\John  
For FTP  
Enter the server path to store the scanned document.  
6
7
8
Server Port  
Number  
Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can  
enter the default value of 139 for SMB and 21 for FTP.  
Login Name  
Enter the user account name that has access to the shared  
folder on your computer or FTP server.  
Login Password  
Enter the password corresponding to the above login  
name.  
NOTE: Empty password is not valid in the Scan to Computer  
feature. Ensure that you have a valid password for the user  
login account. (See "Confirming a Login name and Password"  
on page 261 for details on how to add a password in your  
user login account.)  
9
Re-enter Password Re-enter your password.  
After you configured settings, go to "Sending the Scanned File on the  
Network" on page 279.  
Scanning  
275  
From the Address Book Editor  
1
Click StartAll ProgramsDell PrintersDell 1355 Multifunction  
Color Printer Address Book Editor  
.
The Select Device window appears.  
2
3
4
Select your printer from the list.  
Click OK  
.
Click ToolNew (Printer Address Book)Server  
.
The Server Address dialog box appears.  
276  
Scanning  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To fill in the fields, enter the information as follows:  
1
2
Name  
Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the  
Server address book.  
Server Type  
Select Computer (SMB) if you store the document in a  
shared folder of your computer.  
Select Server (FTP) if you use a FTP server.  
3
Computer  
Settings wizard  
Clicking this button opens the wizard screen which guides  
you through several steps.  
When you complete the steps in the wizard, the items 4 to  
10 are entered automatically. For details, click the Help  
button.  
Scanning  
277  
4
Sever Name/  
IP Address  
Enter a server name or IP address of your computer or the  
FTP server that you have shared out.  
The following are examples:  
• For Computer (SMB)  
:
Server name: myhost  
IP address: 192.168.1.100  
• For Server (FTP)  
:
Server name: myhost.example.com  
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)  
IP address: 192.168.1.100  
5
6
Share Name  
Path  
Enter the name of the shared folder on the recipient  
computer. For SMB only.  
For SMB  
To store the scanned document in the share folder directly  
without creating any subfolder, leave the space blank.  
To store the scanned document in the folder you created  
under the share folder, enter the path as following.  
Example: Share Folder name, MyShare, Second-level  
folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John  
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your  
directory.  
MyShare (Share folder)  
MyPic  
John  
In this case, enter the following item.  
Path: \MyPic\John  
For FTP  
Enter the path to store the scanned document.  
7
Login Name  
Enter the user account name that has access to the shared  
folder on your computer or FTP server.  
278  
Scanning  
8
Login Password  
Enter the password corresponding to the above login  
name.  
NOTE: NOTE: Empty password is not valid in the Scan to  
Server/Computer feature. Ensure that you have a valid  
password for the user login account. (See "Confirming a  
Login name and Password" on page 261 for details on how to  
add a password in your user login account).  
9
Confirm Login  
Password  
Re-enter your password.  
10  
Port Number  
Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can  
enter the default value of 139 for SMB and 21 for FTP.  
After you configured settings, go to "Sending the Scanned File on the  
Network" on page 279.  
Sending the Scanned File on the Network  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Press the  
(Scan) button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Scan to Network is highlighted, and then  
button.  
4
5
Ensure that Scan to is highlighted, press the  
button.  
Press the button to select Network (Computer) or Network  
(Server), or Search Address book, and then press the  
button.  
Network (Computer): Stores the scanned image on the computer by  
using the SMB protocol.  
Network (Server): Stores the scanned image on the server by using  
the FTP protocol.  
Search Address Book: Select the server address registered in  
Address Book.  
Scanning  
279  
 
6
7
Press the  
and then press the  
Press the (Start) button to send the scanned files.  
button to select the destination to store the scanned file in,  
button.  
Scanning to USB Storage Device  
The Scan to USB Memory feature allows you to scan documents and save the  
scanned data to a USB storage device. To scan documents and save them,  
follow the steps below:  
1
Insert the USB storage device into the USB port on your printer.  
2
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
3
4
Press the  
(Scan) button.  
Ensure that Scan to USB Memory is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
5
6
Press the  
press the  
button until the your desired folder is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Press the  
(Start) button.  
280  
Scanning  
     
Sending an E-Mail with the Scanned Image  
To send an e-mail attached with the scanned image from your printer, follow  
the steps below:  
•
Setup the E-mail address book through the Dell Printer Configuration  
Web Tool. See "Setting an E-Mail Address Book" on page 281 for more  
details.  
Setting an E-Mail Address Book  
1
2
Open a web browser.  
Type in the IP address of the printer in the address bar and click Go. The  
printer's Web page appears.  
3
Click the Address Book tab.  
The login dialog box appears.  
4
5
Type in the administrator login ID and password registered on the printer.  
Click Address Book  
.
6
Click Create.  
Scanning  
281  
   
7
8
Enter a name and e-mail address in the Name and E-mail Address fields.  
Click the Apply New Settings button.  
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned File  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Press the  
(Scan) button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Scan to Email is highlighted, and then  
button.  
4
5
Ensure that Email to is highlighted, and then press the  
Press the button to select the setting listed below, and then press the  
button.  
button.  
282  
Scanning  
 
Keypad: Type the e-mail address directly and then press the  
button.  
Address Book: Select the e-mail address registered in the E-mail  
address book, and then press the  
Email Group: Select the e-mail group registered in the E-mail Groups,  
and then press the button.  
button.  
NOTE: Users need to be registered before you can select Address Book  
on the operator panel.  
6
Press the  
(Start) button to send e-mail.  
Scanning  
283  
284  
Scanning  
18  
Faxing  
Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters  
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For  
example, when you set up your printer, you enter your name or your company  
name and telephone number. When you store speed dial or group dial  
numbers, you may also need to enter the corresponding names.  
•
When prompted to enter a letter, press the appropriate button until the  
correct letter appears on the display.  
For example, to enter the letter O, press 6.  
–
Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O  
and finally 6.  
–
–
To enter additional letters, repeat the first step.  
Press the  
button when you are finished.  
Keypad Letters and Numbers  
Key  
1
Assigned numbers, letters or characters  
@ : . / 1  
2
a b c A B C 2  
3
d e f D E F 3  
4
g h i G H I 4  
5
j k l J K L 5  
Faxing  
285  
       
Key  
6
Assigned numbers, letters or characters  
m n o M N O 6  
p q r s P Q R S 7  
t u v T U V 8  
w x y z W X Y Z 9  
0
7
8
9
0
*
- _ ~  
#
@ .  
< >  
_ ! " # $ % & ' ~^ | ` ; : ? , (space) + - * / = ( ) [ ] { }  
Changing Numbers or Names  
If an incorrect name or number is entered, press the  
(Backspace) button  
to delete the last digit or character. Then enter the correct number or  
character.  
Inserting a Pause  
For some telephone systems, it is necessary to dial an access code and listen  
for a second dial tone. A pause must be entered in order for the access code to  
function. For example, enter the access code 9 and then press the  
(Redial/Pause) button before entering the telephone number. "-" appears on  
the display to indicate when a pause is entered.  
Configuring Fax Initial Settings  
NOTE: The following settings can be configured also using Advance Tools on Easy  
Setup Navigator.  
Setting Your Country  
You need to set the country where your printer is used for using the fax service  
on the printer.  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
286  
Faxing  
         
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
button.  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the  
Press the  
the  
button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
button until Country is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Press the  
then press the  
button to select the country where the printer is used, and  
button.  
Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the  
Yes, and then press the button.  
The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.  
button to select  
NOTE: In case of either one, when you configure the country setting, the  
information, which is registered to the device, is initialized.  
Setting the Printer ID  
In most countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any  
fax you send. The printer ID, containing your telephone number and name or  
company name, will be printed at the top of each page sent from your printer.  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
5
6
Press the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Press the  
the  
button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until Fax Number is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
the  
Enter your fax number using the number keypad.  
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the  
(Backspace) button to delete the last digit.  
7
8
Press the  
button when the number on the display is correct.  
Press the  
the  
button until Company Name is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Faxing  
287  
   
9
Enter your name or company name using the numeric keypad.  
You can enter alphanumeric characters using the numeric keypad,  
including special symbols by pressing the 1, *, and # buttons.  
For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric  
characters, see "Using the Numeric Keypad to Enter Characters" on  
page 285.  
10 Press the  
button when the name on the display is correct.  
11 To return to the previous screen, press the  
(Back) button.  
Setting the Time and Date  
NOTE: It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the  
printer occurs.  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
5
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until System Settings is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Press the  
the  
button until Date & Time is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
6
7
Ensure that Set Date is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
button  
Enter the correct date using the numeric keypad, or press the  
to select the correct date.  
NOTE: If you make a mistake while entering numbers, press the  
re-enter the digit.  
button to  
8
9
Press the  
Press the  
button when the date on the display is correct.  
button until Set Time is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
10 Enter the correct time using the numeric keypad, or press the  
button  
to select the correct time.  
11 Press the  
button when the time on the display is correct.  
288  
Faxing  
   
12 To return to the previous screen, press the  
(Back) button.  
Changing the Clock Mode  
You can set the current time using either the 12-hour or the 24-hour format.  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
5
6
7
8
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until System Settings is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Press the  
the  
button until Date & Time is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until Date Format is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until the desired format is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
the  
Press the  
the  
To return to the previous screen, press the  
(Back) button.  
Setting Sounds  
Speaker Volume  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
5
6
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until Line Monitor is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
the  
Press the  
the  
Press the  
press the  
button until the desired volume is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Faxing  
289  
         
7
Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.  
Ringer Volume  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
the  
Press the  
then press the  
button until Ring Tone Volume is highlighted, and  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until the desired volume is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.  
Specifying the Fax Settings  
Changing the Fax Settings Options  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
the  
Press the  
press the  
button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Press the  
or  
button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter  
the value using the numeric keypad.  
Press the button to save the selection.  
290  
Faxing  
       
8
9
If necessary, repeat steps 5 to 7.  
To return to the previous screen, press the  
(Back) button.  
Available Fax Settings Options  
You can use the following settings options for configuring the fax system:  
Option  
Description  
Receive Mode TEL Mode Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive  
a fax by picking up the handset of the external  
telephone, pressing the remote receive code, and then  
pressing  
.
FAX  
Automatically receives faxes.  
Mode*  
TEL/FAX When the printer receives an incoming fax, the  
Mode  
external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto  
Rec TEL/FAX, and then the printer automatically  
receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the  
printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that  
the call is a telephone call.  
Ans/FAX  
Mode  
The printer can share a telephone line with an  
answering machine. In this mode, the printer will  
monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are  
fax tones. If the phone communication is using serial  
transmission in your country (such as Germany,  
Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and  
Switzerland), this mode is not supported.  
DRPD  
Mode  
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection  
(DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be  
installed on your telephone line by the telephone  
company. After the telephone company has provided a  
separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring  
pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that  
specific ring pattern.  
Auto Rec Fax  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode  
after receiving an incoming call.  
Auto Rec  
TEL/FAX  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode  
after the external telephone receives an incoming call.  
Faxing  
291  
               
Option  
Description  
Auto Rec  
Ans/FAX  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode  
after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.  
Line Monitor Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a  
transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is  
made.  
Ring Tone  
Volume  
Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming  
call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive  
Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.  
Line Type  
Sets the line type.  
Tone/Pulse  
Sets the dialing type.  
Resend Delay Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.  
Redial  
Attempts  
Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when the  
destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer will not  
redial.  
Redial Delay  
Specifies the interval between redial attempts.  
Junk Fax Setup Sets whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by  
accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone  
Book.  
Remote Receive Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on  
the external telephone.  
Remote Rcv  
Tone  
Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote  
Receive.  
Fax Header  
Sets whether to print the information of sender on the header of  
faxes.  
Company  
Name  
Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to  
30 alphanumeric characters can be entered.  
Fax Number  
Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of  
faxes.  
Fax Cover Page Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.  
DRPD Pattern Sets the DRPD setting from Pattern 1 to Pattern 7. DRPD is a  
service provided by some telephone companies.  
Forward  
Settings  
Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.  
292  
Faxing  
                                 
Option  
Description  
Fax Fwd  
Number  
Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming  
faxes will be forwarded.  
Prefix Dial  
Specifies whether to set a prefix dial number.  
Prefix Dial  
Num  
Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials  
before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the  
Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).  
Discard Size  
ECM  
Sets whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page  
when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper. Selecting  
Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto  
the output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the  
bottom of the page.  
Sets whether to enable the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote  
machines must also support the ECM.  
Modem Speed Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or  
reception error occurs.  
Fax Activity  
Fax Transmit  
Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every  
50 incoming and outgoing fax communications.  
Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax  
transmission or only when an error occurs.  
Fax Broadcast Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax  
transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.  
Protocol  
Monitor  
Sets whether to print a protocol monitor report after every fax  
transmission or only when an error occurs.  
Country  
Sets the country where the printer is used.  
Prefix Dial  
NOTE: Prefix Dial only supports the environment where you send a fax to the  
external line number. To use Prefix Dial, you must do the following from the operator  
panel.  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Faxing  
293  
                     
4
5
6
Press the  
the  
button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
button until Line Type is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until PBX is highlighted, and then press the  
7
8
Press the  
(Back) button to return to the previous menu.  
Press the  
the  
button until Prefix Dial is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
9
Press the  
button.  
button until On is highlighted, and then press the  
10 Press the  
(Back) button to return to the previous menu.  
11 Press the  
button until Prefix Dial Num is highlighted, and then  
button.  
press the  
12 Enter an up-to-five-digit prefix number from 0  
–9, *, and #.  
13 Press the button when the prefix dial number on the display is correct.  
14 Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on.  
Advanced Fax Settings  
NOTE: The advanced fax settings are only meant for advanced users. Incorrect  
settings on this printer may damage the device.  
If you are experiencing fax send or receive errors, there is an advanced fax  
settings menu which you can access and change the settings accordingly.  
To enter the Diagnostic Menu (Customer Mode), follow the instructions.  
1
2
3
Turn off the printer.  
Disconnect all network, phone line, and USB cables from the device.  
Turn on the printer while holding down the  
and  
buttons.  
The Customer Mode menu appears.  
4
After all the advanced fax settings have been made, you will need to turn  
off and on the printer for the new settings to be effective.  
294  
Faxing  
 
Fax Data Encoding Method  
Some of the legacy fax devices do not support the Joint Bi-level Image  
Experts Group (JBIG) data encoding method. You may experience fax send or  
receive errors due to this data encoding method. You can disable the JBIG and  
select the Modified Huffman (MH), Modified Read (MR), or Modified  
Modified Read (MMR) encoding with the following instructions.  
You can change the modem transmission encoding with the following  
instructions.  
1
2
3
4
5
When the printer is in Customer Mode, select Fax/Scanner Diag  
and press the  
button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until Parameter is highlighted, and then press the  
Press the  
press the  
button until FAX Parameter is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until G3M TX Coding is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Press the  
button until MMR is highlighted, and then press the  
button to enable MMR encoding, select MR to enable MR encoding, or  
select MH to enable MH encoding.  
You can change the modem receive encoding with the following instructions.  
1
2
3
4
5
When the printer is in Customer Mode, select Fax/Scanner Diag  
and press the  
button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until Parameter is highlighted, and then press the  
Press the  
press the  
button until FAX Parameter is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until G3M RX Coding is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Press the  
button until MMR is highlighted, and then press the  
button to enable MMR encoding, select MR to enable MR encoding, or  
select MH to enable MH encoding.  
Faxing  
295  
Sending a Fax  
You can fax data from your printer. You can also directly fax data transferred  
®
®
from the computer running a Microsoft Windows operating system.  
Loading an Original Document on the ADF  
NOTICE: Do not load more than 35 sheets into the ADF or allow more than 35  
sheets to be fed to the ADF output tray. The ADF output tray should be emptied  
before it exceeds 35 sheets or your original documents may be damaged.  
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for gray scale images, use the  
document glass instead of the ADF.  
1
Place the document(s) face up on the ADF with the top edge of the  
documents in first. Then adjust the document guides to the correct  
document size.  
2
Adjust the document resolution, referring to "Resolution" on page 298.  
Loading an Original Document on the Document Glass  
1
Open the document cover.  
296  
Faxing  
         
2
Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the  
registration guide on the top left corner of the glass.  
3
4
Adjust the document resolution, referring to "Resolution" on page 298.  
Close the document cover.  
NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the ADF. If any document is detected in the  
ADF, it takes priority over the document on the document glass.  
NOTE: If you are faxing a page from a book or magazine, lift the document cover  
until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or  
magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start faxing with the cover open.  
Faxing  
297  
Resolution  
To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission:  
1
2
Press the  
(Fax) button.  
Press the  
the  
button until Resolution is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
3
Press the  
press the  
button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then  
button.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Standard*  
Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.  
Fine  
Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin  
lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.  
Super Fine  
Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail.  
The super fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine  
also supports the super fine resolution.  
Ultra Fine  
Suitable for documents containing photographic images.  
NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest  
resolution supported by the receiving device.  
Document Type  
To select the default document type for the current fax job:  
1
2
Press the  
(Fax) button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Document Type is highlighted, and then  
button.  
3
Press the  
button.  
button to select the desired setting, and then press the  
Text  
Suitable for documents with text.  
Suitable for documents with photos.  
Photo  
298  
Faxing  
       
Lighter/Darker  
To adjust the contrast to make the fax lighter or darker than the original:  
1
2
Press the  
(Fax) button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Lighter/Darker is highlighted, and then  
button.  
3
Press the  
or  
button to select the desired setting, and then press the  
button.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Lighter2  
Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well with  
dark print.  
Lighter1  
Normal*  
Darker1  
Darker2  
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.  
Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well with  
light print or faint pencil markings.  
Sending a Fax Automatically  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF:  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Press the  
(Fax) button.  
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more  
information, see "Resolution" on page 298.  
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 299.  
You can select a fax number in one of the following ways:  
4
•
Ensure that Fax to is highlighted, and then press the  
Press the  
press the  
button.  
button until Phone Book is highlighted, and then  
button. Press the button to select the recipients.  
•
Press the One Touch Dial button.  
Faxing  
299  
       
•
Press the  
Dial, or Search using the  
(Contacts) button, select All Entries, Group  
button, and then press the  
button.  
All Entries  
Displays a list of registered fax numbers. Press the  
button to select the recipients.  
Group Dial  
Search  
Press the  
button to select the recipients.  
Searches a fax number from the Phone Book. Enter  
the text you want to search, and then press the  
button to select the recipients.  
•
•
Press the  
Press the  
(Redial/Pause) button to redial.  
(Speed Dial) button. Enter the speed dial number  
between 01 and 99 using the numeric keypad, and then press the  
button.  
NOTE: Before you use the One Touch Dial button, you need to register a  
number for the speed dial. For more information on how to store the number,  
see "Automatic Dialing" on page 311.  
5
6
Press the  
(Start) button.  
When you are using the document glass, the display prompts you for  
another page. Press the  
button.  
button to select Yes or No, and then press the  
The number is dialed and then the printer begins sending the fax when the  
remote fax machine is ready.  
NOTE: Press the  
sending the fax.  
(Cancel) button to cancel the fax job at any time while  
Sending a Fax Manually  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
300  
Faxing  
   
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Press the  
(Fax) button.  
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more  
information, see "Resolution" on page 298.  
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 299.  
4
5
6
Press the  
button.  
button until OnHook is highlighted, and then press the  
Press the  
button.  
button until On is highlighted, and then press the  
Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric  
keypad.  
•
•
If the document is loaded on the ADF, press the  
If the document is not loaded on the ADF, press the  
(Start) button.  
(Start)  
button, press the  
then press the  
button until the desired setting appears, and  
button.  
NOTE: Press the  
(Cancel) button and the  
any time while sending the fax.  
button to cancel the fax job at  
Confirming Transmissions  
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer  
beeps and returns to the standby mode.  
If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on  
the display.  
If you receive an error message, press the  
(Cancel) button to clear the  
message and try to send the document again.  
You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after  
each fax transmission. For more information, see "Printing a Report" on  
page 319.  
Faxing  
301  
 
Automatic Redialing  
If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a  
fax, the printer will automatically redial the number every minute based on  
the number set in the redial settings.  
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial  
attempts, see "Available Fax Settings Options" on page 291.  
NOTE: The printer will not automatically redial a number that was busy when the  
number was manually entered.  
Sending a Delayed Fax  
The Delayed Start mode can be used to save scanned documents for  
transmission at a specified time in order to take advantage of lower long  
distance rates.  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
2
3
Press the  
(Fax) button.  
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more  
information, see "Resolution" on page 298.  
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 299.  
4
5
6
7
8
Press the  
press the  
button until Delayed Start is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until On is highlighted, and then press the  
Enter the start time using the numeric keypad or press the  
button to select the start time, and then press the button.  
button until Fax to is highlighted, and then press the  
or  
Press the  
button.  
Ensure that Keypad is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
302  
Faxing  
     
9
Enter the number of the remote machine using the numeric keypad, and  
then press the button.  
You can also use speed dial or group dial numbers. For more information,  
see "Automatic Dialing" on page 311.  
Press the  
(Start) button to begin faxing.  
Once Delayed Start mode is activated, your printer stores all the documents  
to be faxed to its memory and sends them at the specified time. After faxing  
in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is cleared.  
NOTE: If you turn off and on the printer, the stored documents are sent as soon as  
the printer is activated.  
Sending a Fax from the Driver (Direct Fax)  
You can send a fax directly from your computer by using the driver.  
NOTE: Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.  
Example  
Send data via the Dell 1355cnw  
Color MFP FAX driver  
Send fax  
Sending machine (Dell  
1355cn Multifunction  
Color Printer)  
Receiving machine (fax  
machine/multifunction  
printer)  
For Microsoft Windows:  
NOTE: The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those  
given in the following procedure depending on the application you are using.  
NOTE: To use this feature, you must install the fax driver.  
Open the file you want to send by fax.  
1
2
Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select Dell  
1355cnw Color MFP FAX  
.
3
Click Preferences  
.
Faxing  
303  
     
4
The Printing Preferences dialog box appears. Specify the fax settings. For  
more information, click the Help of the driver.  
NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.  
304  
Faxing  
5
6
7
Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box.  
Click Print. The Set / Check Fax Transmission: dialog box appears.  
Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways:  
•
•
•
Enter a name and phone number directly.  
Select a recipient from a phone book saved on your computer.  
Select a recipient from a database other than a phone book or address  
book.  
For more information on how to specify the destination, see the Help of  
the driver.  
Faxing  
305  
NOTE: Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area  
before sending a fax if the Fax service is locked with a password.  
8
Click Start Sending.  
For Apple Macintosh:  
NOTE: The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those  
given in the following procedure depending on the application you are using.  
NOTE: When using a USB connection on Mac OS 10.4.x, upgrade Common Unix  
Printing System (CUPS) software to version 1.2.12 or later. You can download it from  
CUPS web site.  
1
2
Open the file you want to send by fax.  
Open the print dialog box from the application, and then select Dell 1355  
Color MFP Fax  
.
306  
Faxing  
3
Specify the fax settings.  
NOTE: The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job.  
Click Print. The Fax Recipient dialog box appears.  
4
5
Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways:  
•
•
Enter a name and phone number directly.  
Select a recipient from a phone book saved on your computer.  
Faxing  
307  
NOTE: Enter the password in the Password field in the Authorization area  
before sending a fax if the Fax service is locked with a password.  
6
Click OK.  
Receiving a Fax  
About Receiving Modes  
NOTE: To use the TEL/FAX Mode or Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering  
on the back of your printer.  
When the memory is full, the fax is received in the TEL Mode.  
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes  
The instructions for loading paper in the PSI are the same whether you are  
printing, faxing, or copying, except that faxes can only be printed on Letter-,  
A4-, or Legal-sized paper. For details about loading paper, see "Loading Print  
Media" on page 201. For details about setting the paper type and size in the  
PSI, see "Print Media Guidelines" on page 189.  
308  
Faxing  
     
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Fax Mode  
Your printer is preset to the fax mode at the factory.  
If you receive a fax, the printer automatically goes into the fax mode after a  
specified period of time and receives the fax.  
To change the interval at which the printer goes into the fax mode after  
receiving an incoming call, see "Available Fax Settings Options" on page 291.  
Receiving a Fax Manually in the Telephone Mode  
You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone, and  
then pressing the  
(Start) button.  
The printer begins receiving a fax and returns to the standby mode when the  
reception is completed.  
Receiving a Fax Automatically in the Telephone/Fax or Ans/Fax Mode  
To use the TEL/FAX Mode or Ans/FAX Mode, you must attach an external  
telephone to the phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer.  
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message as it  
would normally. If your printer hears a fax tone on the line, it automatically  
starts to receive a fax.  
NOTE: If you have set your printer to Auto Answer Fax and your answering  
machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to your printer,  
your printer will automatically go into the Fax mode after a predefined time.  
Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone  
This feature works best when you are using an external telephone connected  
to the phone connector ( ) on the back of your printer. You can receive a fax  
from someone you are talking to on the external telephone without having to  
go to the printer.  
When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear fax tones, press  
the two-digit keys on the external telephone, or set On Hook to Off and  
then press the  
(Start) button.  
The printer receives the document.  
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the  
remote machine, try pressing the two-digit keys once again.  
Faxing  
309  
       
The remote receive code is set to Off at the factory. You can change the two-  
digit number to whatever you choose. For details on changing the code, see  
"Available Fax Settings Options" on page 291.  
NOTE: Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.  
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode  
The DRPD is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a  
single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. The  
particular number someone uses to call you on is identified by different  
ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short  
ringing sounds.  
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring  
service must be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company.  
To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you will need another  
telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial your FAX  
number from outside.  
To set up the DRPD:  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until Fax Settings is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until DRPD Pattern is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
the  
Press the  
the  
Press the  
press the  
button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then  
button.  
To return to the previous screen, press the  
(Back) button.  
To receive faxes in the DRPD, you need to set the menu to DRPD Mode; see  
"Available Fax Settings Options" on page 291.  
Your printer provides seven DRPD patterns. If this service is available from  
your telephone company, ask your telephone company which pattern you  
need to select to use this service.  
310  
Faxing  
 
Receiving Faxes in the Memory  
Since your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are  
making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying, printing,  
or run out of paper or toner, your printer stores incoming faxes in the memory.  
Then, as soon as you finish copying, printing, or re-supply the consumables,  
the printer automatically prints the fax.  
Polling Receive  
You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive  
it.  
1
2
Press the  
(Fax) button.  
Press the  
press the  
3
4
Press the  
button.  
button until On is highlighted, and then press the  
Enter the fax number of the remote machine, and then press the  
button.  
NOTE: For information on how to enter the fax number of the remote machine,  
see "Sending a Fax Manually" on page 300 or "Sending a Fax Automatically" on  
page 299.  
5
Press the  
(Start) button.  
Automatic Dialing  
Speed Dialing  
You can store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations (01–  
99).  
When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists, you  
cannot change the speed dial number from the operator panel or Dell Printer  
Configuration Web Tool.  
Storing a Number for Speed Dialing  
1
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Faxing  
311  
           
2
3
4
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until Phone Book is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
the  
5
6
Ensure that Speed Dial is highlighted, and then press the  
Press the button until the desired speed dial number between 01 and  
99 is highlighted, and then press the button.  
Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the  
Enter the name, and then press the button.  
button.  
7
8
9
button.  
Ensure that Phone Number is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
10 Enter the number you want to store using the numeric keypad, and then  
press the button.  
To insert a pause between numbers, press the  
"-" appears on the display.  
(Redial/Pause) button.  
11 Ensure that Apply Settings is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
12 Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the  
Yes, and then press the button.  
13 To store more fax numbers, repeat steps 6 to 12.  
button to select  
14 To return to the previous screen, press the  
(Back) button.  
Sending a Fax Using a Speed Dial  
1
Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the ADF.  
OR  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, and close the  
document cover.  
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document  
on the ADF" on page 296.  
312  
Faxing  
 
2
To enter the speed dial number do either of the following after pressing the  
(Fax) button:  
•
Ensure that Fax to is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Speed Dial is highlighted, and then  
button.  
•
Press the  
(Speed Dial) button.  
3
4
Enter the speed dial number between 01 and 99 using the numeric keypad,  
and then press the button.  
The corresponding entry's name briefly displays. To confirm the name  
again, press the button.  
Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs. For more  
information, see "Resolution" on page 298.  
If you need to change the contrast, see "Lighter/Darker" on page 299.  
5
6
Press the  
(Start) button.  
The document scans to the memory.  
When you are using the document glass, the display prompts you for  
another page. Press the  
button to select Yes to add more documents  
or to select No to begin sending the fax immediately, and then press the  
button.  
7
The fax number stored in the speed dial location is automatically dialed.  
The document is sent when the remote fax machine answers.  
NOTE: Using the asterisk (*) in the first digit, you can send a document to multiple  
locations. For example, if you enter 0*, you can send a document to the locations  
registered between 01 and 09.  
Group Dialing  
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can  
create a group of these destinations and set them under a one-digit group dial  
location. This enables you to use a group dial number setting to send the  
same document to all the destinations in the group.  
NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial  
number.  
Faxing  
313  
   
Setting Group Dial  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
5
6
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until Phone Book is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until Group Dial is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until the desired group dial number between 1 and 6  
button.  
Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the  
Enter the name, and then press the button.  
Press the  
the  
Press the  
the  
Press the  
is highlighted, and then press the  
7
8
9
button.  
Ensure that Speed Dial No is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
10 Press the  
button until the desired number is highlighted, press the  
button.  
button to select the speed dial numbers, and then press the  
11 Ensure that Apply Settings is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
12 Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the  
Yes, and then press the button.  
13 To store more group dial numbers, repeat steps 6 to 12.  
button to select  
14 To return to the previous screen, press the  
(Back) button.  
Editing Group Dial  
You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a  
new number to the selected group.  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
314  
Faxing  
     
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until Phone Book is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until Group Dial is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until the group dial number that you want to edit is  
Press the  
the  
Press the  
the  
Press the  
highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
To change the group dial name:  
a
b
c
Ensure that Name is highlighted, and then press the  
Enter a new name, and then press the button.  
button.  
Press the  
button until Apply settings is highlighted, and  
then press the  
button.  
d
Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the  
select Yes, and then press the button.  
To change the speed dial number:  
button to  
8
a
Press the  
press the  
button until Speed Dial No is highlighted, and then  
button.  
b
Press the  
button until the speed dial number that you want to edit  
is highlighted, and then press the  
speed dial number. Press the  
button to select or deselect the  
button.  
c
d
Press the  
then press the  
button until Apply settings is highlighted, and  
button.  
Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the  
select Yes, and then press the button.  
To delete the group dial:  
button to  
9
a
b
Press the  
Ensure that Are You Sure? is displayed, press the  
select Yes, and then press the button.  
(Backspace) button.  
button to  
NOTE: When you delete the last speed dial in a group, the group itself is not  
deleted.  
10 If you want to edit another group dial number or enter a new group dial  
number, repeat steps 5 to 9.  
Faxing  
315  
11 To return to the previous screen, press the  
(Back) button.  
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing (Multi-address Transmission)  
You can use group dialing for broadcasting or delayed transmissions.  
Follow the procedure of the desired operation (For Delayed transmission, see  
"Specifying the Fax Settings" on page 290).  
You can use one or more group numbers in one operation. Then continue the  
procedure to complete the desired operation.  
Your printer automatically scans the document loaded in the Automatic  
Document Feeder or on the document glass into the memory. The printer  
dials each of the numbers included in the group.  
Printing an Address Book List  
You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a speed dial list.  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
Press the  
the  
button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until Address Book is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
the  
A list of your speed dial entries is printed.  
Other Ways to Fax  
Using the Secure Receiving Mode  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by  
unauthorized people. You can turn on the secure fax mode using the Secure  
Receive option to restrict printing out all of the received faxes when the  
printer is unattended. In the secure fax mode, all incoming faxes will get  
saved in the memory. When the mode turns off, any faxes stored will be  
printed.  
NOTE: Before operation, ensure that Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.  
316  
Faxing  
       
To turn the secure receiving mode on:  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Secure Settings is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Secure Receive is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Ensure that Secure Receive Set is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until Enable is highlighted, and then press the  
NOTE: The factory-default password is 0000.  
8
To return to the standby mode, press the  
(Menu) button.  
When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, your printer stores it  
into memory and the Job Status screen displays "Secure Receive  
"
to let you know that there is a fax stored.  
NOTE: If you change the password while Secure Receive Set is  
Enable, perform steps 1 to 5. Press the  
Password is highlighted, and then press the  
button until Change  
button. Enter the new  
password, and then press the  
button.  
To print received documents:  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
button until Job Status is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
the  
3
4
Press the  
press the  
button until Secure Receive is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Enter the password, and then press the  
The faxes stored in memory are printed.  
button.  
To turn the secure receiving mode off:  
Faxing  
317  
 
1
2
3
Access the Secure Receive Set menu by following steps 1 to 6 in  
"To turn the secure receiving mode on:".  
Press the  
button.  
To return to the previous screen, press the  
button until Disable is highlighted, and then press the  
(Back) button.  
Using an Answering Machine  
To the  
wall jack  
Printer  
Line Telephone Answering Device  
Phone  
You can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the back of  
your printer as shown above.  
•
•
•
•
Set your printer to the Ans/FAX Mode and set Auto Rec Ans/FAX  
to specify the time for the TAD.  
When the TAD picks up the call, the printer monitors and takes the line if  
fax tones are received and then starts receiving the fax.  
If the answering device is off, the printer automatically goes into the Fax  
after the ring tone sounds for a predefined time.  
If you answer the call and hear fax tones, the printer will answer the fax call  
if you  
Set On Hook to On (you can hear voice or fax tones from the remote  
machine), and then press the  
(Start) button and hang up the receiver.  
OR  
Press the two-digit remote receive code and hang up the receiver.  
318  
Faxing  
 
Using a Computer Modem  
Line  
Printer  
Telephone Answering Device  
Phone  
To the  
internet  
Computer  
If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial-up internet  
connection, connect the computer modem directly to the back of your printer  
with the TAD as shown above.  
•
Set your printer to the Ans/FAX Mode and set Auto Rec. Ans/FAX  
to specify the time for the TAD.  
•
•
Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.  
Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a  
fax.  
•
Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax  
application to fax via the computer modem.  
Printing a Report  
The following reports may be useful when using fax:  
Address Book  
This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the memory of the printer  
as Address Book information.  
Fax Activity  
This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.  
Protocol Monitor  
This report shows information about the faxes you recently received or sent.  
Procedures:  
Faxing  
319  
   
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
Press the  
the  
button until Report/List is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
highlighted, and then press the  
button until the report or list you want to print is  
button.  
The selected report or list is printed.  
Changing Setting Options  
1
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
2
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
5
6
Ensure that Defaults Settings is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Press the  
the  
button until Fax Defaults is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until the desired menu item is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Press the  
or  
button until the desired setting is highlighted or enter  
the value using the numeric keypad, and then press the  
button.  
7
8
Repeat steps 5 and 6, as needed.  
To return to the previous screen, press the  
(Back) button.  
320  
Faxing  
 
Know Your Printer  
321  
 
322  
19  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
The Tool Box allows you to view or specify the system settings. You can also  
The Tool Box consists of the Printer Settings Report, Printer Maintenance,  
and Diagnosis tabs.  
NOTE: The Password dialog box appears the first time you try to change settings  
on ToolBox when Panel Lock is set on the printer. In this case, enter the password  
you specified, and click OK to apply the settings.  
NOTE: For how to start Tool Box, see "Understanding Your Printer Software  
(Windows Only)" on page 409.  
Printer Settings Report  
The Printer Settings Report tab contains the Printer Information, Menu  
Settings, Reports, TCP/IP Settings, Tray Settings, Defaults Settings, and Fax  
Settings pages.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Printer Information  
Purpose:  
To display the information of your printer.  
Values:  
Dell Service Tag Number  
Express Service Code  
Printer Serial Number  
Printer Type  
Displays Dell’s service tag number.  
Displays the express service code of the printer.  
Displays the serial number of the printer.  
Displays the type of the printer. Color Laser is  
displayed normally.  
Asset Tag Number  
Memory Capacity  
Displays the asset tag of the printer.  
Displays the memory capacity.  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
323  
         
Processor Speed  
Firmware Version  
Displays the processing speed.  
Displays the version of the controller.  
Network Firmware Version Displays the NIC version.  
MCU Firmware Version  
Displays the version of the Machine Control Unit  
(MCU) firmware.  
Printing Speed (Color)  
Displays the speed for color printing.  
Displays the speed for monochrome printing.  
Printing Speed  
(Monochrome)  
Menu Settings  
Purpose:  
To display the current settings of your printer.  
Values:  
System Settings  
Sleep  
Displays the time taken by the  
printer before it enters Sleep mode  
after it finishes a job.  
Deep Sleep  
Displays the time taken by the  
printer before it enters Deep Sleep  
mode after it goes into Sleep  
mode.  
Auto Reset  
Displays the time taken by the  
printer before it automatically  
resets the settings for Copy, Scan,  
or Fax on the operator panel to the  
defaults when no additional  
settings are made.  
Panel Select Tone  
Panel Alert Tone  
Displays the volume of the tone  
that is emitted when the operator  
panel input is correct. Off  
indicates that the tone is disabled.  
Displays the volume of the tone  
that is emitted when the operator  
panel input is incorrect. Off  
indicates that the tone is disabled.  
324  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
   
Job Tone  
Displays the volume of the tone  
that is emitted when a job is  
complete. Off indicates that the  
tone is disabled.  
Alert Tone  
Displays the volume of the tone  
that is emitted when a problem  
occurs. Off indicates that the tone  
is disabled.  
Out of Paper Tone  
Auto Clear Alert Tone  
Displays the volume of the tone  
that is emitted when the printer  
runs out of paper. Off indicates  
that the tone is disabled.  
Displays the volume of the tone  
that is emitted 5 seconds before  
the printer performs auto clear.  
Off indicates that the tone is  
disabled.  
All Tones  
Displays the volume of all the alert  
tones. Off indicates that all the  
tones are disabled.  
Job Time-Out  
Fault Time-Out  
Panel Language  
Displays the amount of time that  
the printer waits for data to arrive  
from the computer.  
Displays the time taken by the  
printer before it cancels jobs that  
stop abnormally.  
Displays the language used on the  
operator panel.  
*1  
Auto Log Print  
Displays whether to automatically  
print a job history report after  
every 20 jobs.  
mm/inch  
Displays the measurement unit  
used after the numeric value on  
the operator panel.  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
325  
Date & Time  
Date Format  
Time Format  
Displays the default date format.  
Displays the default time format;  
24H or 12H.  
Time Zone  
Set Date  
Set Time  
Plain  
Displays the default time zone.  
Displays the date setting.  
Displays the time setting.  
Paper Density  
Adjust BTR  
Displays the paper density of plain  
paper.  
Label  
Displays the paper density of  
labels.  
Plain  
Displays the voltage setting of the  
transfer roller for plain paper.  
Plain Thick  
Recycled  
Covers  
Displays the voltage setting of the  
transfer roller for thick plain paper.  
Displays the voltage setting of the  
transfer roller for recycled paper.  
Displays the voltage setting of the  
transfer roller for cover paper.  
Coated  
Envelope  
Label  
Displays the voltage setting of the  
transfer roller for coated paper.  
Displays the voltage setting of the  
transfer roller for envelopes.  
Displays the voltage setting of the  
transfer roller for labels.  
326  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
Adjust Fuser  
Plain  
Displays the temperature setting  
of the fuser for plain paper.  
Plain Thick  
Recycled  
Covers  
Displays the temperature setting  
of the fuser for thick plain paper.  
Displays the temperature setting  
of the fuser for recycled paper.  
Displays the temperature setting  
of the fuser for cover paper.  
Coated  
Envelope  
Label  
Displays the temperature setting  
of the fuser for coated paper.  
Displays the temperature setting  
of the fuser for envelopes.  
Displays the temperature setting  
of the fuser for labels.  
Auto Registration Displays whether to automatically adjust color registration.  
Adjustment  
Adjust Altitude  
Displays the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.  
Non-Dell Toner Displays whether to use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.  
BTR Refresh  
Mode  
Displays whether to execute counter measures for  
curling/separating discharge of the paper.  
Web Link  
Customization  
Select  
Reorder URL  
Displays a link used for ordering consumables.  
Regular  
Displays the regular web address  
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna).  
Premier  
Displays the premier web address  
(http://premier.dell.com).  
*1  
If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.  
Reports  
Purpose:  
To print the settings and history information of your printer.  
The reports are printed in the paper size specified in system settings. The  
default is A4 or Letter.  
Values:  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
327  
   
System Settings  
Panel Settings  
Job History  
Click to print a detailed list of the system settings.  
Click to print a detailed list of the panel settings.  
Click to print the completed jobs history.  
Click to print the error history.  
Error History  
Demo Page  
Click to print the Demo Page.  
Address Book List  
Click to print the list of Personal Address, Fax Group,  
and E-mail Group stored as Address Book.  
TCP/IP Settings  
Purpose:  
To display the current settings of TCP/IP (Transmission Control  
Protocol/Internet Protocol) protocol.  
Values:  
IP Address Mode  
IP Address  
Displays the method for acquiring the IP address.  
Displays the IP address of your printer.  
Displays the subnet mask.  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway Address  
Displays the gateway address.  
Tray Settings  
Purpose:  
To display the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder  
(MPF).  
Values:  
Paper Type  
Displays the paper type setting of the MPF.  
Displays the paper size setting of the MPF.  
Paper Size  
Custom Size - Y  
Displays the length of custom size paper loaded in the  
MPF.  
328  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
       
Custom Size - X  
Display Popup  
Displays the width of custom size paper loaded in the  
MPF.  
Displays whether to use a popup menu that prompts  
the user to set Paper Type and Paper Size when the  
paper is loaded in the MPF.  
Defaults Settings  
Purpose:  
To display the default scan, fax, and copy settings of the printer.  
Values:  
Scan  
Defaults  
Scan To  
Network  
Displays whether to store scanned image on a network  
server or on a computer.  
File Format Displays the file format to save the scanned image.  
Color  
Displays whether to scan in color or in black and  
white.  
Resolution  
Displays the default scan resolution.  
Displays the default document size.  
Document  
Size  
Lighter/Dark Displays the default scan density level.  
er  
Sharpness  
Displays the default sharpness level.  
Auto  
Exposure  
Displays whether to suppress the background of the  
original to enhance text on the scanned image.  
Margin  
Top/Bottom  
Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.  
Displays the value of the left and right margins.  
Displays the value of the middle margin.  
Displays the image compression level.  
Margin  
Left/Right  
Margin  
Middle  
Image  
Compression  
Max E-Mail Displays the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.  
Size  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
329  
   
Fax Defaults Resolution  
Displays the resolution level to be used for fax  
transmission.  
Lighter/Dark Displays the default density level to be used for fax  
er transmission.  
Delayed Start Displays the fax transmission start time.  
Copy  
Defaults  
Color  
Displays whether to make copies in color or in black  
and white.  
Reduce/Enlar Displays the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.  
ge  
Original Type Displays the default document type.  
Document  
Size  
Displays the default document size.  
Lighter/Dark Displays the default copy density level.  
er  
Sharpness  
Displays the default sharpness level.  
Auto  
Exposure  
Displays whether to suppress the background of the  
original to enhance text on the copy.  
Color  
Balance  
(Red)  
Displays the color balance level of red.  
Displays the color balance level of green.  
Displays the color balance level of blue.  
Color  
Balance  
(Green)  
Color  
Balance  
(Blue)  
Gray Balance Displays the gray balance level.  
Multiple-Up Displays whether to enable the Multiple-Up feature.  
Collated  
Displays whether to sort the copy job.  
Margin  
Displays the value of the top and bottom margins.  
Top/Bottom  
Margin  
Left/Right  
Displays the value of the left and right margins.  
Displays the value of the middle margin.  
Margin  
Middle  
330  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
Fax Settings  
Purpose:  
To display the basic fax settings.  
Values:  
Receive Mode  
Auto Rec Fax  
Displays the fax receiving mode.  
Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the  
fax receive mode after receiving an incoming call.  
Auto Rec Fax/Tel  
Auto Rec Ans/Fax  
Line Monitor  
Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the  
fax receive mode after the external telephone receives  
an incoming call.  
Displays the interval at which the printer goes into the  
fax receive mode after the external answering machine  
receives an incoming call.  
Displays the volume of the line monitor, which audibly  
monitors a transmission through the internal speaker  
until a connection is made.  
Ring Tone Volume  
Displays the volume of the ring tone, which indicates  
that an incoming call is a telephone call through the  
internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to  
Telephone/Fax.  
Line Type  
Displays the line type.  
Tone/Pulse  
Displays the dialing type.  
Resend Delay  
Redial Attempts  
Redial Delay  
Junk Fax Setup  
Displays the interval between transmission attempts.  
Displays the number of redial attempts.  
Displays the interval between redial attempts.  
Displays whether to reject faxes sent from unwanted  
numbers.  
Remote Receive  
Remote Rcv Tone  
Fax Header  
Displays whether to receive faxes by pressing a remote  
receive code on the external telephone.  
Displays the remote receive code to start Remote  
Receive.  
Displays whether to print the information of sender on  
the header of faxes.  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
331  
   
Fax Header Name  
Fax Number  
Displays the name of sender to be printed on the  
header of faxes.  
Displays the fax number to be printed on the header  
of faxes.  
Fax Cover Page  
DRPD Pattern  
Displays whether to attach a cover page to faxes.  
Displays the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection  
(DRPD) setting.  
Sent Fax Fwd  
Displays whether to forward incoming faxes to a  
specified destination.  
Fax Fwd Number  
Displays the fax number of the destination to which  
incoming faxes are to be forwarded.  
Prefix Dial  
Displays whether to set a prefix dial number.  
Prefix Dial Num  
Displays a prefix dial number. This number dials  
before any auto dial number is started.  
Discard Size  
Displays whether to discard text or images at the  
bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit  
onto the output paper.  
ECM  
Displays whether to enable the Error Correction Mode  
(ECM).  
Modem Speed  
Fax Activity  
Displays the fax modem speed when a fax  
transmission or reception error occurs.  
Displays whether to automatically print a fax activity  
report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax  
communications.  
Fax Transmit  
Fax Broadcast  
Displays whether to print a transmission report after  
every fax transmission or only when an error occurs.  
Displays whether to print a transmission report after  
every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only  
when an error occurs.  
Fax Protocol  
Country  
Displays whether to print a protocol monitor report  
after every fax transmission or only when an error  
occurs.  
Displays the country where the printer is used.  
332  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
Printer Maintenance  
The Printer Maintenance tab contains the System Settings, Date & Time,  
Paper Density, Adjust BTR, Adjust Fuser, Registration Adjustment, Adjust  
Altitude, Reset Defaults, Non-Dell Toner, BTR Refresh Mode, Web Link  
Customization, TCP/IP Settings, Tray Settings, EWS, Scan Defaults, Fax  
Defaults, Copy Defaults, and Fax Settings pages.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
System Settings  
Purpose:  
To configure the power saving mode, auto clear time, warning tones, time-out  
time, operator panel language settings, job log auto print, and mm/inch  
setting.  
Values:  
*1  
Power Saver Sleep  
Timer  
5 minutes*  
Specifies the time taken by  
the printer before it enters  
Sleep mode after it finishes  
a job.  
5– 30 minutes  
Deep Sleep 6 minutes*  
1–6 minutes  
Specifies the time taken by  
the printer before it enters  
Deep Sleep mode after it  
goes into Sleep mode.  
Auto Reset  
Alert Tone  
45 seconds* Specifies the time taken by the printer before it  
automatically resets the settings for Copy, Scan, or Fax  
on the operator panel to the defaults when no  
additional settings are made.  
1 minute  
2 minutes  
3 minutes  
4 minutes  
Panel Select Off*  
Tone  
Does not emit a tone when the operator  
panel input is correct.  
Low  
Emits a tone at the specified volume  
when the operator panel input is correct.  
Medium  
High  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
333  
     
Panel Alert Off*  
Tone  
Does not emit a tone when the operator  
panel input is incorrect.  
Low  
Emits a tone at the specified volume  
when the operator panel input is  
incorrect.  
Medium  
High  
Off  
Job Tone  
Does not emit a tone when a job is  
complete.  
Low  
Emits a tone at the specified volume  
when a job is complete.  
Medium*  
High  
Alert Tone  
Off  
Does not emit a tone when a problem  
occurs.  
Low  
Emits a tone at the specified volume  
when a problem occurs.  
Medium*  
High  
Out of Paper Off  
Tone  
Does not emit a tone when the printer  
runs out of paper.  
Low  
Emits a tone at the specified volume  
when the printer runs out of paper.  
Medium*  
High  
Off*  
Auto Clear  
Alert Tone  
Does not emit a tone before the printer  
performs auto clear.  
Low  
Emits a tone at the specified volume 5  
seconds before the printer performs auto  
clear.  
Medium  
High  
All Tones  
Off  
Disables all the alert tones.  
Low  
Specifies the volume of all the alert tones  
at once.  
Medium  
High  
334  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
Job Time-  
Out  
0
Disables the job time-out.  
30 seconds* Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for  
data to arrive from the computer. The print job is  
cancelled if it times out.  
5–300  
seconds  
Fault Time-  
Out  
0
Disables the fault time-out.  
60 seconds* Specifies the time taken by the printer before it cancels  
jobs that stop abnormally. The print job is cancelled if it  
times out.  
3–300  
seconds  
Panel  
Language  
English*  
Français  
Italiano  
Deutsch  
Español  
Nederlands  
Dansk  
Specifies the language to be used on the operator panel.  
Norsk  
Svenska  
Off*  
Auto Log  
Print  
Does not automatically print a job history report.  
*2  
On  
Automatically prints a job history report after every 20  
jobs.  
*3  
mm/inch  
millimeter  
(mm)  
Specifies the measurement unit displayed after the  
numeric value on the operator panel.  
inch (")  
Apply New Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New  
Settings button to apply the changes.  
Restart printer to apply new Press the Restart printer to apply new settings button  
settings to apply the changes.  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
335  
*1  
Enter 5 in Sleep to put the printer in the Sleep mode five minutes after it finishes a job.  
This uses less energy, but requires more warm-up time for the printer. Enter 5 if your  
printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting and you notice lights flickering.  
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this  
keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time. Select a value  
between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a balance  
between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.  
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the Sleep mode when it  
receives data from the computer. You can also return the printer to the standby mode  
by pressing any button on the operator panel.  
*2  
*3  
If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.  
The default for mm/inch varies depending on country-specific factory default.  
Date & Time  
Purpose:  
To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.  
Values:  
Date Format  
Specifies the date format; yy/mm/dd, mm/dd/yy, or  
dd/mm/yy.  
Time Format  
Time Zone  
Specifies the time format; 24H or 12H.  
Specifies the time zone.  
Set Date  
Specifies the current date.  
Set Time  
Specifies the current time.  
Apply New Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New  
Settings button to apply the changes.  
Paper Density  
Purpose:  
To specify the paper density.  
Values:  
Plain  
Normal*  
Light  
Specifies the paper density of plain paper.  
336  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
       
Label  
Normal*  
Light  
Specifies the paper density of labels.  
Apply New Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New  
Settings button to apply the changes.  
Adjust BTR  
Purpose:  
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller  
(BTR). To lower the voltage, set negative values. To increase, set positive  
values.  
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you  
see mottles on the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white  
spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.  
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.  
Values:  
Plain  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
Plain Thick  
Recycled  
Covers  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
Coated  
Envelope  
Label  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
Apply New  
Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New Settings  
button to apply the changes.  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
337  
                 
Adjust Fuser  
Purpose:  
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fuser. To  
lower the temperature, set negative values. To increase, set positive values.  
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When  
the printed paper has curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner  
does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.  
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.  
Values:  
Plain  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
Plain Thick  
Recycled  
Covers  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
Coated  
Envelope  
Label  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
Apply New  
Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New Settings  
button to apply the changes.  
Registration Adjustment  
Purpose:  
To set Color Registration Adjustment (individual yellow, magenta, cyan  
correction) settings. When Auto Registration Adjustment is set to On, the  
printer prints the color registration chart and adjusts the color registration by  
338  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
                     
using the chart. Color registration adjustment need to be made during the  
initial setup of the printer or when the printer is moved to a different  
location.  
Values:  
Auto Registration On*  
Automatically adjusts color registration.  
Adjustment  
Off  
Does not automatically adjust color registration.  
*1  
Auto Correct  
Click Start to automatically correct color  
registration.  
*1,*2  
Print Color Regi Chart  
Click Start to print a color registration chart.  
Color  
Registration  
Adjustment 1  
Yellow  
0*  
Specifies lateral (perpendicular to  
paper feed direction) color  
adjustment values individually.  
-5–+5  
0*  
*1  
Magenta  
Cyan  
(Lateral)  
-5–+5  
0*  
-5–+5  
0*  
Color  
Registration  
Adjustment 2  
LY(Left  
Yellow)  
Specifies process (paper feed  
direction) color adjustment values  
individually.  
-5–+5  
0*  
*1  
LM(Left  
Magenta)  
(Process)  
-5–+5  
0*  
LC(Left  
Cyan)  
-5–+5  
0*  
RY(Right  
Yellow)  
-5–+5  
0*  
RM(Right  
Magenta)  
-5–+5  
0*  
RC(Right  
Cyan)  
-5–+5  
Apply New Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply  
New Settings button to apply the changes.  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
339  
*1  
*2  
This item is available only when Auto Registration Adjustment is set to Off.  
The color registration chart prints a lattice pattern of yellow, magenta, and cyan  
lines. On the chart, find the values on the right side that are next to the line that is  
perfectly straight for each of the three colors. If the value for this line is 0, color  
registration is not needed. If the value for this line is any value other than 0, specify  
the adjustment values under Color Registration Adjustment.  
Adjust Altitude  
Purpose:  
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.  
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with  
barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of  
the location where the printer is being used.  
NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality,  
incorrect indication of remaining toner.  
Values:  
0 meter*  
Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer  
is installed.  
1000 meters  
2000 meters  
3000 meters  
Apply New Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New  
Reset Defaults  
Purpose:  
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for system parameters or Address  
Book data. After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu  
parameters or data are reset to their default values.  
For details, see "Resetting Defaults" on page 357.  
Values:  
System Section  
Click to initialize the system parameters.  
340  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
         
User Fax Section  
User Scan Section  
Click to initialize the fax number entries in the  
Address Book.  
Click to initialize the e-mail and server address entries  
in the Address Book.  
Non-Dell Toner  
Purpose:  
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.  
NOTE: Using non-Dell-brand toner cartridges may make some printer features  
unusable, reduce print quality and decrease the reliability of your printer. Dell  
recommends only new Dell-brand toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not  
provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or  
components not supplied by Dell.  
NOTE: Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart  
the printer.  
Values:  
Non-Dell  
Toner  
Off*  
On  
Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.  
Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.  
Apply New Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New  
Settings button to apply the changes.  
BTR Refresh Mode  
Purpose:  
To execute counter measures for curling/separating discharge of the paper.  
Values:  
*
BTR Refresh Off  
Mode  
Does not automatically execute counter measures for  
curling/separating discharge of the paper.  
On  
Automatically executes counter measures for  
curling/separating discharge of the paper.  
Apply New Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New  
Settings button to apply the changes.  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
341  
       
Web Link Customization  
Purpose:  
To specify a link used for ordering consumables.  
Values:  
Select Reorder URL  
Regular*  
Select the Regular or Premier URL.  
(http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna).  
Premier  
(http://premier.dell.com).  
Apply New Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New  
Settings button to apply the changes.  
TCP/IP Settings  
Purpose:  
To configure TCP/IP settings.  
Values:  
IP Address  
Mode  
AutoIP*  
BOOTP  
RARP  
Automatically sets the IP address.  
Uses BOOTP to set the IP address.  
Uses RARP to set the IP address.  
Uses DHCP to set the IP address.  
Manually sets the IP address.  
DHCP  
Panel  
IP Address  
Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer.  
Manually sets the subnet mask.  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway Address  
Manually sets the gateway address.  
Apply New Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New  
Settings button to apply the changes.  
Restart printer to apply new Press the Restart printer to apply new settings button  
settings to apply the changes.  
342  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
       
Tray Settings  
Purpose:  
To specify the paper size and type of paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder  
(MPF).  
Values:  
Paper Type  
Plain*  
Specifies the type of paper loaded in the MPF.  
Plain Thick  
Covers  
Coated  
Label  
Recycled  
Envelope  
Plain Side 2  
Plain Thick  
Side 2  
Covers Side 2  
Coated  
Side 2  
Recycled  
Side 2  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
343  
 
*1  
Paper Size  
A4  
A5  
B5  
Specifies the size of paper loaded in the MPF.  
*1  
Letter  
Folio  
Legal  
Executive  
Envelope  
#10  
Monarch  
Monarch  
Landscape  
DL  
DL  
Landscape  
C5  
Custom Size  
Custom Size 297  
- Y mm*/11.7  
Specifies the length of custom size paper.  
inch*  
127–355  
mm/5.0–14.0  
inch  
Custom Size 210 mm*/8.3 Specifies the width of custom size paper.  
- X  
inch*  
77–215  
mm/3.0–8.5  
inch  
Display  
Popup  
On*  
Displays a popup menu that prompts the user to set  
Paper Type and Paper Size when the paper is loaded in  
the MPF.  
Off  
Does not display a popup menu.  
Apply New Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New  
Settings button to apply the changes.  
344  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
*1  
The default for Paper Size varies depending on country-specific factory default.  
EWS (Embedded Web Server or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool)  
Purpose:  
To display the server settings of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
NOTE: When the printer is connected to the USB port, this setting cannot be  
displayed.  
Values:  
Print Server Settings  
Click Display to display the server settings for the Dell  
Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Display of  
EWS  
On*  
Off  
Turns on the display of the server settings for the Dell  
Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Turns off the display of the server settings for the Dell  
Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Apply New Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New  
Settings button to apply the changes.  
Scan Defaults  
Purpose:  
To create your own default Scan settings.  
Values:  
Scan To  
Network  
Computer  
Stores the scanned image on a computer using the  
(Network)* Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.  
Server (FTP) Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP  
protocol.  
File Format TIFF  
PDF*  
Saves the scanned image in TIFF.  
Saves the scanned image in PDF.  
Saves the scanned image in JPEG.  
JPEG  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
345  
       
Color  
Black &  
White  
Scans in black and white mode.  
GrayScale  
Color*  
Scan in grayscale mode.  
Scans in color mode.  
Color(Photo) Scans in color mode. This is suitable for photographic  
images.  
Resolution  
200*  
300  
400  
600  
Scans an image at 200dpi.  
Scans an image at 300dpi.  
Scans an image at 400dpi.  
Scans an image at 600dpi.  
*1  
Document  
Size  
A4  
Sets the document size to A4.  
Sets the document size to A5.  
Sets the document size to B5.  
Sets the document size to Letter.  
Sets the document size to Folio.  
Sets the document size to Legal.  
Sets the document size to Executive.  
A5  
B5  
*1  
Letter  
Folio  
Legal  
Executive  
Lighter/Dark Lighter 2  
Makes the scanned image lighter than the original.  
Works well with dark print.  
er  
Lighter 1  
Normal*  
Darker 1  
Darker 2  
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.  
Makes the scanned image darker than the original.  
Works well with light print or faint pencil markings.  
Sharpness  
Softest  
Softer  
Makes the scanned image softer than the original.  
Normal*  
Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer  
than the original.  
Sharper  
Sharpest  
On*  
Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.  
Auto  
Exposure  
Suppresses the background of the original to enhance  
text on the scanned image.  
Off  
Does not suppress the background.  
346  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
Margin  
Top/Bottom inch*  
2 mm*/0.1  
Specifies the value of the top and bottom margins.  
Specifies the value of the left and right margins.  
Specifies the value of the middle margin.  
0–50  
mm/0.0–2.0  
inch  
Margin  
Left/Right  
2 mm*/0.1  
inch*  
0–50  
mm/0.0–2.0  
inch  
Margin  
Middle  
0 mm*/0.0  
inch*  
0–50  
mm/0.0–2.0  
inch  
Image  
Compression  
High  
Sets the image compression level to High.  
Sets the image compression level to Medium.  
Sets the image compression level to Low.  
Medium*  
Low  
Max E-Mail Size  
Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent,  
within the range of 50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes. The  
default is 2048 K bytes.  
Apply New Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New  
Settings button to apply the changes.  
*1  
The default for Document Size varies depending on country-specific factory default.  
Fax Defaults  
Purpose:  
To create your own default Fax settings.  
Values:  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
347  
   
Resolution  
Standard*  
Fine  
Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.  
Suitable for documents containing small characters or  
thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix  
printer.  
Super Fine  
Ultra Fine  
Suitable for documents containing extremely fine  
detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the  
remote machine also supports the Super Fine  
resolution.  
Suitable for documents containing photographic  
images.  
Lighter/Dark Lighter 2  
Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well  
with dark print.  
er  
Lighter 1  
Normal*  
Darker 1  
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.  
Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well  
with light print or faint pencil markings.  
Darker 2  
Delayed Start 21:00*  
00:00–23:59  
Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax  
at a specified time.  
Apply New Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New  
Settings button to apply the changes.  
Restart printer to apply new Press the Restart printer to apply new settings button  
settings  
to apply the changes.  
Copy Defaults  
Purpose:  
To create your own default Copy settings.  
Values:  
Color  
Black &  
White  
Prints in black and white mode.  
Prints in color mode.  
Color*  
348  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
   
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
mm series Custom  
200%  
Sets the default reduction/enlargement  
ratio to the custom size.  
Sets the default enlargement ratio when  
you set the default measurement unit to  
millimeter.  
A5ï‚®A4  
(141%)  
A5ï‚®B5  
(122%)  
100%  
Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a  
copied image.  
B5ï‚®A5  
(81%)  
Sets the default reduction ratio when you  
set the default measurement unit to  
millimeter.  
A4ï‚®A5  
(70%)  
50%  
inch series 200%  
Sets the default enlargement ratio when  
you set the default measurement unit to  
inch.  
Statementï‚®  
Legal (154%)  
Statementï‚®  
Letter (129%)  
100%  
Does not enlarge or reduce the size of a  
copied image.  
Legalï‚®Letter Sets the default reduction ratio when you  
(78%)  
set the default measurement unit to inch.  
Ledgerï‚®  
Letter (64%)  
50%  
Custom  
Reduce/  
Enlarge  
100%*  
25–400%  
Reduces or enlarges the image to the  
custom size when Reduce/Enlarge is set  
to Custom.  
Original Type  
Text  
Suitable for documents with text.  
Text &  
Photo*  
Suitable for documents with both text  
and photos/gray tones.  
Photo  
Suitable for documents with photos.  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
349  
*1  
Document  
Size  
A4  
A5  
B5  
Sets the document size to A4.  
Sets the document size to A5.  
Sets the document size to B5.  
Sets the document size to Letter.  
Sets the document size to Folio.  
Sets the document size to Legal.  
Sets the document size to Executive.  
*1  
Letter  
Folio  
Legal  
Executive  
Lighter 2  
Lighter 1  
Normal*  
Lighter/Dark  
er  
Makes the copy lighter than the original.  
Works well with dark print.  
Works well with standard typed or printed  
documents.  
Darker 1  
Darker 2  
Makes the copy darker than the original.  
Works well with light print or faint pencil  
markings.  
Sharpness  
Softest  
Softer  
Makes the copy softer than the original.  
Normal*  
Does not make the copy sharper or softer  
than the original.  
Sharper  
Sharpest  
On*  
Makes the copy sharper than the original.  
Auto  
Exposure  
Suppresses the background of the original  
to enhance text on the copy.  
Off  
0*  
Does not suppress the background.  
Sets the color balance level of red.  
Color  
Balance  
(Red)  
-2– 2  
Color  
Balance  
(Green)  
0*  
Sets the color balance level of green.  
Sets the color balance level of blue.  
Sets the gray balance level.  
-2– 2  
Color  
Balance  
(Blue)  
0*  
-2– 2  
Gray Balance  
0*  
-2– 2  
350  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
Multiple-Up  
Off*  
Auto  
Does not perform multiple-up printing.  
Automatically reduces the original pages  
to fit onto one sheet of paper.  
ID Copy  
Manual  
Prints the original pages onto one sheet of  
paper in the original size.  
Prints the original pages onto the one  
sheet of paper in the size specified in  
Reduce/Enlarge.  
Collated  
Uncollated* Does not sort the copy job.  
Collated  
Auto  
Sorts the copy job.  
Automatically determines which output  
mode for the copy job.  
Margin  
Top/Bottom  
4 mm*/0.2  
inch*  
Specifies the value of the top and bottom  
margins.  
0-50 mm/0.0-  
2.0 inch  
Margin  
Left/Right  
4 mm*/0.2  
inch*  
Specifies the value of the left and right  
margins.  
0-50 mm/0.0-  
2.0 inch  
Margin  
Middle  
0 mm*/0.0  
inch*  
Specifies the value of the middle margin.  
0-50 mm/0.0-  
2.0 inch  
Apply New Settings  
After you complete the settings, press the  
Apply New Settings button to apply the  
changes.  
*1  
The default for Document Size varies depending on country-specific factory default.  
Fax Settings  
Purpose:  
To configure the basic fax settings.  
Values:  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
351  
   
Receive  
Mode  
Telephone  
Fax*  
Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive  
a fax by picking up the handset of the external  
telephone, pressing the remote receive code, and then  
pressing  
.
Automatically receives faxes.  
Telephone/Fa When the printer receives an incoming fax, the  
x
external telephone rings for the time specified in Auto  
Rec Fax/Tel, and then the printer automatically  
receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the  
printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that  
the call is a telephone call.  
Ans  
The printer can share a telephone line with an  
Machine/Fax answering machine. In this mode, the printer will  
monitor the fax signal and pick up the line if there are  
fax tones. If the phone communication is using serial  
transmission in your country (such as Germany,  
Sweden, Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and  
Switzerland), this mode is not supported.  
DRPD  
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection  
(DRPD) option, a distinctive ring service must be  
installed on your telephone line by the telephone  
company. After the telephone company has provided a  
separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring  
pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that  
specific ring pattern.  
Auto Rec Fax 0*  
0–255  
6*  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax  
receive mode after receiving an incoming call.  
Auto Rec  
Fax/Tel  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax  
receive mode after the external telephone receives an  
incoming call.  
0–255  
Auto Rec  
Ans/Fax  
21*  
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax  
receive mode after the external answering machine  
receives an incoming call.  
0–255  
352  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
Line Monitor Off  
Low  
Turns off the volume of the line monitor.  
Specifies the volume of the line monitor, which  
audibly monitors a transmission through the internal  
speaker until a connection is made.  
Medium*  
High  
Off  
Ring Tone  
Volume  
Turns off the volume of the ring tone.  
Low  
Specifies the volume of the ring tone, which indicates  
that an incoming call is a telephone call through the  
internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to  
Telephone/Fax.  
Medium  
High*  
Line Type  
PSTN*  
PBX  
Sets the line type to PSTN.  
Sets the line type to PBX.  
Sets the dialing type to Tone.  
Tone/Pulse  
Tone*  
Pulse(10PPS Sets the dialing type to Pulse (10 pulse per second).  
)
Pulse(20PPS Sets the dialing type to Pulse (20 pulse per second).  
)
Resend Delay 8*  
3–255  
3*  
0–9  
Specifies the interval between transmission attempts.  
Redial  
Attempts  
Specifies the number of redial attempts to make when  
the destination fax number is busy. If you enter 0, the  
printer will not redial.  
Redial Delay 1*  
1–15  
Specifies the interval between redial attempts.  
Junk Fax  
Setup  
Off*  
On  
Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.  
Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers by  
accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered  
in the Phone Book.  
Remote  
Receive  
Off*  
On  
Disables the remote receive feature.  
Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the  
external telephone after picking up the handset of the  
telephone.  
Remote Rcv 00*  
Tone  
Specifies the remote receive code in two digits to start  
Remote Receive.  
00–99  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
353  
 
Fax Header On*  
Off  
Prints the information of sender on the header of  
faxes.  
Does not print the information of sender on the  
header of faxes.  
Fax Header Name  
Sets the name of sender to be printed on the header of  
faxes. Up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be  
entered.  
Fax Number  
Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the  
header of faxes.  
Fax Cover  
Page  
Off*  
Does not attach a cover page to faxes.  
Attaches a cover page to faxes.  
On  
DRPD  
Pattern  
Pattern 4*  
Pattern 1–7  
Provides a separate number for faxing with a  
distinctive ring pattern.  
Sent Fax Fwd Off*  
Forward  
Does not forward incoming faxes.  
Always forwards incoming faxes to a specified  
destination.  
Print and  
Forward  
Always forwards incoming faxes to a specified  
destination and prints all forwarded incoming faxes.  
Fax Fwd Number  
Specifies the fax number of the destination to which  
incoming faxes will be forwarded.  
Prefix Dial  
Off*  
On  
Does not set a prefix dial number.  
Sets a prefix dial number.  
Prefix Dial Num  
Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This  
number dials before any auto dial number is started. It  
is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch  
Exchange (PABX).  
Discard Size Off  
On  
Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without  
discarding it.  
Discards any excess at the bottom of a fax page.  
Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the  
Auto  
Reduction* output paper.  
ECM  
On*  
Enables the ECM. To use the ECM, the remote  
machines must also support the ECM.  
Off  
Disables the ECM.  
354  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
Modem  
Speed  
2.4  
Specifies the fax modem speed when a fax  
transmission or reception error occurs.  
4.8  
9.6  
14.4  
33.6*  
Fax Activity Auto Print* Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50  
incoming and outgoing fax communications.  
No Auto  
Print  
Does not automatically print a fax activity report.  
Fax Transmit Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax  
transmission.  
Print On  
Error*  
Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.  
Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax  
transmission.  
Fax  
Broadcast  
Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax  
transmission to multiple destinations.  
Print On  
Error  
Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.  
Print Always* Prints a transmission report after every fax  
transmission to multiple destinations.  
Fax Protocol Print  
Disable*  
Does not print a protocol monitor report.  
Print On  
Error  
Prints a protocol monitor report only when an error  
occurs.  
Print Always Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax  
transmission.  
Country  
Apply New Settings  
Selects the country where the printer is used.  
After you complete the settings, press the Apply New  
Settings button to apply the changes.  
Restart printer to apply new Press the Restart printer to apply new settings button  
settings to apply the changes.  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
355  
Diagnosis  
The Diagnosis tab contains the Chart Print, Environment Sensor Info,  
Clean Developer, and Refresh Mode pages.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Chart Print  
Purpose:  
To print various charts that can be used for diagnosing your printer.  
Values:  
Pitch Configuration Chart Click to print full halftone pages for yellow, magenta,  
cyan, and black. Also outputs pages to check the pitch.  
Ghost Configuration Chart Click to print a chart to check for ghost printing.  
4 Colors Configuration  
Chart  
Click to print bands of yellow, magenta, cyan, and  
black with varying density.  
MQ Chart  
Click to print charts to check for the binding.  
Alignment Chart  
Click to print a chart, and then check for proper  
alignment of the print image on the paper.  
PHD Refresh Configuration Click to print a chart to check the light fatigue of the  
Chart  
PHD unit.  
Environment Sensor Info  
Purpose:  
To output the internal environment sensor information of the printer to  
Result by pressing the Get Environment Sensor Info button.  
Clean Developer  
Purpose:  
To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge.  
Values:  
356  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
             
Clean Developer  
Click Start to stir the toner.  
Refresh Mode  
Purpose:  
To use up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its  
life, or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.  
NOTE: Using the Refresh Mode consumes extra toner.  
Values:  
Toner Refresh Yellow  
Mode  
Click to clean the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.  
Magenta  
Click to clean the toner in the magenta toner  
cartridge.  
Cyan  
Black  
Click to clean the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.  
Click to clean the toner in the black toner cartridge.  
Resetting Defaults  
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters  
or data are reset to their default values.  
NOTE:  
1
Click Start  
Color Printer  
ï‚®
All Programs  
ï‚®
Dell Printers  
ï‚®
Dell 1355 Multifunction  
ï‚®
Tool Box  
.
NOTE: When multiple printer drivers are installed on your computer, the  
Select Printer window appears. In this case, click the name of this printer  
listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.  
The Tool Box opens.  
2
3
Click the Printer Maintenance tab.  
Select Reset Defaults from the list at the left side of the page.  
The Reset Defaults page is displayed.  
4
Select the desired option button.  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
357  
       
The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.  
358  
Understanding the Tool Box Menus  
20  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
When your printer is configured as a network printer available to a number of  
users, the access to the Admin Menu menus can be limited. This prevents  
unauthorized users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change the  
default menu settings that has been set by the administrator. However, you  
can use select settings for individual print jobs using the printer driver. Print  
settings selected from the printer driver have precedence over the default  
menu settings selected from the operator panel.  
Defaults Settings  
Use the Defaults Settings menu to configure the default copy, scan,  
and fax settings of the printer.  
Copy Defaults  
Use the Copy Defaults menus to configure a variety of copy features.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Color  
Purpose:  
To set whether to make copies in color or in black and white.  
Values:  
Black & White Prints in black and white mode.  
Color*  
Prints in color mode.  
Collated  
Purpose:  
To sort the copy job.  
Values:  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
359  
           
Uncollated*  
Collated  
Auto  
Does not sort the copy job.  
Sorts the copy job.  
Automatically determines which output mode for the copy job.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Purpose:  
To set the default copy reduction/enlargement ratio.  
Values:  
mm series  
200%  
A5ï‚®A4 (141%)  
A5ï‚®B5 (122%)  
100%*  
B5ï‚®A5 (81%)  
A4ï‚®A5 (70%)  
50%  
inch series  
200%  
Stmtï‚®Lgl (154%)  
Stmtï‚®Ltr (129%)  
*
100%  
Lglï‚®Ltr (78%)  
Ldgrï‚®Ltr (64%)  
50%  
360  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
 
NOTE: You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from  
25% to 400%, or press to enlarge the zoom ratio or press to reduce the zoom  
ratio in 1% intervals.  
NOTE: This item is available only when Multiple-Up is set to Off or  
Manual.  
Document Size  
Purpose:  
To specify the default document size.  
Values:  
*1  
A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
A5 (148 x 210 mm)  
B5 (182 x 257 mm)  
*1  
Letter (8.5 x 11")  
Folio (8.5 x 13")  
Legal (8.5 x 14")  
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")  
*1  
The default for Document Size  
varies depending on country-  
specific factory default.  
Original Type  
Purpose:  
To select the copy image quality.  
Values:  
Text  
Suitable for documents with text.  
Text & Photo* Suitable for documents with both text and photos/gray tones.  
Photo  
Suitable for documents with photos.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
361  
   
Lighter/Darker  
Purpose:  
To set the default copy density level.  
Values:  
Lighter2  
Lighter1  
Normal*  
Darker1  
Darker2  
Makes the copy lighter than the original. Works well with dark  
print.  
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.  
Makes the copy darker than the original. Works well with light print  
or faint pencil markings.  
Sharpness  
Purpose:  
To set the default sharpness level.  
Values:  
Sharpest  
Sharper  
Normal*  
Softer  
Makes the copy sharper than the original.  
Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original.  
Makes the copy softer than the original.  
Softest  
Auto Exposure  
Purpose:  
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy.  
Values:  
Off  
Does not suppress the background.  
On*  
Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the  
copy.  
362  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
     
Color Balance R  
Purpose:  
To specify the default color balance level of red within the range of -2 to +2.  
Color Balance G  
Purpose:  
To specify the default color balance level of green within the range of -2 to  
+2.  
Color Balance B  
Purpose:  
To specify the default color balance level of blue within the range of -2 to +2.  
Gray Balance  
Purpose:  
To specify the default gray balance level within the range of -2 to +2.  
Multiple-Up  
Purpose:  
To print two original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper.  
Values:  
Off*  
Auto  
Does not perform multiple-up printing.  
Automatically reduces the original pages to fit onto one sheet of  
paper.  
ID Copy  
Manual  
Prints the original pages onto one sheet of paper in the original size.  
Prints the original pages onto the one sheet of paper in the size  
specified in Reduce/Enlarge.  
Margin Top/Bottom  
Purpose:  
To specify the value of the top and bottom margins.  
Values:  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
363  
     
4 mm*/0.2 inch*  
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.  
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch  
Margin Left/Right  
Purpose:  
To specify the value of the left and right margins.  
Values:  
4 mm*/0.2 inch*  
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.  
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch  
Margin Middle  
Purpose:  
To specify the value of the middle margin.  
Values:  
0 mm*/0.0 inch*  
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.  
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch  
Scan Defaults  
Use the Scan Defaults menus to configure a variety of scanner features.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Scan to Network  
Purpose:  
To store the scanned image on a network server or on a computer.  
Values:  
364  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
       
Network  
(Computer)  
Stores the scanned image on a computer using the Server Message  
Block (SMB) protocol.  
*
Network  
(Server)  
Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol.  
File Format  
Purpose:  
To specify the file format to save the scanned image.  
Values:  
PDF*  
TIFF  
JPEG  
Color  
Purpose:  
To set whether to scan in color or in black and white.  
Values:  
Black & White Scans in black and white mode.  
Color*  
Scans in color mode.  
Color Button Set  
Purpose:  
To assign color mode to the color mode switch button.  
Values:  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
365  
     
B&W Button  
Color Button  
Black & White*  
Grayscale  
Scans in black and white when Black &  
White is selected for a color mode.  
Scans in gray scale when Black & White is  
selected for a color mode.  
Color*  
Scans in color when Color is selected for a  
color mode.  
Color (Photo)  
Scans in color (Photo) when Color is  
selected for a color mode. This is suitable for  
photographic images.  
Resolution  
Purpose:  
To specify the default scan resolution.  
Values:  
200 x 200 dpi*  
300 x 300 dpi  
400 x 400 dpi  
600 x 600 dpi  
Document Size  
Purpose:  
To specify the default document size.  
Values:  
*1  
A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
A5 (148 x 210 mm)  
B5 (182 x 257 mm)  
*1  
Letter (8.5 x 11")  
Folio (8.5 x 13")  
366  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
Legal (8.5 x 14")  
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")  
*1  
The default for Document Size  
varies depending on country-  
specific factory default.  
Lighter/Darker  
Purpose:  
To set the default scan density level.  
Values:  
Lighter2  
Lighter1  
Normal*  
Darker1  
Darker2  
Makes the scanned image lighter than the original. Works well with  
dark print.  
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.  
Makes the scanned image darker than the original. Works well with  
light print or faint pencil markings.  
Sharpness  
Purpose:  
To set the default sharpness level.  
Values:  
Sharpest  
Sharper  
Normal*  
Makes the scanned image sharper than the original.  
Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the  
original.  
Softer  
Makes the scanned image softer than the original.  
Softest  
Auto Exposure  
Purpose:  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
367  
     
To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned  
image.  
Values:  
Off  
Does not suppress the background.  
On*  
Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the  
scanned image.  
Margin Top/Bottom  
Purpose:  
To specify the value of the top and bottom margins.  
Values:  
2 mm*/0.1 inch*  
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.  
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch  
Margin Left/Right  
Purpose:  
To specify the value of the left and right margins.  
Values:  
2 mm*/0.1 inch*  
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.  
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch  
Margin Middle  
Purpose:  
To specify the value of the middle margin.  
Values:  
368  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
     
0 mm*/0.0 inch*  
Specify the value in increments of 1 mm/0.1 inch.  
0-50 mm/0.0-2.0 inch  
Image Compression  
Purpose:  
To specify the image compression level.  
Values:  
High  
Sets the image compression level to High.  
Medium*  
Low  
Sets the image compression level to Medium.  
Sets the image compression level to Low.  
Max EMail Size  
Purpose:  
To specify the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent, within the range of  
50 K bytes to 16384 K bytes. The default is 2048 K bytes.  
Fax Defaults  
Use the Fax Defaults menus to configure a variety of fax features.  
NOTE: The FAX service cannot be used unless you set up a country code under  
Country. If Country is not set up, a message Set The Country  
Code appears on the display.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Resolution  
Purpose:  
To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission.  
Values:  
Standard*  
Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
369  
       
Fine  
Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or  
documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.  
Super Fine  
Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The  
Super Fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also  
supports the super fine resolution. See the notes below.  
Ultra Fine  
Suitable for documents containing photographic images.  
NOTE: Faxes scanned in the Super Fine mode transmit at the highest  
resolution supported by the receiving device.  
Original Type  
Purpose:  
To select the default document type.  
Values:  
Text*  
Suitable for documents with text.  
Suitable for documents with photos.  
Photo  
Lighter/Darker  
Purpose:  
To set the default copy density level.  
Values:  
Lighter2  
Lighter1  
Normal*  
Darker1  
Darker2  
Makes the fax lighter than the original. Works well with dark print.  
Works well with standard typed or printed documents.  
Makes the fax darker than the original. Works well with light print  
or faint pencil markings.  
Delayed Start  
Purpose:  
370  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
This feature enables you to set a specific time for the fax transmission to  
start. Once Delayed Start mode is activated, your printer stores all of the  
documents to be faxed into its memory and sends them at the specified time.  
After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is  
cleared.  
Values:  
21:00*/PM9:00* Specify the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a  
specified time.  
0:00 - 23:59 /  
AM/PM1:00 -  
12:59  
NOTE: A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored in this printer.  
USB Print Defaults  
Layout  
Purpose:  
To automatically enlarge print documents when you print directly from a  
USB storage device.  
Values:  
Auto*  
Off  
Automatically enlarges print documents to fit on the paper.  
Does not enlarge print documents.  
Tray Settings  
Use the Tray Settings menu to set the paper size and type of paper  
loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
MPF  
Purpose:  
To specify the paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
371  
       
Values:  
*1  
Paper Size  
A4 (210 x 297 mm)  
A5 (148 x 210 mm)  
B5 (182 x 257 mm)  
*1  
Letter (8.5 x 11")  
Folio (8.5 x 13")  
Legal (8.5 x 14")  
Executive (7.25 x 10.5")  
Envelope #10 (4.1 x 9.5")  
Monarch Env. (3.9 x 7.5")  
Monarch Env. L (7.5 x 3.9")  
DL Env. (110 x 220 mm)  
DL Env. L (220 x 110 mm)  
C5 Envelope (162 x 229 mm)  
Custom Portrait (Y)  
Size  
297  
Specifies the  
*
*
mm /11.7inch length of the  
custom size  
paper.  
127 - 355  
mm/5.0-14.0  
inches  
*
Landscape(X) 210 mm /8.3  
Specifies the  
width of the  
custom size  
paper.  
*
inch  
77 - 215  
mm/3.0-8.5  
inches  
372  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
Paper Type  
Plain*  
Plain Thick  
Covers  
Coated  
Label  
Recycled  
Envelope  
Plain S2  
Plain Thick S2  
Covers S2  
Coated  
S2  
Recycled S2  
Display Popup Off  
On*  
Does not display a popup menu.  
Displays a popup menu that prompts the user to  
set Paper Size and Paper Type when  
the paper is loaded in the MPF.  
*1  
The default for Paper Size varies depending on country-specific  
factory default.  
NOTE: For more information on supported paper sizes, see "Supported Paper Sizes"  
on page 196.  
Reports/List  
Use the Reports/List menu to print various types of reports and lists.  
System Settings  
Purpose:  
To print a list of the information such as the printer name, service tag, the  
status of the printer, consumables, and the network settings.  
Panel Settings  
Purpose:  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
373  
         
To print a detailed list of all the settings on the operator panel menus.  
Job History  
Purpose:  
To print a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been  
processed. This list contains the last 20 jobs.  
Error History  
Purpose:  
To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.  
Color Test Page  
Purpose:  
To print a page for testing colors.  
Protocol Monitor  
Purpose:  
To print a detailed list of monitored protocols.  
Address Book  
Purpose:  
To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information.  
Fax Activity  
Purpose:  
To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent.  
Admin Menu  
Use the Admin Menu menu to configure a variety of printer features.  
NOTE: A Password is required to enter the Admin Menu menu when Panel  
Lock Set is set to Enable. In this case, enter the password you specified,  
and press the  
button.  
374  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
                           
Phone Book  
settings.  
Speed Dial  
Purpose:  
To store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations.  
See also:  
Group Dial  
Purpose:  
To create a group of fax destinations and register it under a two-digit dial  
code. Up to 6 group dial codes can be registered.  
See also:  
"Setting Group Dial" on page 314.  
Network  
Use the Network menu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to  
the printer through the wired or wireless network.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Ethernet  
Purpose:  
To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet.  
The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on.  
Values:  
Auto*  
Detects the Ethernet settings automatically.  
10BASE-T Half Uses 10base-T half-duplex.  
10BASE-T Full Uses 10base-T full-duplex.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
375  
             
100BASE-TX  
Half  
Uses 100base-TX half-duplex.  
Uses 100base-TX full-duplex.  
100BASE-TX  
Full  
NOTE: This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wired  
network.  
Status (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer only)  
Purpose:  
To display the information on the wireless signal strength. No changes can be  
made on the operator panel to improve the status of the wireless connection.  
Values:  
Good  
Indicates good signal strength.  
Acceptable  
Low  
Indicates marginal signal strength.  
Indicates insufficient signal strength.  
No Reception Indicates that no signal is received.  
NOTE: This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wireless  
network.  
Wireless Setup (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer only)  
Purpose:  
To configure the wireless network interface.  
Values:  
376  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
 
Manual Enter  
Specify a name to identify the wireless network. Up to 32  
Setup  
Network alphanumeric characters can be entered.  
(SSID)  
Infrastruct Select when you configure the wireless setting through the  
ure  
access point such as a wireless router.  
No  
Specify No Security to configure the wireless  
Security setting without specifying a security method from  
WEP, WPA-PSK-TKIP, and WPA-PSK-AES.  
WEP  
Specify the WEP 64bit Key to use through the  
(64Bit) wireless network. Up to 10 hexadecimal characters  
can be entered.  
Transmit Specify the transmit key from WEP  
Key  
Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and  
WEP Key 4.  
WEP  
Specify the WEP 128bit Key to use through the  
(128Bit) wireless network. Up to 26 hexadecimal characters  
can be entered.  
Transmit Specify the transmit key from WEP  
Key  
Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and  
WEP Key 4.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
377  
WPA-  
PSK-  
TKIP  
Select to configure the wireless setting with the  
security method of WPA-PSK-TKIP.  
Pass  
Specify the passphrase of alphanumeric  
characters from 8 to 63 only when  
WPA-PSK-TKIP is selected for  
Encryption.  
Phrase  
Entry  
WPA2-  
Select to configure the wireless setting with the  
PSK-AES security method of WPA2-PSK-AES.  
Pass  
Phrase  
Entry  
Specify the passphrase of alphanumeric  
characters from 8 to 63 only when  
WPA-PSK-AES is selected for  
Encryption.  
Ad-hoc  
Select to configure the wireless setting without the access  
point such as a wireless router.  
No  
Specify No Security to configure the wireless  
Security setting without specifying the security method  
from WEP.  
WEP  
Specify the WEP 64bit Key to use through the  
(64Bit) wireless network. Up to 10 hexadecimal characters  
can be entered.  
Transmit Specify the transmit key from WEP  
Key  
Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and  
WEP Key 4.  
WEP  
Specify the WEP 128bit Key to use through the  
(128Bit) wireless network. Up to 26 hexadecimal characters  
can be entered.  
Transmit Specify the transmit key from WEP  
Key  
Key 1, WEP Key 2, WEP Key 3, and  
WEP Key 4.  
378  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
WPS  
Push  
Button  
Control  
PBC  
Start  
No*  
Yes  
Disables the security method of WPS-  
PBC.  
Configures the wireless setting with the  
security method of WPS-PBC.  
PIN Code Start  
Configures the wireless setting using the PIN code  
Configur assigned automatically by the printer.  
ation  
Print  
PIN  
Prints the PIN code. Confirm it when you enter  
the PIN code to your computer.  
Code  
NOTE: This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wireless  
network.  
Reset Wireless (Dell 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer only)  
Purpose:  
To initialize wireless network settings. After executing this function and  
rebooting the printer, all wireless network settings are reset to their default  
values.  
No*  
Yes  
Does not reset the wireless setting.  
Resets the wireless setting.  
NOTE: This item is displayed only when the printer is connected with a wireless  
network.  
TCP/IP  
Purpose:  
To configure TCP/IP settings. The change becomes effective after the printer  
is turned off and then on.  
Values:  
IP  
Mode  
Dual Stack*  
IPv4 Mode  
Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.  
Uses IPv4 to set the IP address.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
379  
 
IPv4 Get IP  
Address  
AutoIP* Automatically sets the IP address.  
BOOTP Uses BOOTP to set the IP address.  
RARP  
DHCP  
Panel  
Uses RARP to set the IP address.  
Uses DHCP to set the IP address.  
Enables the IP address entered on the operator  
panel.  
IP Address  
Manually sets the IP address allocated to the printer.  
Manually sets the subnet mask.  
Subnet Mask  
Gateway Address  
Manually sets the gateway address.  
Protocol  
Purpose:  
To enable or disable each protocol. The change becomes effective after the  
printer is turned off and then on.  
Values:  
LPD  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disables the LPD port.  
Enables the Line Printer Daemon (LPD) port.  
Disables the Port9100 port.  
Enables the Port9100 port.  
Disables the WSD port.  
Port9100  
WSD  
Enables the WSD port.  
SNMP  
Disables the SNMP UDP port.  
Enables the Simple Network Management Protocol  
(SNMP) UDP port.  
E-Mail Alerts  
EWS  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disable  
Disables the E-Mail Alert feature.  
Enables the E-Mail Alert feature.  
Disables an access to Dell Printer Configuration  
Web Tool embedded in the printer.  
Enable*  
Enables an access to Dell Printer Configuration  
Web Tool embedded in the printer.  
380  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
           
LLTD  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disables the LLTD.  
Enables the LLTD.  
Bonjour (mDNS) Disable  
Enable*  
Disables the Bonjour (mDNS).  
Enables the Bonjour (mDNS).  
Initialize NVM  
Purpose:  
To initialize wired network data stored in NVM (non-volatile memory). After  
executing this function and rebooting the printer, all wired network settings  
are reset to their default values.  
No*  
Yes  
Does not initialize the wired network data stored in NVM.  
Initializes the wired network data stored in NVM.  
Fax Settings  
Use the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Receive Mode  
Purpose:  
To select the default fax receiving mode.  
Values:  
TEL Mode  
Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by  
picking up the handset of the external telephone, pressing the  
remote receive code, and then pressing  
.
FAX Mode  
Automatically receives faxes.  
TEL/FAX  
Mode  
When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone  
rings for the time specified in Auto Rec TEL/FAX, and then  
the printer automatically receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a  
fax, the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the  
call is a telephone call.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
381  
       
Ans/FAX Mode The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine.  
In this mode, the printer will monitor the fax signal and pick up the  
line if there are fax tones. If the phone communication is using  
serial transmission in your country (such as Germany, Sweden,  
Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France and Switzerland), this  
mode is not supported.  
DRPD Mode  
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)  
option, a distinctive ring service must be installed on your  
telephone line by the telephone company. After the telephone  
company has provided a separate number for faxing with a  
distinctive ring pattern, configure the fax setup to monitor for that  
specific ring pattern.  
Auto Rec Fax  
Purpose:  
To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after  
receiving an incoming call. The interval can be specified within the range of 0  
to 255 seconds. The default is 0 second.  
Auto Rec TEL/FAX  
Purpose:  
To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after  
the external telephone receives an incoming call. The interval can be  
specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 6 seconds.  
Auto Rec Ans/FAX  
Purpose:  
To set the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode after  
the external answering machine receives an incoming call. The interval can be  
specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 21 seconds.  
Line Monitor  
Purpose:  
To set the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a transmission  
through the internal speaker until a connection is made.  
Values:  
382  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
       
Off  
Turns off the volume of the line monitor.  
Sets the volume of the line monitor.  
Low  
Medium*  
High  
Ring Tone Volume  
Purpose:  
To set the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a  
telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive Mode is set to  
Telephone/Fax.  
Values:  
Off  
Turns off the volume of the ring tone.  
Sets the volume of the ring tone.  
Low  
Medium  
High*  
Line Type  
Purpose:  
To select the line type.  
Values:  
PSTN*  
PBX  
Sets the line type to PSTN.  
Sets the line type to PBX.  
Tone/Pulse  
Purpose:  
To select the dialing type.  
Values:  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
383  
     
Tone*  
Sets the dialing type to Tone.  
Pulse(10PPS) Sets the dialing type to Pulse (10 pulse per second).  
Pulse(20PPS) Sets the dialing type to Pulse (20 pulse per second).  
Resend Delay  
Purpose:  
To specify the interval between transmission attempts within the range of 3 to  
255 seconds. The default is 8 seconds.  
Redial Attempts  
Purpose:  
To specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax  
number is busy, within the range of 0 to 9. If you enter 0, the printer will not  
redial. The default is 3.  
Redial Delay  
Purpose:  
To specify the interval between redial attempts within the range of 1 to 15  
minutes. The default is 1 minute.  
Junk Fax Setup  
Purpose:  
To reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers by accepting faxes only from the  
fax numbers registered in the Phone Book.  
Off*  
On  
Does not reject faxes sent from unwanted numbers.  
Rejects faxes sent from unwanted numbers.  
NOTE: Ensure to specify Fax Number before using Junk Fax Setup.  
Remote Receive  
Purpose:  
384  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
         
To receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone  
after picking up the handset of the telephone.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the  
external telephone.  
Receives a fax by pressing a remote receive code on the external  
telephone.  
Remote Rcv Tone  
Purpose:  
To specify the remote receive code in two digits to start Remote Receive.  
Fax Header  
Purpose:  
To print the information of sender on the header of faxes.  
Values:  
Off  
Does not print the information of sender on the header of faxes.  
Prints the information of sender on the header of faxes.  
On*  
Company Name  
Purpose:  
To set the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes. Up to 30  
alphanumeric characters can be entered.  
Fax Number  
Purpose:  
To set the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes.  
Fax Cover Page  
Purpose:  
To set whether to attach a cover page to faxes.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
385  
         
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not attach a cover page to faxes.  
Attaches a cover page to faxes.  
DRPD Pattern  
Purpose:  
To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.  
Values:  
386  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
 
Pattern 1-7  
DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies. DRPD  
Patterns are specified by your telephone company. The patterns  
provided with your printer are shown below:  
Pattern 1  
Pattern 2  
Pattern 3  
Pattern 4  
Pattern 5  
Pattern 6  
Pattern 7  
Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to  
use this service. For example, Pattern 7 is the New Zealand  
FaxAbility distinctive ringing pattern: rings for 400ms, stops for  
800ms, rings for 400ms and stops for 1400ms. This pattern is  
repeated over and over again. This printer only responds to  
Distinctive Alert cadence(s) DA4 in New Zealand.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
387  
Forward Settings  
Purpose:  
To set whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.  
Values:  
Off*  
Does not forward incoming faxes.  
Forward Only Forwards the incoming faxes to a specified destination.  
Print and  
Forward  
Prints the incoming fax and forwards it to a specified destination.  
Fax Fwd Number  
Purpose:  
To enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be  
forwarded.  
Prefix Dial  
Purpose:  
To select whether to set a prefix dial number.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not set a prefix dial number.  
Sets a prefix dial number.  
Prefix Dial Num  
Purpose:  
To set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any  
auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic  
Branch Exchange (PABX).  
Discard Size  
Purpose:  
388  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
         
To set whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the  
entire page does not fit onto the output paper.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it.  
Discards any excess at the bottom of a fax page.  
Auto Reduction Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the output paper.  
ECM  
Purpose:  
To set whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the  
ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.  
Values:  
Off  
Disable the ECM.  
Enables the ECM.  
On*  
Modem Speed  
Purpose:  
To specify the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error  
occurs. Values:  
2.4 Kbps  
4.8 Kbps  
9.6 Kbps  
14.4 Kbps  
*
33.6 Kbps  
Fax Activity  
Purpose:  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
389  
     
To set whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50  
incoming and outgoing fax communications.  
Values:  
Auto Print*  
Automatically prints a fax activity report after every 50 incoming  
and outgoing fax communications.  
No Auto Print Does not automatically print a fax activity report.  
Fax Transmit  
Purpose:  
To set whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or  
only when an error occurs.  
Values:  
Print Always  
Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.  
Print On Error* Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.  
Print Disable  
Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.  
Fax Broadcast  
Purpose:  
To set whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to  
multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.  
Values:  
Print Always* Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.  
Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.  
Print Disable  
Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to  
multiple destinations.  
Protocol Monitor  
Purpose:  
390  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
 
To set whether to print a protocol monitor report, which helps you identify the  
cause of a communication problem.  
Values:  
Print Always  
Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.  
Print On Error Prints a protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.  
Print Disable* Does not print a protocol monitor report after a fax transmission.  
Country  
Purpose:  
To select the country where the printer is used.  
System Settings  
Use the System Settings menu to configure to configure a variety of  
printer features.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Power Saver Timer  
Purpose:  
To specify the time for transition to power saver mode.  
Options:  
Mode 1  
Mode 2  
5min*  
Specifies the time taken by the printer before it  
enters the power saver timer mode 1 after it finishes  
a job.  
5–30min  
6min*  
Specifies the time taken by the printer before it  
enters the power saver timer mode 2 after it goes into  
the power saver mode 1.  
1–6min  
Enter 5 in Mode 1 to put the printer in the power saver timer mode five  
minutes after it finishes a job. This uses less energy, but requires more warm-  
up time for the printer. Enter 5 if your printer shares an electrical circuit with  
room lighting and you notice lights flickering.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
391  
   
Select a high value if your printer is in constant use. In most circumstances,  
this keeps the printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time. Select a  
value between 5 and 30 minutes for the power saver timer mode if you want a  
balance between energy consumption and a shorter warm-up period.  
The printer automatically returns to the standby mode from the power saver  
timer mode when it receives data from the computer. You can also return the  
printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.  
Auto Reset  
Purpose:  
To automatically reset the settings for COPY, SCAN, or FAX to the defaults  
and return to the standby mode after you do not specify any settings for the  
specified time.  
Values:  
45sec*  
1min  
2min  
3min  
4min  
Fault Time-out  
Purpose:  
To specify the time taken by the printer before it cancels jobs that stop  
abnormally. The print job is cancelled if it times out.  
Options:  
Off  
Disables the fault time-out.  
On*  
60 sec*  
Specifies the time taken by the printer before it  
cancels for jobs that stop abnormally.  
3–300 sec  
Job Time-out  
Purpose:  
392  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
     
To specify the amount of time that the printer waits for data to arrive from  
the computer. The print job is cancelled if it times out.  
Options:  
Off  
On  
Disables the job time-out.  
30 sec*  
Specifies the amount of time that the printer waits for data to  
arrive from the computer.  
5–300 sec  
Date & Time  
Purpose:  
To set the date and time, and regional time zone of the printer.  
Values:  
Set Date  
Specifies the current date.  
Specifies the current time.  
Set Time  
*1  
Date Format  
YY/MM/DD  
MM/DD/YY  
DD/MM/YY  
12H  
Specifies the date format.  
Time Format  
Specifies the time format.  
24H  
Time Zone  
Specifies the time zone.  
*1  
The default for Date Format varies depending on country-specific factory  
default.  
Alert Tone  
Purpose:  
To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or  
when a warning message appears.  
Values:  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
393  
   
Panel Select Tone Off*  
Low  
Does not emit a tone when the operator panel  
input is correct.  
Emits a tone at the specified volume when the  
operator panel input is correct.  
Medium  
High  
Off*  
Panel Alert Tone  
Auto Clear Alert  
Does not emit a tone when the operator panel  
input is incorrect.  
Low  
Emits a tone at the specified volume when the  
operator panel input is incorrect.  
Medium  
High  
Off*  
Does not emit a tone before the printer performs  
auto clear.  
Low  
Emits a tone at the specified volume 5 seconds  
before the printer performs auto clear.  
Medium  
High  
Job Tone  
Off  
Does not emit a tone when a job is complete.  
Low  
Emits a tone at the specified volume when a job  
is complete.  
Medium*  
High  
Alert Tone  
Out of Paper  
Off  
Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs.  
Low  
Emits a tone at the specified volume when a  
problem occurs.  
Medium*  
High  
Off  
Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out  
of paper.  
Low  
Emits a tone at the specified volume when the  
printer runs out of paper.  
Medium*  
High  
394  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
All Tones  
Off  
Disables all the alert tones.  
Low  
Sets the volume of all the alert tones at once.  
Medium*  
High  
mm/inch  
Purpose:  
To specify the measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the  
operator panel.  
Values:  
Millimeters  
(mm)  
Specifies the default measurement unit.  
Inches (")  
NOTE: The default for mm/inch varies depending on country-specific factory  
default.  
Auto Log Print  
Purpose:  
To automatically print a job history report after every 20 jobs.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not automatically print a job history report.  
Automatically prints a job history report.  
NOTE: The job history report can also be printed using the Report List  
menu.  
NOTE: If more than 20 jobs are in the queue, the job history may be cleared.  
Low Toner Alert Msg  
Purpose:  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
395  
     
To specify whether to show the alert message when the toner is low.  
Values:  
Off  
Does not show the alert message when the toner is low.  
Shows the alert message when the toner is low.  
On*  
Power on Wizard  
Purpose:  
To perform initial setup for the printer.  
Values:  
Yes  
Performs the initial setup for the printer.  
Does not perform the initial setup for the printer.  
No*  
Maintenance  
Use the Maintenance menu to initialize NVM (non-volatile memory),  
configure the plain paper quality adjustment settings, and configure the  
security settings.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
F/W Version  
Purpose:  
To display the version of the controller.  
Service Tag  
Purpose:  
To display the service tag of the printer.  
Express Code  
Purpose:  
To display the express service code of the printer.  
396  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
         
Paper Density  
Purpose:  
To specify the paper density.  
Values:  
Plain  
Label  
Light  
Normal*  
Light  
Normal*  
Adjust BTR  
Purpose:  
To specify the optimum voltage settings for printing for the transfer roller  
(BTR). To lower the voltage, set negative values. To increase, set positive  
values.  
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. If you  
see mottles on the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white  
spots on the print output, try to decrease the voltage.  
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.  
Values:  
Plain  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
Plain Thick  
Covers  
Coated  
Label  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
397  
             
Recycled  
Envelope  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
Adjust Fuser  
Purpose:  
To specify the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fuser. To  
lower the temperature, set negative values. To increase, set positive values.  
The default settings may not give the best output on all paper types. When  
the printed paper has curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner  
does not fuse on the paper properly, try to increase the temperature.  
NOTE: The print quality changes depending on the values you select for this item.  
Values:  
Plain  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
Plain Thick  
Covers  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
Coated  
Label  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
0*  
Recycled  
Envelope  
-3 – +3  
0*  
-3 – +3  
398  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
               
Auto Regi Adjust  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to automatically adjust color registration.  
Values:  
Off  
Does not automatically adjust color registration.  
Automatically adjusts color registration.  
On*  
Adjust ColorRegi  
Purpose:  
To automatically adjust color registration.  
Color registration adjustment need to be made during the initial setup of the  
printer or when the printer is moved to a different location.  
NOTE: This item is available only when Auto Regi Adjust is set to Off.  
Clean Developer  
Purpose:  
To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge.  
Yes  
Stirs the toner in a new toner cartridge.  
No*  
Does not stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.  
Toner Refresh  
Purpose:  
To use up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its  
life, or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge.  
Yellow  
Yes  
Cleans the toner in the yellow toner cartridge.  
No*  
Does not clean the toner in the yellow toner  
cartridge.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
399  
       
Magenta  
Cyan  
Yes  
Cleans the toner in the magenta toner cartridge.  
No*  
Does not clean the toner in the magenta toner  
cartridge.  
Yes  
Cleans the toner in the cyan toner cartridge.  
No*  
Does not clean the toner in the cyan toner  
cartridge.  
Black  
Yes  
Cleans the toner in the black toner cartridge.  
No*  
Does not clean the toner in the black toner  
cartridge.  
BTR Refresh  
Purpose:  
Specify whether to execute counter measures for curling/separating discharge  
of the paper.  
Values:  
*
Off  
Does not automatically execute counter measures for  
curling/separating discharge of the paper.  
On  
Automatically executes counter measures for curling/separating  
discharge of the paper.  
Initialize NVM  
Purpose:  
To initialize NVM (non-volatile memory) for system parameters, Address  
Book data for fax, or Address Book data for e-mail. After executing this  
function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters or data are reset to  
their default values.  
Values:  
User Fax  
Section  
Yes  
Initializes the fax number entries in the Address  
Book.  
No*  
Does not initialize the fax number entries in the  
Address Book.  
400  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
   
User Scan  
Section  
Yes  
Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in  
the Address Book.  
No*  
Does not initialize the e-mail and server address  
entries in the Address Book.  
System Section Yes  
No*  
Initializes the system parameters.  
Does not initialize the system parameters.  
Non-Dell Toner  
Purpose:  
To use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.  
NOTE: Using non-Dell-brand toner cartridges may make some printer features  
unusable, reduce print quality and decrease the reliability of your printer. Dell  
recommends only new Dell-brand toner cartridges for your printer. Dell does not  
provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories, parts, or  
components not supplied by Dell.  
NOTE: Before you use toner cartridge of another manufacturer, be sure to restart  
the printer.  
Values:  
Off*  
On  
Does not use toner cartridge of another manufacturer.  
Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.  
Adjust Altitude  
Purpose:  
To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.  
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with  
barometric pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of  
the location where the printer is being used.  
NOTE: An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality,  
incorrect indication of remaining toner.  
Values:  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
401  
   
0m*  
Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.  
1000m  
2000m  
3000m  
Secure Settings  
Use the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the  
menus. This prevents items from being changed accidentally.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Panel Lock  
Purpose:  
To restrict access to Admin Menu with a password.  
For details see "Panel Lock Function" on page 405.  
NOTE: You can select Disable for Panel Lock Set when all items under Function  
Enabled are set to On and Secure Receive Set is set to Disable.  
Values:  
Panel Lock Set  
Disable*  
Enable  
Does not restrict access to Admin Menu with a  
password.  
Restricts access to Admin Menu with a password.  
Change Password 0000–9999 Sets or changes the password required to access  
Admin Menu.  
Function Enabled  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to enable each of the printer services or to require a  
password to use the services, and to set or change the password.  
NOTE: You can access to the items under Function Enabled only when  
Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.  
Values:  
402  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
       
Copy  
FAX  
On  
Off  
On  
Enables the Copy service.  
Disables the Copy service.  
Enables the Copy service with a black and white  
(Password) mode, but requires a password.  
On (Color Enables the Copy service with a color mode, but  
Password)  
requires a password.  
On  
Enables the Fax service.  
Off  
Disables the Fax service (the printer will not send  
or receive faxes).  
On  
Enables the Fax services, but requires a password  
(Password) to send faxes (does not require a password to  
receive incoming faxes).  
SCAN  
On  
Off  
Enables the Scan service.  
Disables the Scan service.  
On  
Enables the Scan service, but requires a password.  
(Password)  
USB-Print  
On*  
Off  
On  
Enables the USB-Print service.  
Disables the USB-Print service.  
Enables the USB-Print service with a black and  
(Password) white mode, but requires a password.  
On (Color Enables the USB-Print service with a color mode,  
Password)  
but requires a password.  
Change Password  
Sets or changes the password required to use the  
Copy, Scan, Fax, and USB-Print services.  
Secure Receive  
Purpose:  
To specify whether to require a password to print incoming faxes, and to set or  
change the password. When Secure Receive Set is set to Enable, the  
printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is  
entered on the operator panel.  
NOTE: You can access to the items under Secure Receive Set only  
when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
403  
 
Values:  
Secure Receive Set Disable*  
Enable  
Does not require a password to print incoming  
faxes.  
Requires a password to print incoming faxes.  
Change Password  
0000–9999 Sets or changes the password required to print  
incoming faxes.  
Scan to EMail  
Use the Scan to EMail menu to edit the transmission source.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
Edit From Field  
Disable  
Enable*  
Disables editing of the transmission source.  
Enables editing of the transmission source.  
USB Settings  
Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB  
port.  
NOTE: Values marked by an asterisk (*) are the factory default menu settings.  
USB Port  
Purpose:  
To enable or disable the USB interface. The change becomes effective after  
the printer is turned off and then on.  
Values:  
Enable*  
Disable  
Enables the USB interface.  
Disables the USB interface.  
404  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
       
Panel Language  
Purpose:  
To specify the language to be used on the operator panel.  
Values:  
English*  
Français  
Italiano  
Deutsch  
Español  
Dansk  
Nederlands  
Norsk  
Svenska  
Panel Lock Function  
This feature prevents unauthorized users from changing settings made by the  
administrator. However, you can select settings for individual print jobs using  
the printer driver.  
Enabling the Panel Lock  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Secure Settings is highlighted, and then  
button.  
5
6
Ensure that Panel Lock is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Ensure that Panel Lock Set is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
405  
         
7
Press the  
button.  
button until Enable is highlighted, and then press the  
NOTE: The factory-default panel password is 0000.  
NOTE: Be sure to remember the password. The procedure described below  
allows you to reset the password, but the settings for Address Book and  
Phone Book are cleared.  
•
Turn off the printer. Then, while holding the  
the printer.  
(Menu) button, turn on  
NOTE: If you change the password while Panel Lock is Enable, perform  
steps 1 to 5. Press the button until Change Password is highlighted, and  
then press the button. Enter the new password, and then press the  
button. This will change the password.  
Disabling the Panel Lock  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
4
5
Enter the password, and then press the  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Secure Settings is highlighted, and then  
button.  
6
7
Ensure that Panel Lock is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Ensure that Panel Lock Set is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
8
Press the  
button.  
button until Disable is highlighted, and then press the  
406  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
 
Resetting Defaults  
After executing this function and rebooting the printer, the menu parameters  
or data are reset to their default values.  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Press the  
the  
button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
press the  
button until Initialize NVM is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Press the  
the  
button until the desired setting is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until Yes is highlighted, and then press the  
The printer restarts automatically to apply the settings.  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
407  
   
408  
Understanding the Printer Menus  
21  
Understanding Your Printer  
Software (Windows Only)  
Use the Drivers and Utilities CD that shipped with your printer to install a  
combination of software programs, depending on your operating system.  
Printer Status Window  
The Printer Status window alerts you when there is a warning or when an  
error occurs, for example, when a paper jam occurs or toner is running low.  
By default, the Printer Status window launches only when an error occurs.  
When an error occurs, the error message appears on the Printer Status  
window. You can set the Printer Status window to always launch when  
printing in Printing Status Window Properties.  
You can also check the toner level of your printer.  
Status Monitor Console  
Use the Status Monitor Console to manage multiple instances of the Status  
Window for a particular printer.  
Select a printer from the list view (or Printer Selection) by clicking its name  
to open a Status Window for a particular printer.  
Dell Supplies Management System  
You can launch the Dell Supplies Management System dialog box from the  
All Programs menu or the desktop icon.  
You can order consumables by phone or from the web.  
1
Click Start  
Color Printer  
ï‚®
All Programs  
ï‚®
Dell Printers  
ï‚®
Dell 1355 Multifunction  
ï‚®
Dell Supplies Management System  
.
The Dell Supplies Management System window appears.  
2
3
Select your printer from the Select Printer Model list.  
If you are ordering from the web:  
a
Select a web address from the Select Reorder URL list.  
Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows Only)  
409  
                 
b
c
Click Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site.  
Dell 1355cn Color MFP - Dell Supplies Management System  
window appears.  
Enter the Service Tag, and then click OK  
.
If you order by phone, call the number that appears in the Order by Phone  
section.  
Software Update  
The firmware and/or driver updates can be downloaded from the Dell  
Support website located at support.dell.com.  
Quick Launch Utility  
Using the Quick Launch Utility window, you can open the Status Window,  
Tool Box, Updater, Troubleshooting, Address Book Editor, ScanButton  
Manager, and Dell ScanCenter.  
To use the Quick Launch Utility, select to install the Quick Launch Utility  
when you install the Dell software.  
To open the Quick Launch Utility window:  
1
Click Start  
Color Printer  
The Quick Launch Utility dialog box opens.  
ï‚®
All Programs  
ï‚®
Dell Printers  
ï‚®
Dell 1355 Multifunction  
ï‚®
Quick Launch Utility.  
410  
Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows Only)  
         
2
The Quick Launch Utility window provides seven buttons; Status  
Window Tool Box Updater Troubleshooting  
ScanButton Manager, and Dell ScanCenter.  
,
,
,
To exit, click the X button at the top-right of the window.  
For details, click the Help button of each application.  
Status Window  
Tool Box  
Click to open the Printing Status window. See "Printer  
Status Window" on page 409.  
Click to open the Tool Box. See "Understanding the Tool  
Box Menus" on page 323.  
Updater  
Click to update the Dell software and printer firmware.  
Troubleshooting  
Click to open the Troubleshooting Guide, which allows you  
to resolve issues by yourself.  
Address Book Editor  
Click to open the Address Book Editor, which allows you to  
create and edit Address Book entries.  
ScanButton Manager Click to open the ScanButton Manager, which allows you to  
specify how the ScanButton Manager behaves for scan  
events that the device generates.  
Dell ScanCenter  
Click to open the Dell ScanCenter.  
Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows Only)  
411  
Address Book Editor  
2
3
1
4
1
Read the Device Address Book entries from the printer to the Address Book  
Editor and read the PC Fax Address Book entries from the PC to the Address  
Book Editor.  
2
3
4
Allows you to edit a selected Address Book entry in the edit dialog box.  
Deletes a selected Address Book entry.  
Displays Address Book entries.  
NOTE: You must install the fax driver before reading or editing the Address Book  
entries.  
For more information about Address Book Editor, see the Help of Address  
Book Editor.  
412  
Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows Only)  
   
ScanButton Manager  
The Scan to Application stores the image files in the My Documents  
folder by default, and then you can open them using the related application.  
Use ScanButton Manager to change the output destination of the obtained  
image files and to select whether to open the image files using the related  
application.  
ScanDirect  
ScanDirect is a PaperPort application that enables you to scan items and send  
them directly to PaperPort or other programs on your computer without  
running the PaperPort program first. For more information about using  
ScanDirect, refer to PaperPort's Help menu.  
User Setup Disk Creating Tool  
The User Setup Disk Creating Tool program located in the MakeDisk folder  
of the Utilities folder on the Drivers and Utilities CD and the printer drivers  
located on the Drivers and Utilities CD are used to create driver installation  
Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows Only)  
413  
           
packages that contain custom driver settings. A driver installation package  
can contain a group of saved printer driver settings and other data for things  
such as:  
•
•
Print orientation and Multiple Up (document settings)  
Watermarks  
If you want to install the printer driver with the same settings on multiple  
computers running on the same operating system, create a setup disk in a  
floppy disk or in a server on the network. Using the setup disk that you have  
created will reduce the amount of work required when installing the printer  
driver.  
•
Install the Dellâ„¢ 1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer driver in the  
computer on which the setup disk is to be created.  
•
The setup disk can only be used on the operating system on which the disk  
was created or computers running the same operating system. Create a  
separate setup disk for each of the operating systems.  
414  
Understanding Your Printer Software (Windows Only)  
22  
Understanding Printer Messages  
The printer operator panel displays messages describing the current state of  
the printer and indicates possible printer problems you must resolve. This  
chapter describes messages, their meanings, and how to clear the messages.  
NOTICE: When an error code is displayed, the print data remaining on the printer  
and the information accumulated in the memory of the printer are not secured.  
*1  
1
3
5
7
9
Data LED  
buttons  
2
Ready / Error LED  
buttons  
4
button  
6
(Cancel) button  
(Back) button  
(Backspace) button  
(Menu) button  
(Start) button  
8
AC (All Clear) button  
10  
12  
11 LCD Panel  
*1  
The Error LED is on the right and blinks when an error occurs.  
Understanding Printer Messages  
415  
                   
Error-Code  
001-360  
003-340  
003-356  
005-121  
What you can do  
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,  
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.  
Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the  
ADF" on page 461.  
005-301  
006-370  
007-340  
007-371  
009-360  
009-361  
009-362  
009-363  
009-654  
010-354  
010-377  
016-315  
016-317  
016-338  
016-344  
016-347  
016-354  
016-355  
016-370  
016-372  
016-374  
016-375  
016-376  
016-377  
Close the ADF cover.  
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,  
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.  
Re-install the specified toner cartridge. See "Installing a Toner  
Cartridge" on page 442.  
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,  
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.  
416  
Understanding Printer Messages  
Error-Code  
016-393  
016-395  
016-503  
What you can do  
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,  
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.  
Press the  
correctly.  
button. Check if SMTP server and DNS server are set  
016-504  
016-507  
Press the  
button. Check if user name and password for POP3  
server and DNS server are set correctly.  
Press the  
button. Check if user name and password used for  
SMTP server are set correctly.  
016-700  
016-701  
016-720  
016-744  
016-745  
016-749  
Press the  
button to cancel the current print job.  
Press the  
button. Contact Dell if this message appears  
repeatedly. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.  
Press the  
Press the  
button to cancel the current print job.  
016-764  
016-766  
016-767  
button. Contact SMTP server administrator.  
Press the  
Press the  
button. Check e-mail address, and try scanning again.  
button to clear the message.  
016-794  
016-795  
016-797  
016-920  
Press the  
button. Execute the operation again according to the  
operation procedure.  
016-981  
Press the  
016-985  
017-970  
017-980  
017-981  
017-988  
024-914  
Press the  
setting or changing the file format of the scanned image.  
Press the button to clear the message.  
Load the specified paper. See "Loading Print Media in the  
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 202 or "Loading Print Media  
in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211.  
Understanding Printer Messages  
417  
Error-Code  
What you can do  
024-969  
Load the appropriate paper. See "Loading Print Media in the  
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 202 or "Loading Print Media  
in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211.  
026-720  
026-721  
026-722  
026-723  
026-750  
026-751  
026-752  
027-446  
027-452  
031-521  
Press the  
button to clear the message.  
Change IP address to avoid duplication. Turn off the printer, and  
turn it on again.  
Press the  
system administrator.  
button. Confirm login-able computer with your  
031-526  
Press the  
button. Check DNS connection, or check if  
forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.  
031-529  
031-530  
Press the  
button. Check if password is correct.  
Press the  
button. Check if storage location is correct. Storage  
location you specified is DFS setting, and check if it is linked to  
other server. Specify directly linked server, share name, and storage  
location.  
031-533  
031-534  
Press the  
button. Check the following:  
• If the file name you specified is not used by other users.  
• If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified  
already exists.  
031-535  
031-536  
031-537  
Press the  
storage location you specified.  
button. Check if other user is not operating file in  
Press the  
Press the  
button. Check if storage location has free space.  
031-555  
031-556  
031-557  
button to clear the message.  
Press the  
button. Change the file name that already exists on  
FTP server.  
418  
Understanding Printer Messages  
Error-Code  
031-558  
031-571  
031-574  
What you can do  
Press the  
button to clear the message.  
Press the  
button. Check DNS connection, or check if name of  
forwarding destination server is registered with DNS.  
Press the button. Set DNS address, or set forwarding  
destination server address as IP address.  
031-575  
031-576  
Press the  
button. Check if the printer communicates with  
forwarding destination FTP server. For example, check connection of  
network cable and if the IP address of the server is correct.  
031-578  
Press the  
password are correct.  
button. Check if login name (user name) and  
031-579  
031-582  
Press the  
Press the  
button. Check if storage location is correct.  
button. Check if the file name you specified can be  
created in storage location. Check if storage location has free space.  
031-584  
Press the button. Check if the folder name you specified can be  
created in storage location. Check if the folder that has the same  
name as the one you specified already exists.  
031-585  
031-587  
031-588  
Press the  
button. Check server access rights.  
Press the  
Press the  
Press the  
button. Check if storage location has free space.  
button to clear the message.  
031-589  
031-594  
button. Execute the operation again according to the  
operation procedure. Contact Dell if this message appears  
repeatedly. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.  
031-598  
Press the  
button. Check append access right to the file and if  
server supports FTP append command.  
033-503  
033-513  
Press the  
Press the  
button to clear the message.  
button. Print the received fax, or wait for a while until  
sending a fax is completed.  
033-517  
033-518  
Press the  
Press the  
button. Check if password is correct.  
button. Check if your country code is set correctly.  
Understanding Printer Messages  
419  
Error-Code  
033-519  
033-787  
033-788  
What you can do  
Press the  
button to clear the message.  
Press the  
button. Remove the received fax, or wait for a while  
until sending a fax is completed. Press the  
message.  
button to clear the  
034-700  
034-701  
034-702  
034-703  
034-704  
034-705  
034-706  
034-707  
034-708  
034-709  
034-710  
034-711  
034-712  
034-713  
034-714  
034-715  
034-716  
034-717  
034-718  
034-719  
034-720  
034-721  
034-722  
034-723  
034-724  
Press the  
button to clear the message. Check that the phone  
line is connected properly. See "Connecting the Telephone Line" on  
page 48.  
420  
Understanding Printer Messages  
Error-Code  
034-725  
034-726  
034-727  
034-750  
034-751  
034-752  
034-753  
034-754  
034-755  
034-756  
034-757  
034-758  
034-759  
034-760  
034-761  
034-762  
034-763  
034-764  
034-765  
034-766  
034-767  
034-768  
062-321  
What you can do  
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,  
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.  
062-790  
075-100  
Press the  
button.  
Check and clear the paper path, load the specified paper, and then  
press the button. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of  
the Printer" on page 465.  
075-921  
Load paper for the second side (odd) pages, and press the  
button. See Figure "Manual Duplex Printing (Windows Printer  
Driver Only)" on page 218.  
Understanding Printer Messages  
421  
Error-Code  
077-100  
077-101  
077-102  
What you can do  
Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Jams" on page 459.  
Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the  
Back of the Printer" on page 467.  
077-104  
077-105  
077-300  
077-900  
Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Jams" on page 459.  
Close the rear cover.  
Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Paper Jams From the  
Output Tray" on page 470.  
077-901  
091-402  
Check and clear the paper path. See "Clearing Jams" on page 459.  
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,  
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.  
092-310  
Clean the CTD sensor. See "Cleaning the Color Toner Density  
(CTD) Sensor" on page 448.  
093-423  
093-424  
093-425  
093-426  
093-919  
093-920  
093-921  
093-922  
093-930  
093-931  
093-932  
093-933  
093-960  
093-961  
093-962  
093-963  
Replace the specified toner cartridge soon. Order a new consumable  
See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 441.  
Re-install or replace the specified toner cartridge. See "Replacing  
Toner Cartridges" on page 441.  
Order a new consumable from www.dell.com/supplies.  
See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 441.  
a new consumable from www.dell.com/supplies.  
See "Replacing Toner Cartridges" on page 441.  
422  
Understanding Printer Messages  
Error-Code  
093-970  
093-971  
093-972  
093-973  
117-331  
117-332  
117-333  
117-334  
117-340  
117-342  
117-343  
117-344  
117-346  
117-348  
117-349  
117-350  
117-351  
117-366  
124-333  
134-211  
191-310  
193-700  
What you can do  
Re-install the specified toner cartridge. See "Installing a Toner  
Cartridge" on page 442.  
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,  
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.  
Turn off the printer, and then on. If this does not solve the problem,  
contact Dell. See "Contacting Dell" on page 504.  
This message indicates the printer is in the non-Dell toner mode.  
Understanding Printer Messages  
423  
424  
Understanding Printer Messages  
23  
Printing with Web Services on  
Devices (WSD)  
This section provides information for network printing with WSD, the new  
Windows Vista®, Windows Server® 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, and  
Windows® 7 protocol of Microsoft®.  
Adding Roles of Print Services  
When you use Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2, you need  
to add the roles of print services to the Windows Server 2008 or Windows  
Server 2008 R2 client.  
For Windows Server 2008:  
1
2
3
Click Start  
Select Add Roles from the Action menu.  
Check the Print Services check box on the Server Roles window in the  
Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next  
Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next  
Click Install  
ï‚®
Administrative Tools  
ï‚®
Server Manager  
.
.
4
5
.
.
For Windows Server 2008 R2:  
1
2
3
Click Start  
Select Add Roles from the Action menu.  
Check the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles  
window in the Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next  
Click Next  
Check the Print Server check box, and then click Next  
Click Install  
ï‚®
Administrative Tools  
ï‚®
Server Manager  
.
.
4
5
6
.
.
.
Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD)  
425  
     
Printer Setup  
You can install your new printer on the network using the Drivers and Utilities  
CD that shipped with your printer, or using Microsoft's Windows Add Printer  
wizard.  
Installing a Printer Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard  
1
Click Start  
ï‚®
Control Panel  
ï‚®
Hardware and Sound  
ï‚®
Printers (Startï‚®  
Devices and Printers for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).  
2
3
4
Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard.  
Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer  
In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then  
click Next  
.
.
NOTE: In the list of available printers, the WSD printer is displayed in the form  
of http://IP address/ws/.  
NOTE: If no WSD printer is displayed in the list, enter the printer's IP address  
manually to create a WSD printer. To enter the printer's IP address manually,  
follow the instructions below. For Windows Server 2008 R2, to create a WSD  
printer, you must be a member of Administrators group.  
1. Click The printer that I want isn't listed.  
2. Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and click Next.  
3. Select Web Services Device from Device type.  
4. Enter the printer's IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box and  
click Next.  
NOTE: Before installing the driver using the Add Printer? wizard on Windows  
Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7, perform one of the followings:  
•
Establish the Internet connection so that Windows Update can scan your  
computer.  
•
Add the printer driver to your computer in advance.  
5
If prompted, install the printer driver on your computer. If you are  
prompted for an administrator password or confirmation, type the  
password or provide confirmation.  
6
7
Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click Finish.  
Print a test page to verify print installation.  
426  
Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD)  
   
a
b
Click Start  
ï‚®
Control Panel  
ï‚®
Hardware and Sound  
ï‚®
Printers  
(
Start Devices and Printers for Windows Server 2008 R2 and  
ï‚®
Windows 7).  
Right-click the printer you just created, and then click Properties  
(Printer properties for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7).  
On the Options tab, set each setting item, and then click Apply  
.
c
On the General tab, click Print Test Page. When a test page is printed  
successfully, installation is complete.  
Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD)  
427  
428  
Printing with Web Services on Devices (WSD)  
24  
Specifications  
Operating System Compatibility  
Your Dellâ„¢ 1355cn/1355cnw Multifunction Color Printer is compatible with  
®
®
®
Microsoft Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows Server  
2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows  
®
Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista , Windows Vista 64-bit Edition,  
®
Windows 7, and Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Mac OS X 10.4.11/10.5.6, 10.6.x  
or later.  
1
Dell technical phone support only supports factory-installed operating  
systems (Microsoft) for the first 30 days for free. See  
555&l=en&s=biz for more details. The customer will have to purchase  
technical support from the manufacturer of the operating system in order to  
get technical assistance beyond 30 days.  
2
If the customer has other operating systems and has purchased Gold  
Technical Support (for more information on Gold Technical Support, see  
us&cs=555&l=en&s=biz), the telephone support will be a "best effort"  
attempt to resolve the operating system issue. If the manufacturer needs to be  
contacted, the customer must pay an additional fee for that support. The only  
time that Dell pays for the third party support is when Dell is responsible for  
the issue. In the case of getting the printer installed and working, this is  
configuration and the customer would be responsible for paying.  
Power Supply  
Rated Voltage  
Frequency  
Current  
220-240 VAC  
50/60 Hz  
5.0 A  
110-127 VAC  
50/60 Hz  
11.0 A  
Specifications  
429  
           
Dimensions  
Height: 338 mm (13.31 inches) Width: 410 mm (16.14 inches) Depth: 379  
mm (14.92 inches)  
Weight (only the toner cartridges are included):  
•
•
1355cn: 14.8 kg (32.63 lb)  
1355cnw: 14.9 kg (32.85 lb)  
Memory  
Base memory  
128 MB  
Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation,  
Operating System, and Interface  
PDL/Emulations Host-based printing system  
OSes  
Microsoft Windows 7, Windows 7 64-bit Edition, Windows Vista,  
Windows Vista 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008, Windows  
Server 2008 64-bit Edition, Windows Server 2008 R2 64-bit  
Edition, Windows XP, Windows XP 64-bit Edition, Windows  
Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, Mac OS X  
Version 10.4.11, 10.5.8, and 10.6  
Interfaces  
Standard local:  
USB 2.0  
Standard network:  
10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet  
IEEE 802.11b/802.11g  
(Wireless)  
MIB Compatibility  
A Management Information Base (MIB) is a database containing information  
about network devices (such as adapters, bridges, routers, or computers). This  
information helps network administrators manage the network (analyze  
performance, traffic, errors, and so on). Dellâ„¢ 1355cn/1355cnw  
430  
Specifications  
                       
Multifunction Color Printer complies with standard industry MIB  
specifications, allowing the printer to be recognized and managed by various  
printer and network management software systems.  
Environment  
Operation  
Temperature  
10-32°C  
Relative humidity  
10-85% RH (no condensation)  
Print Quality Guarantee  
Temperature  
15-28°C  
Relative humidity  
20-70% RH (no condensation)  
Storage  
Temperature range  
-20-40°C  
Storage humidity range  
5-80% RH (no condensation)  
Altitude  
Operating  
Storage  
Up to 3,100 m (10,000 feet)  
70.9275 Kpa  
NOTE: For more information on adjusting the altitude, see "Adjust Altitude" on  
page 340.  
Cables  
Your interconnection cable must meet the following requirements:  
Specifications  
431  
                     
Connection type  
Connection specifications and symbols  
1
Ethernet  
10 Base-T/100 Base-TX  
2
3
USB  
USB 2.0  
Wall Jack Connector  
4
Phone Connector  
1
2
3
4
Copier Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Copy Resolution  
Optical: 600x600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch),  
ADF: 600x300 dots/25.4mm (1 inch)  
(Same for Color/Black&White)  
432  
Specifications  
             
Item  
Description  
Copy Speed  
Color 12 cpm or more, Black&White 15 cpm or more  
(When using the document glass to make sequential  
copies of a document with pages scanned one by one.)  
Color 2.87 cpm or more, Black&White 10.64 cpm or  
more (When using the ADF to make sequential copies  
of multiple documents.)  
Paper Size  
A4, A5, B5, Executive, Letter, Folio, Legal, Monarch,  
DL, C5, Envelope #10  
Zoom Rate  
Document glass: 25% - 400%, ADF: 25% - 400%  
1 - 99 pages  
Multiple copies  
Copy mode (=Original  
Type)  
Text, Text & Photo, Photo  
Scanning method  
Platen: Document-fixed flatbed scanning method  
ADF: Carriage-fixed, document-feeding scanning  
method (one side scanning)  
Scanner Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Compatibility  
Tool Without An Interesting Name (TWAIN),  
Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)  
Scan Resolution  
TWAIN: 75 x 75 to 4800 x 4800 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)  
WIA: 75/100/150/200/300/400/600 dots/25.4 mm  
(1 inch)  
Resolutions other than the following are achieved by  
driver's resolution conversion:  
200 x 200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)  
300 x 300 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch) (Default)  
600 x 600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)  
1200 x 1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)  
24 bit (WIA, TWAIN)  
Color bit depth  
Mono bit depth  
1 bit for Line art and 8 bit for Gray scale  
Specifications  
433  
 
Item  
Description  
Effective scanning length  
Document glass: 297 mm (11.69 inches),  
ADF: 355.6 mm (14 inches)  
Effective scanning width  
Scan speed (Text mode)  
215.9 mm (8.5 inches)  
Black&White:  
641.22 μsec/line (600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)),  
1265.19 μsec/line (1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch))  
Color:  
2176.52 μsec/line (600 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch)),  
4363.36 μsec/line (1200 dots/25.4 mm (1 inch))  
Facsimile Specifications  
Item  
Description  
Compatibility  
Applicable line  
Data coding  
ITU-T Group 3  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)  
Black&White: 1bit, JBIG, MMR, MR, MH encoding  
Color: Not supported  
Max modem speed  
Transmission speed  
33.6 Kbps  
Approx. 3 seconds/page *Transmission time applies to  
memory transmission of text data scanned in Standard  
resolution with ECM using only ITU-T No.1 Chart.  
Scanning speed  
Document glass: approx. 3 seconds/A4 (at standard fax  
resolution mode) ADF: approx. 5 seconds/Letter (at  
standard fax resolution mode), 7.5 seconds/Letter (at  
fine fax resolution mode)  
Maximum document length Document glass: 297 mm (11.69 inches),  
ADF: 355.6 mm (14 inches)  
Paper size  
Letter, A4, Legal  
434  
Specifications  
 
Item  
Description  
Resolution  
Standard: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 3.85 lines/mm  
(98 lines/inch)  
200 dpi x 100 dpi  
Fine: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 7.7 lines/mm (196  
lines/inch)  
200 dpi x 200 dpi  
Super Fine: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch) x 15.4 lines/mm  
(391 lines/inch)  
200 dpi x 400 dpi  
Ultra Fine: 16 pels/mm (406 pels/inch) x 15.4  
lines/mm (391 lines/inch)  
400 dpi x 400 dpi  
User Memory  
Halftone  
2 MB  
256 levels  
Specifications  
435  
436  
Specifications  
Maintaining Your Printer  
437  
 
438  
25  
Maintaining Your Printer  
Periodically, your printer requires you to complete certain tasks to maintain  
optimum print quality. If several people are using the printer, you may want to  
designate a key operator to maintain your printer. Refer printing problems  
and maintenance tasks to this key operator.  
Determining the Status of Supplies  
If your printer is connected to the network, the Dellâ„¢ Printer Configuration  
Web Tool can provide instant feedback on remaining toner levels. Type the  
printer's IP address in your web browser to view this information. To use the  
E-Mail Alert Setup feature that notifies you when the printer requires new  
supplies, type your name or the name of the key operator in the e-mail list  
box.  
On the operator panel, you can also confirm the following:  
•
Any supply or maintenance items that require attention replacing  
(However, the printer can only display information about one item at a  
time.)  
•
Amount of toner remaining in each toner cartridge  
Conserving Supplies  
You can change several settings in your printer driver to conserve toner  
cartridge and paper.  
Supply  
Setting  
Function  
Toner  
Toner Saving Mode in  
This check box allows the users to select a  
cartridge the Graphics tab of the print mode that uses less toner. When this  
printer driver  
feature is used, the image quality will be lower  
than when it is not used.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
439  
             
Supply  
Setting  
Function  
Print  
media  
Multiple Up in the  
Layout tab of the printer side of a sheet. The available numbers that  
The printer prints two or more pages on one  
driver  
each printer driver can print one sheet of paper  
are as follows:  
• Windows Printer Driver: 2, 4, 8, or 16 pages  
• Macintosh Printer Driver: 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16  
pages  
Combined with the duplex setting, Multiple  
Up allows you to print up to 32 pages on one  
sheet of paper. (16 images on the front and 16  
on the back)  
Storing Print Media  
To avoid potential paper feeding problems and uneven print quality, there are  
several things you can do.  
•
To achieve the best possible print quality, store print media in an  
environment where the temperature is approximately 21°C (70°F) and the  
relative humidity is 40%.  
•
•
•
Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the  
floor.  
If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton,  
ensure that they rest on a flat surface so the edges do not buckle or curl.  
Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.  
Storing Consumables  
Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them. Do  
not store consumables in:  
•
•
•
•
•
Temperatures greater than 40°C (104°F).  
An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.  
Direct sunlight.  
Dusty places.  
A car for a long period of time.  
440  
Maintaining Your Printer  
           
•
•
An environment where corrosive gases are present.  
An environment with salty air.  
Replacing Toner Cartridges  
CAUTION: Before replacing toner cartridges, read and follow the safety  
instructions in your Product Information Guide.  
Dell toner cartridges are available only through Dell. You can order more  
cartridges online at http://www.dell.com/supplies or by phone. To order by  
phone, see "Contacting Dell" on page 504.  
It is recommended that you use Dell toner cartridges for your printer. Dell  
does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using accessories,  
parts, or components not supplied by Dell.  
CAUTION: Never throw used toner cartridges into fire. The residual toner could  
explode resulting in burns and injuries.  
CAUTION: Do not shake the used toner cartridge to avoid spilling of toner.  
Removing the Toner Cartridges  
1
2
Turn off the printer.  
Open the toner access cover.  
3
Pinch the cartridge firmly as shown in the illustration.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
441  
       
CAUTION: Always pull the cartridge out slowly so you do not spill any toner.  
4
Pull the toner cartridge out.  
Installing a Toner Cartridge  
1
Unpack a new toner cartridge of the desired color and shake it five to six  
times to distribute the toner evenly.  
442  
Maintaining Your Printer  
     
NOTE: Ensure that the color of the new toner cartridge matches that on the  
handle before replacing it.  
NOTE: Handle the toner cartridge carefully to avoid spillage of the toner.  
2
Remove the tape from the toner cartridge.  
3
Adjust the toner cartridge to the associated cartridge holder, and then  
insert it firmly by pressing near the center of the label until the cartridge  
clicks.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
443  
4
Close the toner access cover.  
Cleaning Inside the Printer  
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect  
the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.  
1
Confirm that the printer is not in operation, and open the toner access  
cover.  
444  
Maintaining Your Printer  
   
2
Pinch the cartridge firmly as shown in the illustration.  
3
Pull the toner cartridge out.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
445  
4
5
Pull the other three cartridges out as well.  
Pull the cleaning rod out.  
6
Insert the cleaning rod fully into the hole beside the arrow on the printer  
until its tip reaches the interior of the printer as illustrated below, and then  
pull it out.  
446  
Maintaining Your Printer  
7
8
Repeat the same procedure for the other three holes.  
Return the cleaning rod to its original location.  
9
Replace the black cartridge by adjusting it to the associated cartridge  
holder, and then insert it firmly by pressing near the center of the label  
until the cartridge clicks.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
447  
10 Replace the other three cartridges as well.  
11 Close the toner access cover.  
Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor  
Clean the CTD sensor only when an alert for the CTD sensor is shown on the  
Status Monitor or operator panel.  
1
2
Ensure that the printer is turned off.  
Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.  
448  
Maintaining Your Printer  
     
3
Clean the CTD sensor inside the printer with a clean dry cotton swab.  
4
Close the rear cover.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
449  
Adjusting Color Registration  
This section describes how to adjust the color registration when you first  
install the printer or after moving it to a new location.  
Performing Auto Adjust  
Auto Adjust allows you to correct the color registration automatically.  
The Operator Panel  
1
2
Press the  
(Menu) button.  
Press the  
button.  
button until System is highlighted, and then press the  
3
4
5
6
7
Press the  
the  
button until Admin Menu is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
button until Maintenance is highlighted, and then press  
button.  
Press the  
the  
Press the  
press the  
button until Adjust ColorRegi is highlighted, and then  
button.  
Ensure that Auto Adjust is highlighted, and then press the  
button.  
Ensure that Are you sure? is highlighted, and then select Yes by  
pressing the  
button.  
450  
Maintaining Your Printer  
       
Auto adjust is performed.  
The Tool Box  
NOTE:  
1
Click Start  
Color Printer  
ï‚®
All Programs  
Tool Box  
ï‚®
Dell Printers  
ï‚®
Dell 1355 Multifunction  
ï‚®
.
NOTE: The Select Printer window is highlighted in this step, when multiple  
printer drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of  
Dell 1355 Multifunction Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.  
The Tool Box opens.  
2
3
Click the Printer Maintenance tab.  
Select Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page.  
The registration adjustment page is displayed.  
4
5
Uncheck the check box next to On  
Click the Start button next to Auto Correct  
The color registration is corrected automatically.  
.
.
Printing the Color Registration Chart  
The Tool Box  
NOTE:  
1
Click Start  
Color Printer  
ï‚®
All Programs  
ï‚®
Dell Printers  
ï‚®
Dell 1355 Multifunction  
ï‚®
Tool Box  
.
NOTE: The Select Printer dialog box opens in this step, when multiple printer  
drivers are installed on your computer. In this case, click the name of Dell 1355  
Multifunction Color Printer listed in Printer Name, and then click OK.  
The Tool Box opens.  
2
3
Click the Printer Maintenance tab.  
Select Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page.  
The registration adjustment page is displayed.  
4
5
Uncheck the check box next to On  
.
Click the Start button next to Print Color Regi Chart  
.
Maintaining Your Printer  
451  
   
The color registration chart is printed.  
Determining Values  
On the color registration chart printed, find the straightest lines where the  
two black lines and the colored line are most closely aligned for each color (Y,  
M, and C).  
If you find the straightest line, make a note of the value (-5 - +5) indicated by  
the straightest line for each color.  
When the value is 0 for each color, you do not need to adjust the color  
registration.  
When the value is not 0, enter the value according to the procedure in  
"Entering Values" on page 453.  
452  
Maintaining Your Printer  
   
Entering Values  
The Tool Box  
NOTE:  
Using the Tool Box, enter the values that you found in the color registration  
chart to make adjustments.  
1
2
Click Start  
Color Printer  
The Tool Box opens.  
ï‚®
All Programs  
ï‚®
Dell Printers  
ï‚®
Dell 1355 Multifunction  
ï‚®
Tool Box  
.
Click the Printer Maintenance tab.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
453  
   
3
Select Registration Adjustment from the list at the left side of the page.  
The registration adjustment page is displayed.  
4
5
Select the value with the straight line, and then click the Apply New  
Settings button.  
Click the Start button next to Print Color Regi Chart  
.
The color registration chart is printed with the new values.  
6
Adjust until all straight lines are at the value of 0. Show image of before  
and after adjustment will help.  
NOTICE: After printing the color registration chart, do not turn off the printer until  
the printer motor has stopped running.  
Cleaning the Scanner  
Keeping the scanner clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is  
recommended to clean the scanner at the start of each day and during the  
day, as needed.  
1
2
Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
Open the document cover.  
3
Wipe the surface of the document glass and ADF glass until it is clean and  
dry.  
454  
Maintaining Your Printer  
   
1
4
2
3
1
2
3
4
White Strip  
White Document Cover  
Document Glass  
ADF Glass  
4
Wipe the underside of the white document cover and white sheet until  
they are clean and dry.  
5
Close the document cover.  
Maintaining Your Printer  
455  
       
Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller  
Keeping the ADF feed roller clean helps ensure the best possible copies. It is  
recommended to clean the ADF feed roller at regular intervals.  
1
Open the ADF cover.  
2
Wipe the ADF feed roller with a dry soft lint-free cloth or paper towel until  
it is clean.  
If the ADF feed roller gets soiled with ink stains, paper from the ADF may  
also be soiled. In this case, slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper  
towel with a neutral detergent or water, and then remove the  
contamination from the ADF feed roller until it is clean and dry.  
456  
Maintaining Your Printer  
 
Maintaining Your Printer  
457  
458  
Maintaining Your Printer  
Clearing Jams  
Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to  
avoid most jams. See "Print Media Guidelines" on page 189 for more  
information.  
you try a sample first.  
Avoiding Jams  
•
Use only recommended print media. See "Print Media Guidelines" on  
page 189 for more information.  
•
See "Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on page 202  
and "Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211  
to load print media properly.  
•
Do not overload the print media sources. Ensure that the stack print  
media height does not exceed the maximum height indicated by the load  
line labels in the tray.  
•
•
Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.  
Flex, fan, and straighten print media before you load it. If a jam occurs  
with print media, try feeding one sheet at a time through the single sheet  
feeder.  
•
•
Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed.  
Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media  
source.  
•
•
Ensure that the recommended print side is face up when you insert the  
print media. Also, the recommended print side should be face down when  
using the single sheet feeder.  
Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment. For more  
information, see "Storing Print Media" on page 196.  
•
•
Do not remove the feeding tray during a print job.  
Push the tray in firmly after loading.  
Clearing Jams  
459  
           
•
•
Ensure that all cables that connect to the printer are correctly attached.  
Overtightening the guides may cause jams.  
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams  
CAUTION: Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments. This may  
permanently damage the printer.  
The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print  
media path.  
3
1
2
4
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
Scanner Unit  
Fuser  
Fuser Release Lever  
Rear Cover  
460  
Clearing Jams  
           
5
6
7
ADF Cover  
Front Cover  
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)  
Clearing Paper Jams From the ADF  
When a document jams while it passes through the Automatic Document  
Feeder (ADF), remove jams in the following procedure.  
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow  
the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide.  
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect  
the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.  
CAUTION: To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The  
fuser becomes extremely hot during use.  
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print  
media from the print media path.  
1
Open the ADF cover.  
2
Remove the jammed document by carefully pulling it in the direction of  
the arrow shown in the following illustration.  
Clearing Jams  
461  
             
3
If you find it difficult to pull the document, open the document feeder  
tray.  
4
Remove the jammed document from the document output tray.  
462  
Clearing Jams  
5
Close the document feeder tray.  
6
Close the ADF cover, and then load the documents back into the ADF.  
Clearing Jams  
463  
NOTE: Ensure that you adjust the document guides before printing a Legal-  
size document.  
7
If you cannot remove the jammed document from the document output  
tray or cannot find any jammed document there, open the document  
output tray.  
8
Remove the document from the ADF feed roller or the feed area by  
carefully pulling the document in the direction of the arrow shown in the  
following illustration.  
464  
Clearing Jams  
Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer  
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow  
the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide.  
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print  
media from the print media path.  
1
Pull the PSI out.  
Clearing Jams  
465  
     
2
Remove any paper jammed from the front of the printer.  
3
Replace the PSI in the printer.  
466  
Clearing Jams  
Clearing Paper Jams From the Back of the Printer  
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow  
the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide.  
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect  
the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.  
CAUTION: To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The  
fuser becomes extremely hot during use.  
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print  
media from the print media path.  
1
Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.  
Clearing Jams  
467  
     
2
Lift up the fuser release levers.  
3
Remove any paper jammed from the back of the printer.  
468  
Clearing Jams  
4
Lower the fuser release levers to their original position.  
5
Close the rear cover.  
Clearing Jams  
469  
Clearing Paper Jams From the Output Tray  
CAUTION: Before performing any of the following procedures, read and follow  
the safety instructions in your Product Information Guide.  
CAUTION: To prevent electric shock, always turn off the printer and disconnect  
the power cable from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.  
CAUTION: To avoid burns, do not clear paper jams immediately after printing. The  
fuser becomes extremely hot during use.  
NOTE: To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print  
media from the print media path.  
1
Push the rear cover release handle and open the rear cover.  
470  
Clearing Jams  
     
2
Lift up the fuser release levers.  
3
Remove any paper jammed from the back of the printer. If no paper is  
found in the paper path, face the front of the printer and check the output  
tray.  
Clearing Jams  
471  
4
Lift and open the scanner unit.  
5
Remove any paper jammed out of the output tray.  
472  
Clearing Jams  
6
Lower and close the scanner unit.  
7
Lower the fuser release levers to their original position.  
Clearing Jams  
473  
8
Close the rear cover.  
474  
Clearing Jams  
Troubleshooting  
475  
 
476  
27  
Troubleshooting  
Basic Printer Problems  
Some printer problems can be easy to resolve. If a problem occurs with your  
printer, check each of the following:  
•
The power cable is connected to the printer, and to a properly grounded  
electrical outlet.  
•
•
•
•
The printer is turned on.  
The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker.  
Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.  
When your printer is connected to the network with the Ethernet cable,  
the USB cable is not connected between the printer and the computer.  
•
When your printer is connected to the computer with the USB cable, the  
Ethernet cable is not connected between the printer and the network.  
If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the  
printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then turn on the printer. This often fixes the  
problem.  
Display Problems  
Problem  
Action  
After the printer is turned  
on, the display on the  
• Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and turn on  
the printer.  
operator panel is blank, keeps  
showing the DELL logo, or  
the back light is not lit.  
• Self Test Message appears on the operator panel.  
When the test is completed, Ready is displayed.  
Troubleshooting  
477  
           
Problem  
Action  
Menu settings changed from Settings in the software program, the printer driver, or  
the operator panel have no  
effect.  
the printer utilities have precedence over the settings  
made on the operator panel.  
Change the menu settings from the printer driver, the  
printer utilities, or the software program instead of the  
operator panel.  
Printing Problems  
Problem  
Action  
Job did not print or incorrect Ensure that Ready appears on the operator panel  
characters printed.  
before you send a job to print.  
Ensure that print media is loaded in the printer.  
Verify that you are using the correct printer driver.  
Ensure that you are using the correct Ethernet or USB  
cable and that it is securely connected to the printer.  
Verify that the correct print media size is selected.  
If you are using a print spooler, verify that the spooler  
has not stalled.  
Check the interface of your printer from the Admin  
Menu.  
Determine the host interface you are using. Print a  
device settings page to verify that the current interface  
settings are correct. Refer to "Printing a System  
Settings Page" on page 232 for details on how to print  
a device settings page.  
478  
Troubleshooting  
   
Problem  
Action  
Print media misfeeds or  
multiple feeds occur  
Ensure that the print media you are using meets the  
specifications for your printer. See "Supported Paper  
Sizes" on page 196 for more information.  
Fan the print media before loading it.  
Ensure that the print media is loaded correctly.  
Ensure that the width and length guides are adjusted  
correctly.  
Ensure that the PSI is securely inserted.  
Do not overfill the print media sources.  
Do not force print media into the Priority Sheet  
Inserter (PSI) or the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)  
when you load it. Otherwise, it may skew or buckle.  
Ensure that the print media is not curled.  
Load the recommended print side correctly for the  
type of print media you are using. See "Loading Print  
Media" on page 201 for more information.  
Turn the print media over or around and try printing  
again to see if feeding improves.  
Do not mix print media types.  
Do not mix reams of print media.  
Remove the top and bottom curled sheets of a ream  
before loading the print media.  
Load a print media source only when it is empty.  
The envelope is creased after Ensure that the envelope is loaded as instructed in  
printing.  
"Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder  
(MPF)" on page 202 or "Loading Print Media in the  
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI)" on page 211.  
Page breaks in unexpected  
places.  
Increase the setting for Time-Out in the Printer  
Settings menu in the Dell Printer Configuration Web  
Tool.  
Print media does not stack  
neatly in the output bin.  
Turn the print media stack over in the PSI and MPF.  
Troubleshooting  
479  
Problem  
Action  
Printer does not duplex  
pages.  
Select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge from  
Print Quality Problems  
NOTE: In this section, some procedures that use the Tool Box can also be  
performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For  
information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Configuration Web Tool, see  
"Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 359 and "Dell Printer Configuration Web  
Tool" on page 123.  
The output is too light  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
The toner cartridges may be low or need to be The task is  
replaced. Confirm the amount of toner in each complete.  
toner cartridge.  
Go to action 2.  
1
Check the toner level in the Status tab in the  
Status Monitor.  
2
Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.  
Is the problem recovered?  
2
Verify that the print media is not damp and the The task is  
Go to action 3.  
correct print media is used. See "Supported  
Paper Sizes" on page 196. If not, use the print  
media recommended for the printer.  
complete.  
Is the problem recovered?  
480  
Troubleshooting  
     
Action  
Verify that the Paper Type setting in the printer The task is  
driver matches the print media you loaded. complete.  
Yes  
No  
3
Contact Dell.  
1
On the Paper/Output tab in Printing  
Preferences of the printer driver, check the  
Paper Type setting.  
2
Load dry (not damp) and corrected print  
media, and then click Print Test Page in  
Properties of the printer driver.  
Is the problem recovered?  
Toner smears or print comes off/Stain on back side  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
The print media surface may be uneven. Try  
The task is  
changing the Paper Type setting in the printer complete.  
driver. For example, change the plain paper to  
thick.  
Go to action 2.  
1
On the Paper/Output tab in Printing  
Preferences of the printer driver, change the  
Paper Type setting.  
Is the problem recovered?  
2
Verify that the correct print media is being  
The task is  
Go to action 3.  
used. See "Supported Paper Sizes" on page 196. complete.  
If not, use the print media recommended for  
the printer.  
Is the problem recovered?  
Troubleshooting  
481  
 
Action  
Adjust the fuser temperature.  
Yes  
No  
3
The task is  
complete.  
Contact Dell.  
1
Launch the Tool Box, and click Adjust Fuser  
on the Printer Maintenance tab.  
2
Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up  
the value for your printing media.  
3
4
Click Apply New Settings  
Click close box to exit Tool Box.  
.
Is the problem recovered?  
Random spots/Blurred images  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Ensure that the toner cartridges are installed  
correctly. See "Installing a Toner Cartridge" on  
page 442.  
The task is  
complete.  
Go to action 2.  
Is the problem recovered?  
2
If you use non-Dell brand toner cartridges,  
install Dell brand toner cartridges.  
The task is  
complete.  
Go to action 3.  
Is the problem recovered?  
482  
Troubleshooting  
 
Action  
Clean up the fuser unit.  
Yes  
No  
3
The task is  
complete.  
Contact Dell.  
1
Load one sheet of paper on the MPF, and then  
print a solid image all over paper.  
2
Load the printed sheet with the side to be  
printed on facing down, and then print a blank  
sheet of paper.  
Is the problem recovered?  
The entire output is blank  
If this trouble comes out, contact Dell.  
Streaks appear on the output  
If this trouble comes out, contact Dell.  
Troubleshooting  
483  
   
Pitched color dots  
If this trouble comes out, contact Dell.  
Vertical blanks  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Clean inside the printer and performing test  
print.  
The task is  
complete.  
Contact Dell.  
1
Clean inside the printer by using the cleaning  
rod. See "Cleaning Inside the Printer" on  
page 444.  
2
Click Print Test Page in Properties of the  
printer driver.  
Is the problem recovered?  
484  
Troubleshooting  
   
Ghosting  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Adjust the transfer bias.  
The task is  
complete.  
Go to action 2.  
1
Launch the Tool Box, and click Chart Print on  
the Diagnosis tab.  
2
Click the Ghost Configuration Chart button.  
The ghost configuration chart is printed.  
3
4
Launch the Tool Box, and click BTR Refresh  
Mode on the Printer Maintenance tab.  
Check the check box next to On, and then  
click Apply New Settings  
.
5
6
Click Chart Print on the Diagnosis tab.  
Click the Ghost Configuration Chart button.  
The ghost configuration chart is printed.  
Is the problem recovered?  
2
The print media surface may be uneven. Try  
The task is  
Go to action 3.  
changing the Paper Type setting in the printer complete.  
driver. For example, change the plain paper to  
thick.  
1
On the Paper/Output tab in Printing  
Preferences of the printer driver, change the  
Paper Type setting.  
Is the problem recovered?  
Troubleshooting  
485  
 
Action  
Yes  
No  
3
Adjust the fuser temperature.  
The task is  
complete.  
Go to action 4.  
1
Launch the Tool Box, and click Adjust Fuser  
on the Printer Maintenance tab.  
2
Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up  
the value for your printing media.  
3
4
Click Apply New Settings  
Click close box to exit Tool Box.  
.
Is the problem recovered?  
4
If you use non-recommended print media, use The task is  
the print media recommended for the printer. complete.  
Contact Dell.  
Is the problem recovered?  
Fog  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
2
Is the whole page printed light?  
Start Clean Developer.  
Contact Dell. Go to action 2.  
The task is  
complete.  
Contact Dell.  
1
Launch the Tool Box, and click Clean  
Developer on the Diagnosis tab.  
2
Click the Start button.  
Is the problem recovered?  
486  
Troubleshooting  
 
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO)  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
If the printer is installed in a high altitude  
location, set the altitude of the location.  
The task is  
complete.  
Contact Dell.  
1
Launch the Tool Box, and click Adjust  
Altitude on the Printer Maintenance tab.  
2
Select the value close to the altitude of the  
location where the printer is installed.  
Is the problem recovered?  
Auger mark  
Troubleshooting  
487  
   
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
The toner cartridges may be low or need to be The task is  
replaced. Confirm the amount of toner in each complete.  
toner cartridge.  
Contact Dell.  
1
Check the toner level in the Status tab in the  
Status Monitor.  
2
Replace the toner cartridges as necessary.  
Is the problem recovered?  
2
Start Clean Developer.  
The task is  
complete.  
Contact Dell.  
1
Launch the Tool Box, and click Clean  
Developer on the Diagnosis tab.  
2
Click the Start button.  
Is the problem recovered?  
Wrinkled/Stained paper  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Verify that the correct print media is being  
The task is  
If printing on  
an envelope, go  
to action 2.  
used. See "Supported Paper Sizes" on page 196 complete.  
and "Print Media Guidelines" on page 189. If  
not, use the print media recommended for the  
printer.  
If printing on  
print media  
other than  
Is the problem recovered?  
envelopes,  
contact Dell.  
488  
Troubleshooting  
 
Action  
Yes  
No  
2
Check the crease. Is the crease within 30 mm of This type of  
If the envelope  
is 220 mm or  
longer (C5 or  
Envelope#10),  
the four edges of the envelope?  
crease is  
considered  
normal. Your  
printer is not at go to action 3a.  
fault.  
If the envelope  
is shorter than  
220 mm  
(Monarch or  
DL), go to  
action 3b.  
3a Does the envelope have a flap on the long edge? The envelope is The envelope  
Envelope#10. is C5. Go to  
Go to 4b.  
action 4a.  
3b Load the envelope long edge feed in the MPF The task is  
Go to action  
4b.  
with the flap open and facing up. For details,  
see "When Loading Envelope#10, DL, or  
Monarch" on page 207.  
complete.  
Is the problem recovered?  
4a Load the envelope in the MPF with the flap  
open and facing up. For details, see "When  
Loading C5" on page 208.  
The task is  
complete.  
Contact Dell.  
Contact Dell.  
Is the problem recovered?  
4b Use a different size envelope.  
Is the problem recovered?  
The task is  
complete.  
The top margins is incorrect  
Troubleshooting  
489  
 
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Ensure that the margins are set correctly on the The task is  
Contact Dell.  
application being used.  
complete.  
Is the problem recovered?  
Color registration is out of alignment  
Action  
Yes  
1
Execute auto color registration adjustment.  
The task is  
complete.  
Go to action 2.  
1
Launch the Tool Box, and click Registration  
Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab.  
2
Click the Start button next to Auto Correct  
.
Is the problem recovered?  
Clean the CTD sensor.  
2
The task is  
complete.  
Go to action 3.  
1
Clean the CTD sensor. See "Cleaning the  
Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor" on  
page 448.  
2
3
Launch the Tool Box, and click Registration  
Adjustment on the Printer Maintenance tab.  
Click the Start button next to Auto Correct  
.
Is the problem recovered?  
490  
Troubleshooting  
 
Action  
Yes  
No  
3
Print the color registration chart and manually The task is  
Contact Dell.  
correct the color registration.  
complete.  
1
Click Registration Adjustment on the Printer  
Maintenance tab.  
2
Click the Start button next to Print Color  
Regi Chart  
.
The color registration chart is printed.  
3
Adjust till all straight lines are at the value of  
0. See "Adjusting Color Registration" on  
page 450 for details.  
4
5
Click the Apply New Settings button.  
Click the Start button next to Print Color  
Regi Chart to print the color registration chart  
again.  
Is the problem recovered?  
Protrudent / Bumpy paper  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Clean up the fuser unit.  
The task is  
complete.  
Contact Dell.  
1
Load one sheet of paper on the MPF, and then  
print a solid image all over paper.  
2
Load the printed sheet with the side to be  
printed on facing down, and then print a blank  
sheet of paper.  
Is the problem recovered?  
Troubleshooting  
491  
 
Jam  
NOTE: In this section, some procedures that use the Tool Box can also be  
performed using the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For  
information on how to use the operator panel and Dell Configuration Web Tool, see  
"Understanding the Printer Menus" on page 359 and "Dell Printer Configuration Web  
Tool" on page 123.  
Misfeed jam  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Remove the paper from the PSI, and then  
The task is  
ensure that papers are properly inserted on the complete.  
MPF.  
Proceed to the  
action  
corresponding  
to the type of  
the print media  
being used:  
Is the problem recovered?  
• Thick - 2a  
• Thin - 2b  
• Envelope -  
2c  
If performing  
manual duplex  
printing, go to  
action 2d.  
If using paper  
other than the  
above or if not  
performing  
duplex  
printing, go to  
action 2e.  
2a Use thick paper that is 216 gsm or less.  
The task is  
complete.  
Go to action  
3a.  
Is the problem recovered?  
2b Use thin paper that is 60 gsm or more.  
Is the problem recovered?  
The task is  
complete.  
Go to action  
3a.  
492  
Troubleshooting  
       
Action  
Yes  
No  
2c Ensure that the envelope is properly loaded in The task is  
the MPF as instructed in "Loading an Envelope complete.  
in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)" on  
page 207.  
Go to action  
3b.  
Is the problem recovered?  
2d Ensure that the print media is not curled.  
Is the problem recovered?  
The task is  
complete.  
Go to action  
3a.  
2e Is the print media damp?  
Go to action  
3c.  
Go to action  
3a.  
3a Fan the print media.  
Is the problem recovered?  
The task is  
complete.  
Go to action  
3b.  
3b If the envelope is deformed, correct it or use  
another envelope.  
The task is  
complete.  
Go to action  
3a.  
Is the problem recovered?  
3c Turn over the print media.  
Is the problem recovered?  
The task is  
complete.  
Go to action 4.  
Contact Dell.  
4
Use print media that is not damp.  
Is the problem recovered?  
The task is  
complete.  
Multi-feed jam  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Remove the paper from the PSI, and then  
ensure that papers are inserted properly in the complete.  
MPF.  
The task is  
Go to action 2.  
Is the problem recovered?  
2
Is the print media damp?  
Go to action  
3a.  
Go to action  
3b.  
3a Use print media that is not damp.  
Is the problem recovered?  
The task is  
complete.  
Go to action  
3b.  
Troubleshooting  
493  
 
Action  
Yes  
No  
3b Fan the print media.  
Is the problem recovered?  
The task is  
Contact Dell.  
A document jam occurs in the ADF if scanning of multiple-sheet document  
is cancelled while scanning is in progress.  
Action  
Yes  
No  
1
Clear the jam. See "Clearing Paper Jams From The task is  
Contact Dell.  
the ADF" on page 461.  
complete.  
Is the problem recovered?  
Copy Problem  
Problem  
Action  
A document loaded in the  
ADF cannot be copied.  
Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.  
Fax Problems  
Problem  
Action  
The printer is not working,  
there is no display and the  
buttons are not working.  
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.  
Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle.  
No dial tone sounds.  
Check that the phone line is connected properly. See  
"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 48.  
Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by  
plugging in another phone.  
494  
Troubleshooting  
       
Problem  
Action  
The numbers stored in the  
Ensure that the numbers are stored in the memory  
memory do not dial correctly. correctly.  
Print a Address Book list.  
The document does not feed Ensure that the document is not wrinkled and you are  
into the printer.  
putting it in correctly. Check that the document is of  
the right size, not too thick or thin.  
Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed.  
The FAX mode should be selected.  
Faxes are not received  
automatically.  
Ensure that there is paper in the PSI or MPF.  
Check to see if the display shows Memory Full.  
Sending should show up on the display.  
The printer does not send  
faxes.  
Check the other fax machine you are sending to, to see  
if it can receive your fax.  
The incoming fax has blank The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.  
spaces or is received in poor-  
quality.  
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.  
Check your printer by making a copy.  
The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace the toner  
cartridge. For details, see "Replacing Toner Cartridges"  
on page 441.  
Some of the words on an  
The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary  
incoming fax are stretched. document jam.  
There are lines on the  
documents you send.  
Check your scan glass for marks and clean it. See  
"Cleaning the Scanner" on page 454.  
The printer dials a number, The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper,  
but the connection with  
another fax machine fails.  
or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other  
machine operator and ask her/him to sort out the  
problem.  
Documents are not stored in There may not be enough memory to store the  
the memory.  
document. If the display shows a Memory Full  
message, delete any documents you no longer need  
from the memory and then restore the document, or  
wait for the job in progress (e.g., a fax transmission or  
reception) to complete.  
Troubleshooting  
495  
Problem  
Action  
Blank areas appear at the  
bottom of each page or on  
other pages, with a small  
strip of text at the top.  
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the  
user option setting. See "Print Media Guidelines" on  
page 189.  
The printer will not send or Ensure that the country code is set correctly under  
receive faxes.  
(Menu) ï‚® System ï‚®Admin Menu ï‚® Fax  
Settings ï‚® Country.  
Check that the phone line is connected properly. See  
"Connecting the Telephone Line" on page 48.  
An error often occurs during Reduce the modem speed under  
(Menu) ï‚®  
a fax transmission or  
reception.  
System ï‚® Admin Menu ï‚® Fax Settings ï‚®  
Modem Speed.  
Scanning Problems  
Problem  
Action  
The scanner does not work. Ensure that you place the document to be scanned  
face down from the document feeder glass, or face up  
in the ADF.  
There may not be enough available memory to hold  
the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan  
function to see if that works. Try lowering the scan  
resolution rate.  
Check that the USB cable is connected properly.  
Ensure that the USB cable is not defective. Switch the  
cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace the  
cable.  
Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check  
the application you want to use to make certain that  
the scanner job is being sent to the correct port.  
496  
Troubleshooting  
   
Problem  
Action  
The printer scans very slowly. Graphics are scanned more slowly than text when  
using the Scan to E-mail or Scan to Network feature.  
Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode  
because of the large amount of memory required to  
analyze and reproduce the scanned image.  
Scanning images at a high resolution takes more time  
than scanning at a low resolution.  
Document misfeeds or  
Ensure that the document’s paper type meets the  
multiple feeds occur in the specifications for the printer. See "Supported Paper  
Automatic Document Feeder Types" on page 198 for more information.  
(ADF).  
Check whether the document is properly loaded in the  
ADF.  
Ensure that the document guides are adjusted  
properly.  
Ensure that the number of document sheets do not  
exceed the maximum capacity of the ADF.  
Ensure that the document is not curled.  
Fan the document well before loading it in the ADF.  
Vertical stripes appear on the Clean the ADF glass.  
output when scanned using  
the ADF.  
See "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 454.  
A smear appears at the same Clean the document glass.  
location on the output when  
scanned using the document  
glass.  
See "Cleaning the Scanner" on page 454.  
Images are skewed.  
Ensure that the document is loaded straight in the  
ADF or on the document glass.  
Diagonal lines appear jagged If the document uses thick media, try scanning it from  
when scanned using the  
ADF.  
the document glass.  
Troubleshooting  
497  
Problem  
Action  
The printer does not properly Check if the following settings have been set correctly  
transfer scan data to a  
specified destination via the  
Scan to E-mail or Scan to  
Network feature.  
on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.  
Scan to Network  
Check the following settings under Address Book ï‚®  
Server Address:  
• Server Address  
• Share Name  
• Server Path  
• Login Name  
• Login Password  
Scan to E-mail  
Check the following setting under Address Book ï‚®  
Fax/E-Mail:  
• E-Mail Address  
Cannot scan using WIA on a Enable WIA on the computer.  
Windows Server 2003  
computer.  
To enable WIA:  
1
2
Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then  
click Services  
Right-click Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), and  
then click Start  
.
.
Cannot scan using TWAIN Install the Desktop Experience feature on the  
or WIA on a Windows Server computer.  
2008 or Windows Server  
2008 R2 computer.  
To install Desktop Experience:  
1
Click Start, point to Administrative Tools, and then  
click Server Manager  
Under Features Summary, click Add Features  
Select the Desktop Experience check box, click Next  
and then click Install  
Restart the computer.  
.
2
3
.
,
.
4
498  
Troubleshooting  
Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems  
Problem  
Action  
Unable to retrieve the  
Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly  
Address Book data from the connected with the USB cable.  
printer on the Address Book  
Editor.  
Ensure that the printer’s power is on.  
Ensure that the printer driver is installed on your  
computer. (The Address Book Editor retrieves the  
Address Book data via the printer driver.)  
The TWAIN driver cannot  
connect to the printer.  
Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly  
connected with the USB cable.  
Check whether the printer is on. If the printer is on,  
reboot it by turning the power switch off and then on  
again.  
If a scan application is running, close the application  
once, restart the application, and then try scanning  
again.  
The scanner driver has not  
been registered on your  
computer and cannot be  
accessed from ScanButton  
Manager.  
Install the scanner driver. If the driver is installed,  
uninstall it and then reinstall it.  
Failed to scan your  
Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly  
document on the printer via connected with the USB cable.  
ScanButton Manager.  
Check whether the printer is on. If the printer is on,  
reboot it by turning the power switch off and then on  
again.  
If a scan application is running, close the application  
once, restart the application, and then try scanning  
again.  
Failed to create an image file Ensure that there is sufficient space in your hard disk.  
via ScanButton Manager.  
Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and  
then reinstall it.  
Failed to initialize  
ScanButton Manager.  
Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and  
then reinstall it.  
Troubleshooting  
499  
   
Problem  
Action  
Failed to execute ScanButton Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and  
Manager.  
then reinstall it.  
An unexpected error  
occurred on ScanButton  
Manager.  
Uninstall ScanButton Manager on your computer and  
then reinstall it.  
Other Problems  
Problem  
Action  
Condensation has occurred This usually occurs within several hours after you heat  
inside the printer.  
the room in winter. This also occurs when the printer is  
operating in a location where relative humidity reaches  
85% or more. Adjust the humidity or relocate the  
printer to an appropriate environment.  
No file is displayed on the  
Confirm that there are files with the supported file  
operator panel when you are formats (PDF, TIFF, or JPEG) in the USB storage  
selecting a file for Printing  
from USB Memory feature.  
device.  
If the target file is in a deep hierarchy in the USB  
storage device, move the file to the root directory in  
the USB storage device with your computer.  
Shorten the target file name in the USB storage device  
with your computer, and try printing again.  
Contacting Service  
When you call for printer service, be prepared to describe the problem you are  
experiencing or the error message on the display.  
You need to know the model of your printer and serial number. See the label  
located inside the side door of your printer.  
500  
Troubleshooting  
     
Appendix  
501  
 
502  
B
Appendix  
Dell Technical Support Policy  
Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and  
participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for  
restoration of the operating system, software program and hardware drivers to  
the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the  
verification of appropriate functionality of the printer and all Dell-installed  
hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online  
technical support is available at Dell Support. Additional technical support  
options may be available for purchase.  
Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed  
software and peripherals. Support for third-party software and peripherals is  
provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or  
installed through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and  
Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus).  
Online Services  
You can learn about Dell products and services on the following websites:  
www.dell.com/ap (Asian/Pacific countries only)  
www.dell.com/jp (Japan only)  
www.euro.dell.com (Europe only)  
www.dell.com/la (Latin American and Caribbean countries)  
www.dell.ca (Canada only)  
You can access Dell Support through the following websites and e-mail  
addresses:  
•
Dell Support websites  
Appendix  
503  
           
support.euro.dell.com (Europe only)  
•
Dell Support e-mail addresses  
mobile_support@us.dell.com  
support@us.dell.com  
la-techsupport@dell.com (Latin America and Caribbean countries only)  
apsupport@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only)  
•
•
Dell Marketing and Sales e-mail addresses  
apmarketing@dell.com (Asian/Pacific countries only)  
sales_canada@dell.com (Canada only)  
Anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP)  
Log in as user: anonymous, and use your e-mail address as your password.  
Warranty and Return Policy  
Dell Computer Corporation ("Dell") manufactures its hardware products  
from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance  
with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for  
your printer, see support.dell.com.  
Recycling Information  
It is recommended that customers dispose of their used computer hardware, monitors, printers,  
and other peripherals in an environmentally sound manner. Potential methods include reuse of  
parts or whole products and recycling of products, components, and/or materials.  
For specific information on Dell's worldwide recycling programs, see www.dell.com/  
Contacting Dell  
For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-Dell (800-999-3355).  
NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact  
information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, in your Dell catalog.  
504  
Appendix  
             
Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options.  
Availability varies by country and product, and some services may not be  
available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or  
customer service issues:  
1
2
Visit support.dell.com.  
Verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region drop-down  
menu at the bottom of the page.  
3
4
5
Click Contact Us on the left side of the page.  
Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need.  
Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you.  
Appendix  
505  
506  
Appendix  
Index  
Administrator Password, 178  
Alert Tone, 139, 147, 393  
Numerics  
100Base-TX Full-Duplex, 167  
100Base-TX Half-Duplex, 167  
10Base-T Full-Duplex, 167  
10Base-T Half-Duplex, 167  
A
Apply New Settings, 132  
Asset Tag Number, 137  
Authenticate Error Trap, 177  
Auto Clear Alert Tone, 139, 148  
A4, 196  
A5, 196  
About printer, 33  
AC (All Clear) button, 224, 415  
Auto Exposure, 140, 142, 150,  
Address Book, 125, 131, 147,  
179, 374  
Auto Log Print, 140, 148, 395  
Auto Rec Ans/FAX, 292, 382  
Auto Rec Fax, 291, 382  
Address Book Editor, 412  
ADF Cover, 34, 36, 461  
ADF Glass, 455  
Auto Rec TEL/FAX, 291, 382  
Ad-Hoc, 168  
154  
Adjust Altitude, 145, 158, 340,  
401  
Auto Receive Fax, 142, 153  
Auto Receive Tel/Fax, 142, 153  
Auto Regi Adjust, 399  
Adjust BTR, 145, 156, 337, 397  
Adjust ColorRegi, 399  
Adjust Fuser, 145, 156, 338, 398  
Auto Registration  
Adjusting Color  
Registration, 450  
Adjustment, 145, 157  
Auto Reset, 139, 147, 392  
Admin Menu, 374  
Index  
507  
Automatic Document Feeder  
(ADF), 33, 36  
Changing the settings of menu  
Automatic Redialing, 302  
Avoiding Jam, 229, 459  
B
B&W / Color LED, 224  
B5, 196  
From ADF, 461  
From Back of the Printer, 467  
Back button, 224, 415  
Backspace button, 224, 415  
Base memory, 430  
Basic Information, 165  
Basic printer problem, 477  
Blue plug, 48  
Clock Settings, 146, 159  
Coated, 145, 156-157, 337-338,  
397-398  
Bonjour(mDNS), 163, 167  
BTR Refresh, 400  
BTR Refresh Mode, 341  
Color, 140, 142, 150-151, 238,  
Color Button Set, 365  
C
C5, 196  
Cable, 431  
Color Registration Chart, 451  
Color Test Page, 374  
Cancel button, 224, 415  
Canceling a job, 230  
Community Name (Read  
only), 176  
Canceling print job  
From computer, 230  
Community Name  
(Read/Write), 176  
Carbonless copy paper, 191  
CCP, 191  
Community Name (Trap), 176  
508  
Index  
Company Name, 292, 385  
Completed Jobs, 125, 138  
Data LED, 223, 415  
Date & Time, 336, 393  
Configuring Wireless  
Settings, 85  
Connecting Printer, 43  
Connection specification, 43,  
432  
Tool, 123, 126  
Connection type, 43, 432  
Conserving supplies, 439  
Contact Dell Support at, 126,  
131  
Contact Person, 130  
Contacting Service, 500  
Contacts button, 224  
Control Panel Tone, 139, 147  
Copy button, 223  
Policy, 503  
Demo Page, 147  
Details, 137  
Determining Values, 452  
DHCP, 162, 172  
Copy Color Balance, 141, 150  
Copy Defaults, 140, 348  
Copy Problem, 494  
Copy Service Lock Set, 140, 149  
Copy Settings, 141  
Display Popup, 146  
Display Problem, 477  
DL, 197  
Country, 144, 155, 293  
Cover, 136  
Covers, 145, 156-157, 337-338,  
397-398  
DL LEF, 197  
CTD Sensor, 448  
DNS, 162, 172  
Custom Reduce/Enlarge, 150  
Document Feeder Tray, 33, 36  
Document Glass, 36, 455  
Index  
509  
Document Guides, 36  
Document Output Tray, 33  
Document Size, 140, 142,  
150-151, 241, 361, 366  
Ethernet Port, 34, 44  
EWS, 345, 380  
Document Type, 298  
Driver, 25  
Drivers and Utilities CD, 25  
DRPD, 153  
EWS Settings, 166  
Executive, 197  
DRPD Mode, 291  
DRPD Pattern, 143, 154, 292,  
386  
Express Code, 396  
E
ECM, 144, 155, 293, 389  
Edit From Field, 404  
Fax Activity, 144, 155, 293, 374,  
E-Mail Alert, 126, 131, 167, 173,  
380  
E-Mail Alert Settings, 165, 175  
E-Mail Alert Setup, 123  
E-mail Alert Setup Page, 164  
E-Mail Server Settings, 164, 174  
Emulations, 430  
Fax Forward Number, 143, 154  
Fax Fwd Number, 293, 388  
FAX Group, 181  
Encryption, 161, 169  
Entering Values, 453  
Envelope, 145, 156-157, 194,  
337-338, 398  
Fax Group, 182  
Envelope #10, 197  
Environment, 431  
Fax Header, 143, 154, 292, 385  
Fax Header Name, 143, 154  
510  
Index  
Fax Number, 143, 154, 292, 385  
Fax Problems, 494  
Fax Protocol, 144, 155  
Fax Service Lock Set, 140, 149  
Fax Settings, 142, 153, 331, 351,  
381  
FAX Speed Dial, 182  
Fax Transmit, 144, 155, 293  
File Format, 142, 151, 365  
Finding Information, 25  
Firmware Version, 137  
Folio, 197  
ID, 137-138  
Identifying Print Media, 196  
Identifying Print  
Forward Settings, 292, 388  
Front Cover, 33, 461  
Front USB Port, 33  
Infrastructure, 168  
Initialize NIC NVM and restart  
printer, 178  
FTP Client, 163  
Function Enabled, 149, 402  
Fuser, 460  
Fuser Release Lever, 34, 460  
Installing a Toner Cartridge, 442  
Interfaces, 430  
G
IP Address, 130, 162, 171  
IP address, 162  
Gateway Address, 162, 171  
Group Dial, 375  
Group Dialing, 313  
IP Address Mode, 162, 171  
IP Mode, 162, 171  
IPv4, 162, 171-172, 177  
IPv6, 162, 171-172, 177  
H
Host I/F, 138  
Index  
511  
Lighter/Darker, 140, 142,  
J
Jam, 492  
Job History, 147, 374  
Job List, 125, 137  
Job Name, 138  
LLTD, 163  
Job Status, 138  
Job Submitted Time, 138  
Job Time-Out, 140, 148  
Job Time-out, 392  
Job Tone, 139, 147  
Job Type, 138  
Loading Envelope, 207  
217  
Junk Fax Setup, 143, 154, 292,  
353, 384  
Loading Paper, 59  
Loading Print Media, 201  
K
Multipurpose Feeder  
Kensington lock, 37  
Loading Print Media in Priority  
Sheet Inserter (PSI), 66, 211  
L
Label, 144-145, 156-157, 195,  
337-338, 397-398  
LPD, 163, 167, 172, 380  
LCD, 223  
LCD Panel, 225, 415  
Left frame, 130  
Legal, 197  
M
MAC Address, 161, 168  
Maintenance, 439  
Manual Duplex Printing, 218  
Length Guide, 33  
Letter, 197  
512  
Index  
Margin Left/Right, 141-142,  
151-152, 248, 364, 368  
Network Connection Setup, 74  
Network Firmware Version, 137  
Network printing, 69  
Margin Middle, 141-142,  
151-152, 249, 364, 368  
Network Type, 161, 168  
New Password, 149  
Margin Top/Bottom, 141-142,  
151-152, 247, 363, 368  
No carbon required, 191  
No. of Sheets, 138  
Max E-Mail Size, 142, 152  
Max EMail Size, 369  
Memory, 430  
Non-Dell Toner, 145, 159, 341,  
Memory Capacity, 137  
Menu button, 225, 415  
Menu Item, 133  
Numeric keypad, 224  
Menu Settings, 139, 324  
MIB Compatibility, 430  
mm/inch, 140, 148, 395  
Modem Speed, 144, 155, 293,  
389  
Monarch, 197  
Monarch LEF, 197  
MPF Extension, 33  
Multiple Up, 440  
Operating System  
Compatibility, 429  
Operation, 431  
Multiple-Up, 141, 151, 245, 363  
Operator Panel, 33, 223  
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF), 33,  
461  
Optical character  
recognition, 191  
Order Supplies at, 126, 131  
Original Type, 140, 150, 242, 361  
OS, 430  
N
NCR, 191  
Network, 375  
Other Features, 178  
Index  
513  
Out of Paper Tone, 139, 147  
Output Result, 138  
Output Tray, 136  
Parts name, 33  
PDL, 430  
Output Tray Extension, 221  
Owner, 138  
P
Page Display Format, 129  
Panel Alert Tone, 139, 147  
Panel Language, 140, 148, 405  
Panel Lock, 402, 405  
Panel Lock Set, 140  
Panel Settings, 147, 373  
Panel Settings Page, 225  
Paper, 189  
Characteristics, 189  
Curl, 189  
Fiber Content, 190  
Grain Direction, 190  
Moisture Content, 190  
Smoothness, 190  
Weight, 189  
Paper Chute, 34  
Paper Density, 144, 155, 336, 397  
Paper Feed Roller, 34  
Paper jam location, 460  
Paper Type, 198  
Prefix Dial, 143, 155, 293, 388  
Prefix Dial Num, 388  
Prefix Dial Number, 144, 155,  
293  
Premier, 146  
Paper Used, 179  
Print Cartridge Level, 136  
Paper Width Guides, 33  
514  
Index  
Print from USB, 140, 149  
Print Head Cleaning Rod, 33  
Print Media  
Dimensions, 201  
Print media, 189, 440  
Print Quality Guarantee, 431  
Print Quality Problems, 480  
Print Server Reports, 161  
Printing Speed, 136  
Print Server Settings, 125, 131,  
160, 165  
Priority Sheet Inserter (PSI), 33  
Print Server Setup Page, 161  
Print Volume, 125, 131, 179  
Printer Driver Pre-install  
Status, 69  
Protocol Monitor, 293, 374  
Printer Drivers (Macintosh)  
Installing Printer Drivers, 117  
Printer Drivers Installing, 69  
Printer Events, 136  
Printer Information, 126, 131,  
137, 323  
Quick Launch Utility, 410  
Quick Reference Guide, 25  
Printer Jobs, 125, 131, 137  
Printer Maintenance, 155  
Printer Media, 189  
Printer Page Count, 179  
Printer Revision Levels, 137  
Printer Serial Number, 137  
Ready / Error LED, 223, 415  
Rear Cover, 34, 460  
Receive Mode, 142, 153, 291,  
381  
Printer Settings, 125, 131, 138,  
147  
Recommended Paper, 190  
Printer Settings Report, 139  
Recycled, 145, 156, 337-338, 398  
Index  
515  
Recycling Information, 504  
Re-dial / Pause button, 224  
Redial Attempts, 143, 154, 292,  
384  
Ring Tone Volume, 143, 154,  
Redial Delay, 143, 154, 292, 384  
Reduce/Enlarge, 140, 150, 240,  
360  
Re-enter Password, 149  
Refresh, 132  
Safety information, 26  
Refresh Mode, 357  
Scan Service Lock Set, 140, 149  
Scan To Network, 142, 151, 364  
Registration Adjustment, 338  
Regular, 146  
Relative humidity, 431  
Remote Rcv Tone, 292, 385  
Remote Receive, 143, 154, 292,  
384  
Remote Receive Tone, 143, 154  
Removing the Toner  
Cartridges, 441  
Report Page, 232  
Security Settings, 169  
Reports, 146, 327  
Resend Delay, 143, 154, 292, 384  
Reset Defaults, 158, 340  
Reset Print Server, 178  
Reset Wireless, 379  
Security Slot, 34  
Resetting Defaults, 357, 407  
Select Reorder URL, 146  
Selecting Letterhead, 192  
Selecting Paper, 191  
Resolution, 142, 151-152, 298,  
366, 369  
Restore Settings, 132  
Selecting Preprinted Media, 192  
516  
Index  
Selecting Pre-Punched  
Paper, 193  
Sending a Fax, 296  
Sending a Fax  
Status of printer supplies, 439  
Automatically, 299  
Sending a Fax Manually, 300  
Sending print job, 229  
Sent Fax Forward, 143, 154  
Server Address, 184-185  
Service Code, 27  
Service Tag, 27, 396  
Storing Print Media, 196, 229,  
Set Date, 146  
Set Password, 126, 131, 178  
Set Time, 146  
Setting, 439  
Setting Copy Options, 238  
Setting the Printer ID, 287  
Setting the Time and Date, 288  
Setting Your Country, 286  
Setup diagram, 26  
System Settings, 139, 146-147,  
Sharpness, 140, 142, 150, 152,  
244, 362, 367  
SMB Client, 164  
TCP/IP Settings, 162, 171, 328,  
342  
SNMP, 163, 167, 175  
SNMP UDP, 380  
TCP/IP settings page, 124  
TEL Mode, 291  
Software Update, 410  
Speaker Volume, 289  
Speed Dial, 375  
TEL/FAX Mode, 291  
Telephone, 153  
Index  
517  
Telephone/Fax, 153  
Temperature, 431  
USB Port, 404  
USB storage device, 280  
Time Format, 146  
User Setup Disk Creating  
Time Zone, 146  
Time-Out, 163, 173  
Tone/Pulse, 143, 154, 292, 383  
Toner Access Cover, 33  
Toner Refresh, 158, 399  
Top frame, 129  
Transfer Belt, 34  
Transfer Roller, 34  
Transmit Key, 161  
Trap Notification (IP), 177  
Tray 1 Custom Size - X, 146  
Tray 1 Custom Size - Y, 146  
Tray 1 Paper Size, 146  
Tray 1 Paper Type, 146  
WEP 128 Bit ASCII (13  
Bytes), 169  
WEP 128 Bit Hex (26 Bytes), 169  
WEP 64 Bit Hex (10 Bytes), 169  
White Document Cover, 455  
Tray Settings, 126, 131, 146, 186,  
328, 371  
TWAIN, 255  
U
Windows Image Acquisition  
(WIA), 257  
Unacceptable Paper, 191  
UNITED STATES  
Wired Network  
Ethernet, 375  
Initialize NVM, 381  
Protocol, 380  
GOVERNMENT  
RESTRICTED RIGHTS, 22  
USB, 432  
USB port, 34, 44  
Wireless LAN, 167  
518  
Index  
Wireless Settings, 161, 168  
Wireless Setup, 376  
WPA2-PSK AES, 169  
WPA-RSK TKIP, 169  
WSD, 163, 167, 173  
Y
Yellow terminator, 49  
Index  
519  
520  
Index  

Xerox Workcentre Pro 555 User Manual
Xantrex Technology Xc3012 User Manual
Welch Allyn Medical Diagnostic Equipment Scanteam 3470 User Manual
MAKITA XAG11 User Manual
LG LRG3061 User Manual
LG GL182 User Manual
Hampton Bay Sinclair 44 User Manual
EPSON 760HD 02 User Manual
DELL STUDIO 1535 User Manual
CRAFTSMAN 917.293470 User Manual